Table of Contents - Maharashtra€¦ · The borehole-logging methods include Caliper, Fluid conductivity, Resistivity (Lateral, Long-Normal, Short-Normal), Single Resistance, Self-Potential,

GEMS User Manual I

Table of Contents

1. Introduction ............................................................................................................... V

2. File Menu .................................................................................................................... 1

2.1. File ........................................................................................................................... 1 2.2. View ....................................................................................................................... 17 2.3. Tools ...................................................................................................................... 21 2.4. Layers .................................................................................................................... 22 2.5. Utility Customization ........................................................................................... 25

3. Masters ...................................................................................................................... 27

3.1. Masters View ........................................................................................................ 27 3.2. Village Master....................................................................................................... 31 3.3. Lab Details Master............................................................................................... 34 3.4. Bench Mark Location Master ............................................................................. 38 3.5. Watershed Master................................................................................................ 39 3.6. DWLR Master ...................................................................................................... 42 3.7. Monsoon Details ................................................................................................... 43

4. Administration.......................................................................................................... 47

4.1. Change Password ................................................................................................. 48 4.2. Machine Parameter Setting................................................................................. 49 4.3. Machine Workarea Setting ................................................................................. 50 4.4. User Maintenance................................................................................................. 51 4.5. User Workarea Setting ........................................................................................ 54 4.6. Database Backup.................................................................................................. 56

5. Site ............................................................................................................................. 58

5.1. Artificial Recharge Structure.............................................................................. 58 5.2. Hydromet Station ............................................................................................... 109 5.3. Surface Water Site ............................................................................................. 122 5.4. Well...................................................................................................................... 135

6. Dynamic Data ......................................................................................................... 167

6.1. Artificial Recharge Structure............................................................................ 167 6.2. Hydromet Station ............................................................................................... 175 6.3. Well...................................................................................................................... 187

7. Water Quality ......................................................................................................... 202

7.1. Description .......................................................................................................... 202 7.2. Working steps ..................................................................................................... 202

8. Geophysical Exploration ....................................................................................... 214

GEMS User Manual II

8.1. Description .......................................................................................................... 214 8.2. Working Steps .................................................................................................... 214

9. Statistics .................................................................................................................. 248

9.1. Basic Statistics .................................................................................................... 248 9.2. Analysis of Geophysical Parameters ................................................................ 256 9.3. Time Series Analysis .......................................................................................... 258 9.4. Trend Analysis.................................................................................................... 264 9.5. Regression Analysis............................................................................................ 265 9.6. Spectral Analysis ................................................................................................ 266 9.7. Harmonic Analysis ............................................................................................. 268 9.8. Autocorrelation Function .................................................................................. 269 9.9. Multivariate Statistics ........................................................................................ 269 9.10. Correlation........................................................................................................ 270 9.11. Test of Stationarity........................................................................................... 270 9.12. Auto-Correlogram............................................................................................ 271 9.13. One Sample T Test ........................................................................................... 271 9.14. Non-Parametric Tests ...................................................................................... 271 9.15. General Linear Model...................................................................................... 272 9.16. Missing value Computation............................................................................. 272 9.17. Advanced Statistics .......................................................................................... 273

10. Groundwater Assessment..................................................................................... 275

10.1. Extract Spatial attributes ................................................................................ 277 10.2. Assessment Unit Details ................................................................................... 278 10.3. Groundwater Draft .......................................................................................... 281 10.4. Rainfall Recharge Data.................................................................................... 286 10.5. Canal-Reach...................................................................................................... 293 10.6. Canal-Reach-Outlet ......................................................................................... 296 10.7. Cropping Pattern ............................................................................................. 298 10.8. Tanks and Ponds .............................................................................................. 300 10.9. Water Conservation Structures Data............................................................. 303 10.10. Additional Potential Structures and Static Resources................................ 306 10.11. Allocation for Future Domestic And Industrial Uses ................................. 309 10.12. Apportioning................................................................................................... 310 10.13. Ancillary Groundwater Balancing Components......................................... 312 10.14. Estimation of Groundwater Balancing Components.................................. 318 10.15. Extended Resources Assessment................................................................... 321 10.16. Resources Development and Analysis .......................................................... 323

11. Report and Query .................................................................................................. 328

11.1. Reports .............................................................................................................. 329 11.2. Groundwater Assessment Reports Module ................................................... 357 11.3. GIS Reports ...................................................................................................... 370

GEMS User Manual III

11.4. Adhoc Map Query............................................................................................ 375 11.5. Adhoc Oracle Query ........................................................................................ 381 11.6. Adhoc Thematic Maps..................................................................................... 384 11.7. Adhoc Reports .................................................................................................. 387 11.8. Adhoc Maps ...................................................................................................... 395

12. Analysis ................................................................................................................... 399

12.1. Geophysics ........................................................................................................ 400 12.2. Water Level....................................................................................................... 426 12.3. Well Log ............................................................................................................ 434 12.4. Water Quality ................................................................................................... 437 12.5. Grain Size Analysis .......................................................................................... 440 12.6. Rainfall .............................................................................................................. 443

13. Validation................................................................................................................ 445

13.1. Primary ............................................................................................................. 446 13.2. Secondary.......................................................................................................... 454 13.3. Map Validation................................................................................................. 485 13.4. Visual Data Validation..................................................................................... 488

14. Appendix ................................................................................................................. 489

14.1. Appendix – A .................................................................................................... 489 14.2. Appendix - B ..................................................................................................... 492 14.3. Appendix - C..................................................................................................... 501

GEMS User Manual IV

GEMS User Manual V

1. Introduction The “Groundwater Estimation and Management System”, GEMS, provides tools to effectively store, compile, visualize, and analyze spatial, non-spatial hydrogeological and allied attributes, integrate and analyze them for exploration, planning, development and management of groundwater resources. Integration of GEMS with business softwares of multiple domains makes it an exhaustive and complete solution system for groundwater resources evaluation and analysis. The integrated softwares include MapInfo Professional (GIS), Vertical Mapper (interpolation and contouring) and SPSS (statistics). Its linking with Easi/Pace provides functionalities for satellite data pre-processing, analysis, thematic extraction and other integrated geologic analyses. Similarly the linked R2V provides conversion of raster data (satellite images and other images) into meaningful vector data and facilitates their use in the vector GIS, MapInfo Professional. The application facilitates storing spatial and available non-spatial attributes from maps, wherever they are available. However, whenever maps are not available, the system allows manual entry or import from other software applications. The system provides ability to query, process, view and analyze data from across modules. In addition to certain standard map and non-map based queries and reporting, it facilitates creation of ad-hoc maps, reports and thematic maps. The robustness of the system in terms of it functionalities and technology (GIS, Data Conversion, Image Pre-processing and analysis, besides the inherent uncertainty of the Groundwater flow) demanded an extensive on-line help to facilitate user comfortably executing GEMS. The system architecture has been given below. Functional domains of the system are:

Ψ Location and other non-spatial Information – SITE Ψ Water Quality Ψ Geophysical Investigation Ψ Statistical Analysis Ψ Mapping, Surface Interpolation and Contouring Ψ Groundwater Balancing Components, Estimation And Analysis

The basic data used in analysis for the above domains comprises of those from Water Quality, Geophysical Investigation and Groundwater Recharge and Draft components. The GIS tools have been incorporated in all the above modules for capturing data, their integration and analysis. The GIS analysis features and the required data-sets are as follows.

GEMS User Manual VI

Location and Other Non-Spatial Information – SITE SITE is the base module of the GEMS, which maintains the Location and Other Non-Spatial Information pertaining to well (observation, exploratory or piezometric), meteorological, rain-gauge station and artificial recharge structure. All these structures contain location and access details with reference to state, district, tahsil, block, village, basin, sub-basin, watershed, meteorological and /or rain-gauge station, irrigation project, bench mark and other geologic information. Well specific Information includes development details, drill-time, well assembly, subsurface- geology, geophysical signatures, well-hydraulic parameters, and pumping test. The temporal data includes water level, rainfall, evaporation and other atmospheric data of multiple frequencies. A hydrometeorologic station provides daily data of rainfall, temperature, potential evaporation, evapotranspiration and other meteorologic data. Normal rainfall data, computed from historical data and maintained by meteorologic departments are stored for each rain-gauge or hydrometeorologic station. An artificial recharge structure maintains infiltration data in addition to location, area or/and perimeter details. Water quality Water quality has been designed and developed specifically for handling aqueous geochemical data, graphical and numerical interpretations and analysis. The chemistry data is grouped into general details, field parameters, general parameters, cations and anions, bacteriological and biological parameters, pesticides and micro-organics. However, the system facilitates to include any water-quality parameter to any of the above groups. For purged samples, the system facilitates storage of the pump details, storage volume etc. General details include location and accessibility, source, date, depth (in case of groundwater) of sample, sampling type (direct or indirect), device, container, preservation and pre-treatment method adopted, type of monitoring (baseline, trend, trend cum surveillance), laboratory and date of chemical analysis. Field parameters include colour, odour, temperature, pH, EC, DO while the general parameters include the laboratory analyzed pH, EC, TSS, TDS, Turbidity, TH, Total alkalinity, phenolphthalein alkalinity. The cations and anions include Ca, Mg, Na, K, total Fe, carbonate, bicarbonate, hydroxide, chloride, sulfate, nitrate, phosphate, fluoride and sulfide. Very rarely used water quality parameters such as ammonia and nitrogen, silica, boron and colloidal nitrogen are grouped together. In addition to the generally analyzed Bacteriological and biological parameters viz. BOD, COD, chlorophyll A, TOC, coliform and faecal coliform, the system similarly allows adding more entities to this group. The heavy metal group carries all those of the periodic table. Each parameter is validated using

GEMS User Manual VII

standard ionic balancing equations and recommended exceedence values, while storage. Geophysical Investigation Geophysical investigations encompass a broad range of studies and techniques to detect and interpret physical parameters, waves, or fields measured at the earth's surface for the sub-surface characterization. Although these signatures provide fuzzy or ambiguous images of the subsurface, they have proved defining or delineating the three-dimensional geometry of sedimentary basins, young volcanic-tectonic depressions, active or recently active faults, major fault zones, rock contact and analyze allied problems in salt-water intrusion, geothermal, mineral, and hydrocarbon exploration, groundwater modeling, toxic waste dispersion, crustal structure and plate tectonic investigations, and monitoring of deformation and subsurface mass movement associated with volcanic activity, earthquakes, and groundwater extraction. Geophysical module facilitates capturing sounding and profiling data pertaining to Electrical, Magnetic, Electro-magnetic, Gravity and Seismic investigation. The Electrical methods include induced Polarization, Resistivity, Self-potential, Miss-e-la-Masse while the Electromagnetic methods includes VLF and HLEM. Varied electrode configurations are available for different methods of investigations, as given below. The borehole-logging methods include Caliper, Fluid conductivity, Resistivity (Lateral, Long-Normal, Short-Normal), Single Resistance, Self-Potential, Natural Gamma Radioactivity, Neutron, Temperature and Differential Temperature. Groundwater Balancing Components, Estimation And Analysis Groundwater resources estimation involves computation of groundwater recharge/loss from several natural and artificial structures such as rainfall, canals, irrigated fields, tanks, ponds, submerged lands, subsurface inflows and outflows, inter-aquifer flow, evapotranspiration, evaporation, stream-aquifer interflow and inter-watershed flow, and draft components for irrigation, domestic and industrial uses. Different components viz. canal-perimeter, wetted area, Design discharge of an recharge structure, specific yield, rainfall infiltration factor, unit draft of well and those contribute to groundwater recharge or draft are captured from maps or manually entered for estimation of Groundwater recharge and draft. The Groundwater Resources Estimation And Analysis module integrates data from all the available modules in the system and analyzes for estimation of groundwater resources, detection of effective components to groundwater storage change, and targeting potential zones for groundwater exploration and exploitation.

GEMS User Manual VIII

Groundwater resources estimation involves computation of groundwater recharge/loss from several natural and artificial structures such as rainfall, canals, irrigated fields, tanks, ponds, submerged lands, subsurface inflows and outflows, inter-aquifer flow, evapotranspiration, evaporation, stream-aquifer interflow and inter-watershed flow, and draft components for irrigation, domestic and industrial uses. These estimates are further used for analysis of components viz. Net Annual groundwater Availability, Stage of Groundwater Development, Water Table Trend, Allocation of Groundwater for Domestic and Industrial Water Supply, Net Groundwater availability for Future Irrigation Uses and Categorization of areas for scope of Future Groundwater Development. The system provides an exhaustive Vector-GIS based computation of recharge or loss of groundwater from rainfall, evaporation, evapotranspiration are available. Hydraulic parameters including rainfall, water level, evaporation and evapotranspiration of points of a particular time interval are interpolated and contoured. These processed layers along with the controlling variable geology (which describes the Rainfall infiltration factor or Specific yield) are modeled using GIS based overlay analysis to estimate the recharge or loss of groundwater. Multivariate statistical analysis tools are available to detect and prioritize the sensitive groundwater balancing component leading to storage change. The estimated groundwater draft and recharge components of different years are regressed with the independent variable “Storage Change”. The modeling procedure is step-wise removal of insignificant variables and adding new variable into the fitted model of previous step. The final fitted model can be used to predict the storage change for a different year or for a different region of similar hydrogeological conditions. Targeting for potential zones for groundwater resources development and pollution vulnerability analysis uses subjective weight-rank based predictive modeling. The evidence layers (ex. soil, rock type etc) are assigned relative weights and the associated attributes of each layer with a relative rank. Selected specific evidence layers are modeled with a GIS based Overlay analysis whereby the generated discrete objects in the predicted map are estimated. This analysis involves certain pre-processing methods such as conversion of point and line objects into polygons. The point data (water level, rainfall etc) are interpolated, using existing functionalities of Vertical Mapper (viz. Kriging, Triangulation, Inverse Distance Weighting, Bilinear and Natural Neighborhood) and contoured, whereas the line objects (fault, fracture, lineaments etc) are buffered. As topographic elements such as slope, aspect and relief have also a control on the groundwater potential, these parameters are prepared from topographic maps and used in the modeling for targeting groundwater potential zones in resources development and pollution vulnerability analysis.

GEMS User Manual IX

Well/ Borehole Log Well/ borehole Logs provides MapInfo GIS integrated 3D geological data visualization in the form of a Fence and Cross-section of Lithology, stratigraphy, geophysical and geochemical signatures, fracture and fault zone, well assembly and drill-time.

Mapping, Surface Interpolation & Contouring and Spatial analyses The spatial data integration of GEMS is facilitated through its integration with MapInfo Professional. The spatial structure is defined in terms of a point, line or polygon as it is a vector-GIS based application. Integration of Vertical Mapper with the GEMS facilitate in the analysis of data in interpolation and contouring of point data and other trade-area analysis modeling.

Ψ Prominent pre-processing tools viz. Buffer, Clean, Combine, Disperse, Disaggregate, Convert (regions to polylines or vice versa), Smoothening (lines), Split, Combine, and Intersect, Spatial parameter extraction tools viz. Area, Centroid, Distance, length and Perimeter, Mathematical Operators, Logical Operators (And, Or and Not), Geographic Operators (Like, Contains, Contains Entire, Within, Entirely Within, Intersects) have been customized in the application for analysis of above data.

Ψ Spatial query building for extraction of spatial and non-spatial information and spatial operations viz. Overlay, Identity, Union in analyzing multiple layers.

Ψ Thematic mapping comprises of classifying attributes using equal count (frequency), equal range, natural break (clusters), and standard deviation and quantile (using a Probability distribution function).

Ψ Extraction of basic statistics help in a generalization based knowledge extraction. Morphometric studies of the drainage pattern extracts drainage density, drainage frequency and bifurcation ration.

Ψ Interpolation Methods include point and block kriging (Ordinary, Simple and Universal), Triangulation (TIN, Triangulated Irregular Network), Inverse Distance Weighting, Bilinear and Natural Neighborhood.

Ψ Variogram modeling includes manipulation of lag distance and tolerance and analysis of anisotropism. The system facilitates user-defined grid dimension, tolerance for coincident point aggregation, and other required parameters specific to the method of interpolation while model fitting.

Ψ The contouring method (classifying the interpolated values) is user-defined or of equal ranges. The system also provides facility for building slope, aspect and relief maps from topographic contours. The interpolated and classified maps can be further processed and along with a topographic map help create a Digital Elevation Model (DEM) and Digital Terrain Model (DTM).

GEMS User Manual X

Data Export, Import and Transfer The import, export facility is provided for other softwares like Surfer, Modflow, WISDOM and also to standard ASCII format. Import of dynamic data in GWDES format, IMD format, .mdd format, and Digital format is provided for easy and faster conversion of data. The facility to transfer data to higher-level office is provided for faster access to data from different locations. About the Document

This manual is organized for easy navigation by merging some options in one chapter as given below. Each chapter has been described separately. In each chapter, the contents are divided into two sections viz. Description and Working steps. The description section describes the functionality of the module and Working steps provide the help in navigation in hierarchy of menus so that user can access the required facility. In working steps section, the symbols used to describe the movement are mentioned in separate Annexure. Chapter 1: This section covers main menu options File, View, Tools, GIS, Layers and Utility Customisation. Chapter 2: This section covers Master main menu. In Master main menu, facility is provided to create, modify and delete the records in master files, which will be used in the application later on. Chapter 3: This section covers the topics on setting up of Machine Parameters, machine work area, and User work area and user maintenance. Chapter 4: This section covers the description of Site main menu. Data on various sites like Wells, Hydromet Stations, surface water sites, Artificial Recharge Structures can be managed in the section by using addition, deletion and modification facilities in the software. Chapter 5: This section covers Dynamic data main menus and the topics on Rainfall, Water Level data.

GEMS User Manual XI

Chapter 6: This section covers Water Quality data. Chapter 7: This section covers Geophysical Exploration data for the different methods in GEMS. Chapter 8: This section covers Statistical Analysis of the data collected through the previous modules. Chapter 9: This section covers Groundwater Resource Estimation data. Chapter 10: This section covers the generation of various reports (Textual, graphical, Maps, Contour Maps). Chapter 11: This section covers Analysis of Hydrograph, Water Quality data, Geophysical Exploration data, Well logs, Grainsize Analysis. Chapter 12: This section covers different types of validations (Map Validation, Statistical Validation, Visual Data Validation) of different levels (Primary, Secondeary).

GEMS User Manual 1

2. File Menu 2.1. File

This module is used for all file related activities like Opening Map Table stored in the system, Saving Workspace, Saving current Window etc.

Screen 1.1

2.1.1. Open Map Table

2.1.1.1. Description

<Open Map Table> is used to open a Map Table, present in the system. By using this command, the user can view the layers of the selected tables.

2.1.1.2. Working Steps

GEMS User Manual 2

Screen 1.2

• From the <Look in>, search for the location where the file is present. • In <File Name>, enter the name of the file or select the file from the list

of available files. • Click <Open> and the following screen “Browse Table” appears.

Screen 1.3

• From the above screen, select single or multiple tables from the List and

click <OK>. For multiple selections, hold down “Ctrl” key from the keyboard and click on the tables to be selected. The results are displayed in following “Browse Table” screen

GEMS User Manual 3

Screen 1.4

• Click <OK>. The layers can be viewed on the Map as shown below

Screen 1.5

2.1.2. Save Workspace


<Save Workspace> command is used to save the current map at any location in the system.


GEMS User Manual 4

Screen 1.6

• From the <Save in>, search for the location where the file is to be saved. • In <File Name>, enter the name for the file to be saved. • Click <Save>.

2.1.3. Save Window As


<Save Window As> is used to save the current map at any location in the system. <Save Workspace> and <Save Window As> are same. The only difference is that in <Save Window As>, the user can set the size of the current map according to the user’s requirement.


Screen 1.7

• Click <Same as Window>, map gets saved with the current size of the

map.

GEMS User Manual 5

• Click<Custom Size>, then the user can set the size of the map according to the requirement.

• Click <Save> and the following screen “Save Window to File” appears.

Screen 1.8

• From the <Save in>, search for the location where the file is to be saved. • In <File Name>, enter the name for the file to be saved. • Click <Save>.

2.1.4. Map Page Setup


<Map Page Setup> is used for setting the various options related to printing.


GEMS User Manual 6

Screen 1.9

• Select the Paper Size from the Size. • Select the Paper Source from the Source. • Click either <Portrait> or <Landscape> to select the paper orientation. • Set the Left, Right, Top and Bottom Margins. • The user can also set the Printing options by clicking <Printer>.

2.1.5. Map Printing


<Map Printing> is used to print the current Map.


GEMS User Manual 7

Screen 1.10

• Select the Name of the Printer from Name. • Select the Print Range and Number of copies to be printed. • Click <OK>. • To print Map in Tabular Format, click <Options>. The following screen

“Browser Print Options” appears where the user has to specify the number of rows to print.

Screen 1.11

2.1.6. Save As


<Save As> is used for saving the diagrams. This option gets activated in the case of Analysis diagrams. This can be viewed in the following screen

GEMS User Manual 8

Screen 1.12

Note: As it is clear from the above screen that Save As, Print and Print Preview gets activated when the Analysis diagram is generated. It is to be noted that the other Map related options like Open Map Table, Save Workspace etc. gets disabled for the Analysis diagrams.

2.1.7. Print


<Print> is used to print of the Analysis diagrams. The user selects Page Range, Number of copies, Orientation etc in the following screen

GEMS User Manual 9

Screen 1.13

2.1.8. Print Preview


<Print Preview> is used to have a preview of the Analysis diagrams before it is sent for printing. This can be viewed in the following screen.

Screen 1.14

GEMS User Manual 10

2.1.9. Export

<Export> exports data for many other applications. The output data file generated from this option can be used in Surfer, Modflow etc.

Screen 1.20

This menu offers the following command:

GEMS Data Through this the GEMS application data can be exported in csv

format. Geophysical Data Through this the Geophysical Data can be exported in txt

format. To Surfer Through this the data can be exported in a format that can be

used to analyze data through Surfer To Modflow Through this the data can be exported in a format that can be

used to analyze data through Modflow

GEMS User Manual 11

GEMS Data

Screen 1.21

• The user can select the data type from three data types Master data, Time

series Data & Static Data. • Click <Master Data>(By default it is clicked), all the masters’ tables gets

displayed in the Table section .The user can select any table then all the field of that table is displayed in Field section. Choose the field and click <Export>to export the data.

• Click <Time Series> all the options in Selection of Series and Data section gets enabled. The user can click any type of series from the two sections. All the tables related to the clicked series gets displayed in the Table section and on click of any table, the respective fields gets displayed in the Field section. After this click <Export> to export the data.

• Click<Static Data>, all the type of sites gets enabled. The user can click can click any type of site from Selection of Site Type and Details section. Depending on the type of site, tables get displayed in the Tables section and

GEMS User Manual 12

on click of Tables, all the fields get displayed in the Field section. Click <Export> to export the data.

2.1.9.1. Geophysical Data

2.1.9.1.1. Description

This option is used to export geophysical exploration data to a .txt file.

Screen 1.22

2.1.9.1.2. Working Steps

• Select the Adapted Method of Exploration. • Select the administrative boundary, and then select the sites from Site

Name or Site Id. Investigation Ids are displayed. • Select Investigation Ids, and then click <Proceed>. • Data for the selected investigation Ids are exported to the folder c:\Export.

GEMS User Manual 13

2.1.9.2. To Surfer

Screen 1.23 A

User can select the area for exporting the data, by selecting Administration / Hydrology boundaries or Project. User has an option up to block level in Administration boundary, up to Watershed in Hydrology boundary. Based on the boundary or project selection the related sites are selected from the database and displayed in the next screen.

GEMS User Manual 14

Screen 1.23 B

Exports data for use in Surfer Software. The user can export data of

• Water Quality • Water Level • Rainfall • Pumping Test Data

The user has to select the site or sites to export data, date range can also be added to filter the data for a particular period. For water quality, the user again has to choose the parameters to pick up the data. An output file will be generated based on the selection.

2.1.9.3. To Modflow


This option is to export interpolated data (in .grd format) to text files.

GEMS User Manual 15

Screen 1.24 2.1.9.3.2. Working Steps

• Select the input file by clicking <Browse> and then selecting the .grd file. • Specify the output file name and disrectory. • Click <Export In Point Format> to export the file in x,y,z format. • Click <Export In Grid Format> to export the file in grid format. • In the output file 99.9 represent null values.

2.1.10. Log off


<Log off> allows the user to logoff and login as new user.


Screen 1.25

• Click <Yes>, to login as a different user. The logon screen appears again. • Click <No>, the user returns to the application.

2.1.11. Exit

GEMS User Manual 16


<Exit> is used for closing the application.

GEMS User Manual 17

2.2. View

View is used for viewing different toolbar on the screen.

Screen 1.25

2.2.1. Toolbar


This option is used when the user wants to view different tools on the screen. Click <Toolbar> from the View, the user can see various tools on the screen. Tools are basically the shortcuts of various functions present in different menus through this user can switch on and off the toolbar.

2.2.2. Status Bar


Status Bar shows the current status of the application on which the user is working. Through this option the user can switch on and off the status bar.

GEMS User Manual 18

2.2.3. Log File


Logfile is generated by the system and keeps track of all the transactions done in the application, that is, who has Logged in, the User’s Id, Password, Time of login, Time of logout and what all functions the user has performed. This option is enabled when a level 1 or 0 user has logged into application. This option allows the users to view the log file or delete the log file.


Screen 1.26

The user can view, delete and quit from this operation by clicking <View>, <Delete> and <Cancel>.

• <View> option helps the user in viewing all the operations & their corresponding dates i.e. From Date and To Date. Click <View> the entire log file gets displayed as shown below.

GEMS User Manual 19

Screen 1.27

• After the time limit of the log file expires, which is by default 30 days or

is set by the user in the parameter file, the records in the log file are purged after showing a confirmation message.

• Click <Delete> the entries are deleted in the log file after showing the following confirmation message:

Screen 1.28

2.2.4. Refresh Map Data


<Refresh Map Data> refreshes the data on the map.

GEMS User Manual 20

2.2.5. Preferences


<Preferences> helps the user to view only required Well / Hydromet Station/Geophysical Site/Artificial Recharge Structure/Surface Water Sites. Suppose, the user wants to view only Slim Hole Well & Meteorological Station, then only selected locations on the Map Data gets displayed.

Screen 1.29

• To view the required locations, select the required preferences & click on

<Ok>, only the selected types of sites are visible on map.

2.2.6. Data View

Please Refer <Adhoc Reports> of Chapter Reports and Query.

2.2.7. Map Scale Option

GEMS User Manual 21


This option facilitates the user to select the scale of the map. The user can either select the map scale as 1:50000 or 1:250000.


Screen 1.30

• Click <1:50000> or <1:25000>. • Click <Ok>. The screen “Logoff” screen appears. • Logoff from the application and then login again. The scale of the map

changes depending on the user’s selection. 2.3. Tools

Tools menu basically has some tools that can be used by the user. The various tools present in this menu are Calculator, Unit Conversion, Backup and SPSS.

2.3.1. Calculator


<Calculator> can be used for mathematical and scientific calculations. 2.3.2. Unit Conversion


<Unit Conversion> is used when the user wants to convert some data of one unit to another unit.


GEMS User Manual 22

Screen 1.31

• Enter the value in the box specified. • Select the unit from the From Unit from which the value has to be

converted. The To Unit gets filled. • Select the unit from the To Unit to the value it has to be converted. • The user gets the converted value in the specified box.

Note: This calculator is also available on press of F4 in all the numeric fields

2.3.3. SPSS


SPSS is a package used for Statistics. Through this the SPSS software gets invoked from GEMS.

2.4. Layers 2.4.1.1. Description

Layers are used for adding new layers on the current Map. The user can add different layers on the current map depending upon the requirement.


Click Layers , the user can select the layer(s) to be added from the list.

GEMS User Manual 23

Screen 1.32

Suppose, the user adds Tahsil Layer from the Layers. Click on the Layer to be added. The following screen “Selection Criteria” appears.

Screen 1.33

GEMS User Manual 24

• Select the State. The corresponding Districts gets displayed in the District.

• Select one or more than one district. Click <Forward> . • The name of the selected District gets shifted to the Selected District. • Click <OK> and the Tahsil layer can be seen on the map as shown below

in Blue color in the following screen.

Screen 1.34

• Suppose the user wants to remove the displayed layer from the current

Map, and then the user has to select <Remove Tahsil Layer> from the Layers.

• If after selecting District under a particular State, the user wants to change the selected District, then after selecting the District from Selected

District, click <Back> . • Selected District gets unselected and the user can choose another District. • The same procedure can be followed for adding and removing any other

Layer like Add Water Quality Layer, Add Command Layer etc. on the current map.

GEMS User Manual 25

2.5. Utility Customization 2.5.1.1. Description

Utility Customization is used when the user append any executable file (.exe extension) within this application. It means that the user can run any other executable file with this application.


Screen 1.36

• For adding .exe file in the Utility customization, click <Add>. • Utility Tag, Utility Path (…) and Description fields gets activated. • Enter any name for the Utility Tag and the Description of the file.

• Click <Browse> near to the Utility Path i.e. field for searching the executable file present in the system. Open appears and the user can find the desired executable file.

GEMS User Manual 26

Screen 1.37

• After selecting the .exe file, the path/location of the file gets displayed in

the Utility Path field in the disabled mode. • Click <Save> to add the selected file under <Customize>.

Screen 1.38

After exiting from this screen this gets added to Utility Customization and the user can directly use this executable from gems by selecting this option.

GEMS User Manual 27

3. Masters This module allows the user to view and export the master data present in the GEMS. It also allows the user to create a new village, modify an existing village and delete an existing village. 3.1. Masters View 3.1.1.1. Description

Click <Masters View> from Masters, the following screen “Masters View” appears.

Screen 2.1

The above screen is divided in two sections

• Selection: In the Selection section, all types of data are displayed and the user can select only one data.

• Selection of Fields: In Selection of fields section, all the fields related to selected type of data are displayed.

GEMS User Manual 28


• Select the data from “Selection” section. The corresponding fields about the selected Master get filled in “Selection of Fields” section as shown in the following screen “Masters View”.

Screen 2.2

• Select the fields from the list to view. • Click <Next> and the following screen “Masters Data Browser” appears.

GEMS User Manual 29

Screen 2.3

• Click <Export Data> and the following screen “Save as” will appear.

Screen 2.4

• Select the path from “Save in” and enter the file name in “File name”.

Click <Save> to save the file and the following screen “Export” appears.

GEMS User Manual 30

Screen 2.5

• The above screen shows confirmation of successful export with no of

records exported.

• Click <Print> in screen 2.3 and the following screen “Print” appears.

Screen 2.6

• Click <OK> and the following screen “Print” appears.

Screen 2.7

GEMS User Manual 31

• Click <OK> to print all the records.

3.2. Village Master 3.2.1.1. Description

Click <Village> option from General and the following screen “Village Master” appears.

Screen 2.8

Village Master contains the following fields:

• Village ID: This field shows the unique ID for every Village. • Village Name: This field shows the list of all the Villages present in a

Block. • Area of the Village: This field will display area of every Village. If area is

not available, this field will take area as zero (0).


3.2.1.2.1. Add New Village

• Select the State Name, District Name, Tahsil Name and Block Name.

GEMS User Manual 32

• Click <New> to add a new Village. Enter the data for new Village in respective fields.

Screen 2.9

• Click <Save> to save the data.

3.2.1.2.2. Modify Village Data

• Select the State Name, District Name, Tahsil Name and Block Name. • To modify the data for a Village, double click the Village to be modified. • The selected record will be available for modification in respective fields.

The user can modify the data.

GEMS User Manual 33

Screen 2.10

• Click <Save> to save the modified record.

3.2.1.2.3. Delete Village Data

• Select the State Name, District Name, Tahsil Name and Block Name. • Select the Village to be deleted by double clicking on the Village. Check

<Delete>.

GEMS User Manual 34

Screen 2.11

• Click <Delete> to delete the Village and the confirmation message

appears. • If <Yes> is clicked, then the selected Village is deleted, provided it is not

being referred elsewhere. In case it is referred, proper message is prompted that it cannot be deleted, as data exists for this village.

• If <No> is clicked, then the selected Village is not deleted. 3.3. Lab Details Master 3.3.1.1. Description

Click <Lab Details> option present in <Water Quality>, the following screen “Laboratory Details Master” appears

GEMS User Manual 35

Screen 2.12

Lab Details Master contains the following fields:

• Lab Name: This field shows the name of the available Labs • Lab ID: This field shows the unique ID for every Lab Name. • Lab Agency: This field displays the list of Agencies available. • Contact Details: This area will display various fields like State, District,

Address & Phone etc. • Package/Parameter Group: This field will display the list of various

Package/Parameter Groups present. • Parameter: This field displays the list of Parameters present in a

Package/Parameter Group. • Analysis Method: This field displays the list of Analysis Methods that can

be conducted on a Parameter. 3.3.1.2. Working Steps

3.3.1.2.1. Add Lab

• Click <Add> to add a new Lab & its data.

GEMS User Manual 36

Screen 2.13

• Enter the New Lab Name and Lab Details like State, District, Address &

Phone etc. in the relevant fields. Adding Analysis Method Details • An Analysis Method can be added to both new Lab and Existing Lab.

Select the Lab to which an Analysis Method is to be added. Select the Package/Parameter Group from the Package/Parameter Group list. There can be number of Parameters present in one Package/Parameter Group. Select the Parameter from the Parameter list and it displays the available Analysis Method(s) associated with the selected parameters. Select Analysis method from the Analysis Method List.

• Click <Save> for saving the newly added Lab & its details. The details like Parameters and Analysis methods are displayed in a table as shown in the screen “Laboratory Details Master” below:

GEMS User Manual 37

Screen 2.14

Delete Analysis Method from a Lab • Select the Lab from which an Analysis Method is to be deleted. In a Lab

there can be number of Analysis Methods. Select the Analysis Method that is to be deleted by double click.

• Click <Delete> for deleting the selected Analysis Method. the following screen “Confirm” will appear.

Screen 2.15

3.3.1.2.2. Modify Lab Data

• To modify the Lab data, select the Lab from <Lab Agency>. • The relevant fields for the selected Lab gets enabled as shown in the

screen “Laboratory Details Master” below:

GEMS User Manual 38

Screen 2.16

• Modify the record and click <Save> to save the modified record.

3.3.1.2.3. Delete Lab Data

• Select the Lab to be deleted from the <Lab Agency>. • Click <Delete>and a confirmation message appears as shown in the

screen “Confirm” below:

Screen 2.17

• If <Yes> is clicked, then the selected Lab is deleted. • If <No> is clicked, then the selected Lab is not deleted.

3.4. Bench Mark Location Master 3.4.1.1. Description

Bench Mark Location Master contains the following fields:

GEMS User Manual 39

• Bench Mark Location ID: This field displays the ID for every Bench Mark Locations.

• Bench Mark Location Name: This field shows the list of Bench Mark Locations.


• Click <Bench Mark Location Master> option in <General>, the following screen “Bench Mark Location Master” appears.

Screen 2.17

• Click <Add> to add a new Bench Mark Location and its details • Click <Save> to save the record. • Click <Cancel> to refresh the screen

3.5. Watershed Master 3.5.1.1. Description

Watershed Master contains the following fields: • Watershed Name: This field shows the list of all the Watersheds present. • Watershed ID: This field shows the unique ID for every Watershed. • Watershed Area: This field will display area of every Watershed.

GEMS User Manual 40


Click <Watershed Master> option present in <General> the following screen “WaterShed Master” appears.

Screen 2.18

3.5.1.2.1. Add Watershed

• Click <New> to add a new Watershed.

Screen 2.19

• Enter data into the relevant fields for the new Watershed.

GEMS User Manual 41

• Click <Save> for saving record. 3.5.1.2.2. Modify Watershed

• To modify the data for a Watershed, double click on the selected Watershed.

• The selected record is available for modification in respective fields.

Screen 2.20

• Click <Save> to save the modified record.

3.5.1.2.3. Delete Watershed

• Select the Watershed to be deleted by double clicking on that Watershed. Check <Delete>.

GEMS User Manual 42

Screen 2.21

• Click <Delete> and a confirmation message appears. • If <Yes> is clicked, then the selected Watershed is deleted, if not being

referred elsewhere. In case of its reference, proper message is prompted. • If <No> is clicked, then the selected Watershed is not deleted.

3.6. DWLR Master 3.6.1.1. Description

DWLR Master contains the following fields: • DWLR ID: This field displays the unique ID for every Lithology Name. • DWLR Make: The make of DWLR. • DWLR Model: The model of the DWLR. • DWLR Data Format: The format of data supported. • DWLR Name: The list of all the existing Lithology Names and their

Patterns. • DWLR Version: The version of DWLR.

GEMS User Manual 43

Screen 2.22


Click <DWLR Master> option in <General> the following screen “DWLR Master” appears.

3.6.1.2.1. Add DWLR Model

• Click <Add New DWLR Model> and enter the data in relevant fields. • Click <Save> to save the data.

3.6.1.2.2. Add DWLR Make

• Click on <Add New DWLR Make> and enter the data in relevant fields • Click <Save> to save the data.

3.7. Monsoon Details 3.7.1.1. Description

Monsoon Details contain the following fields • State Name: State name in which the assessment unit lies. • Assessment Unit Type : Assessment unit i.e. whether it is block, tahsil or

watershed. • Presentation Unit Type: Presentation unit type for assessment unit type. • Pre Dominant Monsoon: Pre dominant monsoon month in that area where

the assessment unit lies. • Pre-Monsoon: Pre-monsoon month for the area.

GEMS User Manual 44

• Post Monsoon: Post-monsoon month for the area. • Monitoring Period: Pre-monsoon and post-monsoon period required for

monitoring. • Dry Season Intervals: Dry-season intervals for the area. • Crop Water Requirement: Water requirement for different types of crops. • Water Level Trend: Water level trend of the area. • Monitoring Months: Check boxes for all the months.

Screen 2.23


Click <Monsoon Details> option in General the following screen “Monsoon Details” appears:

3.7.1.2.1. Add Monsoon Details

• Select State Name, Assessment Unit Type, Predominant Unit Type, Predominant Monsoon, Pre Monsoon and Post Monsoon.

• Enter data in the relevant fields. • Check the months to select Monitoring months • Click <Save> to save the details.

GEMS User Manual 45

Screen 2.24

3.7.1.2.2. Modify Monsoon Details

• Select State Name and all the details of the Sate is filled in respective fields.

• Modify the data and click <Update> to save the details.

GEMS User Manual 46

Screen 2. 25

GEMS User Manual 47

4. Administration

Administration module is used to Change Password, set Machine Parameter Setting, Machine Workarea Setting, User Workarea Setting, User Maintenance and take Database Backup as shown below.

Screen 3.1

Some commonly used terms and definitions.

• Machine and Machine ID: The application is installed at a site where

there is typically a database server and clients attached to the server. The database server is referred as machine, provided with a unique Machine ID. The clients attached to the machine or database server use the Machine ID.

• Machine Workarea: Machine Workarea refers to the area, assigned to a particular site by the Administrator. It depends on the Administrative and Hydrological Boundaries.

• User ID: The Administrator for a particular user creates an unique User ID.

• User Workarea: User Workarea refers to the area, assigned to a particular user by the Administrator.

GEMS User Manual 48

• Master Database: It consists of minimum data required for running the application.

4.1. Change Password 4.1.1. Description:

<Change Password> is used for changing the password of the logged-in user. The password is stored in an encrypted form. A valid password has 6-8 alphanumeric characters with the first character as an alphabet.

4.1.2. Working Steps:

Only logged-in users can change their password. Click Administration and then click <Change Password>. The following screen “Change Password” appears.

Screen 3.2

• The name of the user is displayed and the user has to enter both existing

and the new password. The new password has to be re-entered in confirmation section.

• Click <Save> to save the data. • If the User ID, Old Password, New Password and Confirm New Password

are valid, the corresponding changes are made in the database and the user exits from the screen.

• An error message is displayed if the user’s entry of the Old Password is wrong OR if the New Password and Confirm New Password do not match with each other OR if the password is not valid.

• Click <Cancel> to exit from the screen and returns to the main menu without modifying the password.

GEMS User Manual 49

4.2. Machine Parameter Setting 4.2.1. Description:

<Machine Parameter Setting> is used for setting-up the Machine Parameter for a particular site. Only the Administrator can create a new Machine ID unique for every site. Therefore, no two Machine IDs can be same. This option is available only to the users of Level 0. It enables the user to set all the parameters of the machine at the time of installating the machine.


Click Administration and then click <Machine Parameter Setting>. The following screen “Machine Parameter Setting” appears.

Screen 3.3

Click <Modify Settings> to modify all details except Machine ID, remains disabled.

GEMS User Manual 50

4.3. Machine Workarea Setting 4.3.1. Description:

<Machine Work Setting> is used to assign workarea for a particular machine (site). Workarea can be set on the basis of either Administrative Boundary or Hydrological Boundary or Both.


Click Administration and then click <Machine Workarea Setting>. The following screen “Machine WorkArea Setting” appears.

Screen 3.4

• In case <Administrative Boundary> is checked, the user can set the

boundary on the basis of States/Districts/Tahsils/Blocks in the selection tree and save this workarea. In such a case (when only Administrative Boundary is selected), all the Basins/Sub-Basins/Watersheds belonging to the states selected are made available to this machine workarea.

• Select State, District, Tahsil, Block from the respective list.

• Click • The selected State, Tahsil, Block populates in the tree structure. • Click <Save> • In case <Hydrological Boundary> is checked, the user selects

Basins/Sub-Basins/Watershed into the selection tree and save this

GEMS User Manual 51

workarea. In such a case (when only Hydrological Boundary is selected), all the States/Districts/Tahsils/Blocks belonging to the Basins selected are made available to this machine workarea.

• Select Basin, Sub-Basin, and Watershed from the respective list.

• Click • The selected Basin, Sub-Basin, and Watershed populates in the tree

structure. • Click <Save> • In case, both <Administrative Boundary> and <Hydrological

Boundary> are checked, filtering is made on the basis of the first selection criterion that is whether <Administrative Boundary> or <Hydrological Boundary> is checked first.

• If the user first checks <Administrative Boundary> , all the states are listed and the user can select any number of states and corresponding Districts/Tahsils/Blocks into the Administrative Selection tree.

• Basins are listed based upon the states selected in the Administrative tree. Only those basins appear, which belong to the states selected in the Administrative tree.

• Similarly, in case, the user first checks <Hydrological Boundary>, all the basins are listed and the user can select any number of Basins and corresponding Sub-Basins/Watersheds into the Hydrological Selection tree.

• States are listed based upon the basins selected in the Hydrological tree. Only those States appear, which belong to the Basins selected in the Hydrological tree.

• <Cancel> restores the original work area • <Exit> is used for exiting the screen.

4.4. User Maintenance 4.4.1. Description:

<User Maintenance> is used for the creation of new users, modification of details of users, deleting users or revoking deleted users for a site.


Click Administration and then click <User Maintenance>. The following screen “User Maintenance” appears.

GEMS User Manual 52

Screen 3.5

4.4.2.1. Add New User

• Click <New>.

Screen 3.6

• Enter User ID, User level, User Name and Password in the corresponding

fields. • Click <Save> to save the newly created User ID for that particular

machine.

4.4.2.2. Modify User

• Select User Id

GEMS User Manual 53

Screen 3.7

• Modify the User Name and Password for that user • Click <Save>

4.4.2.3. Delete User

• Select the User ID to be deleted • Click <Delete>. • The user is asked to confirm the deletion of selected User ID. The

following confirmation message appears:

Screen 3.8

• Click <Yes> to delete the user. (Click <No> to cancel the delete

operation) • To see the deleted User ID, the user can check <Show deleted User>

(this option shows only deleted User Ids).

GEMS User Manual 54

Screen 3.9

4.4.2.4. Revoke User

• In case, the user wants to restore a deleted User ID to the User ID list, the user needs to select that deleted User ID and click <Revoke>.

• <Revoke> option helps in restoring the deleted User ID, reflected in the User ID list.

Screen 3.10

4.5. User Workarea Setting 4.5.1. Description:

<User Workarea Setting> is used to assign workarea for the users. User Workarea Setting is always a subset of the Machine Workarea Setting.


Click Administration and then click <User Work Setting>. The following screen “User Workarea Setting” appears.

GEMS User Manual 55

Screen 3.11

Workarea can be set on the basis of either Administrative Boundary or Hydrological Boundary or Both. Workarea is set for the User Id selected. In User Workarea all the User Ids available, are of lower level than the level of the logged in User Id (i.e. the User Id with which the user has logged into the application). This is because a higher level user can change the work area of lower level users.

• In case <Administrative Boundary> is checked, the user can select some

States/Districts/Tahsils/Blocks into the selection tree and save this workarea. In such a case (when only <Administrative Boundary> is checked), all the Basins/Sub-Basins/Watersheds belonging to the states selected are made available to this user workarea. In this case, the user has a choice of selecting states from the list of all states appearing in the State list box from Machine Workarea.

• Select State, District, Tahsil, Block from the respective list.

• Click • The selected State, Tahsil, Block populates the tree structure. • Click <Save> • In case <Hydrological Boundary> is checked, the user can select some

Basins/Sub-Basins/Watershed into the selection tree and save this workarea. In such a case (when only Hydrological Boundary is selected), all the States/Districts/Tahsils/Blocks belonging to the Basins selected are made available to this user workarea.

GEMS User Manual 56

• Select Basin, Sub-Basin, and Watershed from the respective list.

• Click • The selected Basin, Sub-Basin, and Watershed populate the tree structure. • Click <Save> • In case, both <Administrative Boundary> and <Hydrological

Boundary> are checked, filtering is made on the basis of the first selection criterion that is whether <Administrative Boundary> or <Hydrological Boundary> is checked first.

• If the user first checks <Administrative Boundary> first, all the states are listed from Machine Workarea and the user can select any number of states and corresponding Districts/Tahsils/Blocks into Administrative Selection tree.

• Basins are listed based upon the states selected in the Administrative tree. Only those basins appear, which belong to the states selected in the Administrative tree.

• Similarly, in case, the user first checks <Hydrological Boundary>, all the basins are listed from the Machine Workarea and the user can select any number of Basins and corresponding Sub-Basins/Watersheds into Hydrological Selection tree.

• States are listed based upon the basins selected in the Hydrological tree. Only those States appear, which belong to the Basins selected in the Hydrological tree.

• <Cancel> restores the original work area • <Exit> is used for exiting the screen.

4.6. Database Backup 4.6.1. Description:

This is used for taking database backups.

GEMS User Manual 57

Screen 3.12


Three types of backups can be taken:

• Database System Backup – Takes backup of all Control Files, Redo Log Files and Table Spaces. Starts backup after shutting down the database. For this option, also a (OS) user/password for the database machine is required.

• Full Backup – Takes backup of all Table Spaces of all the users from the database.

• Application Database Backup - Takes backup of all Table Spaces of all the users required for GEMS (viz. CGWBDEV, CGWB and CGWBREP) from the database.

The backup directory path is, by default, shown in the Backup Directory. The user can change this directiry, if required. The backup file is created in that directory. Click <Proceed> to start backup.

GEMS User Manual 58

5. Site This module facilitates the entry of basic and specific data related to a site. The Site is used to create new sites namely artificial recharge structure, hydromet station, surface water site and well. The Site is also used to update, delete and relocate the existing sites.

5.1. Artificial Recharge Structure 5.1.1. Description

Artificial Recharge Structure is man-made structure used to recharge the ground water potential of an area. <Artificial Recharge Structure> allows the user to create a new artificial recharge structure and modify, delete, relocate the data for an existing structure. In addition to this, the user can add, modify and delete the data by clicking an object on the map as described in section 4.1.2.6 and 4.1.2.7. This option helps in adding the data related to structure type like cement plug, injection well (both bore and tube type), nallah bund, percolation tank, recharge shaft. It also allows the user to enter other structure specific details based upon structure type.


Click Site and then click <Artificial Recharge Structure>.

GEMS User Manual 59

Screen 4.1

The following screen “Selection Of Artificial Recharge Structure” appears.

Screen 4.2

GEMS User Manual 60

The above screen displays the list of all artificial recharge structures within the user’s work area with the last created structure highlighted. If the user is creating the structure first time, the above screen is blank with <Add New Structure> enabled. However, if the <Add New Structure> is clicked along with the selected structure then the data of the selected structure is carried to all the screens for creation of new structure and the user can make the required changes. The following screen appears for adding the data about the structure.

• Location • General • Topography • Hydrology • Hydrogeology

The same screens can also be used to modify the data for existing structures.

5.1.2.1. Add New Structure

• Select the Structure Type to be added. The type of structure can be

cement plug, injection well, nallah bund, percolation tank and recharge shaft.

• Select the Structure Sub Type. In this case only injection well has the sub-type – bore and tube.

• Select the State. The District gets enabled and is filled with the districts corresponding to the selected state.

• Select the District. The Tahsil/Taluka gets enabled and is filled with the tahsil/talukas corresponding to the selected district.

• Select the Tahsil/Taluka. The Block/Mandal gets enabled and is filled with the block/mandals corresponding to the selected tahsil/taluka.

• Select the Block/Mandal. The Village/Town gets enabled and is filled with the village/towns corresponding to the selected block/mandal.

• Select the Village/Town. • Click <Add New Structure> to proceed to the “Location” screen for

creating a new Artificial Recharge Structure.

Note: The user can select Administrative Boundaries in the “Location” screen also and the Structure Type and Structure Sub Type in “General” screen. In this case, click <Add New Structure> to proceed to the “Location” screen for creating a new structure.

GEMS User Manual 61

Screen 4.3

Validations (Screen 4.3)

• Latitude Degree should be greater than or equal to 4 and less than 40. The range of minutes and seconds should be between 0 to 59 (both end points included)

• Longitude Degree should be greater than or equal to 68 and less than 100. The range of minutes and seconds should be between 0 to 59 (both end points included)

Enter the Administrative Boundary, Geographic Location and Other Details. Toposheet Number is generated based on the latitude and longitude values. Click <Next> and the following screen “General” appears.

Note: (*) Marked fields are mandatory.

GEMS User Manual 62

Screen 4.4

Structure Id is generated by the system based upon the latitude and longitude entered on “Location” screen and is unique. Structure Name is the same as the village name the user can edit it. Enter the general details in relevant enabled fields, and click <Next>, the following screen “Topography” appears.

GEMS User Manual 63

Screen 4.5


• Surface Elevation of GL of Site/ Gauge should range: –10 to 8858 meters. • Distance to Bench Mark should range: 0 to 100000 meters. • Bench Mark Direction should range: 0 to 360°.

Note: If <Data Available on Area Capacity Curve> is checked and the type of structure selected is nallah bund / percolation tank / cement plug, then “Area Capacity Curve” screen appears in structure specific details of that particular structure.

Enter the topographical details in the relevant fields and click <Next>, the following screen “Hydrology” appears.

GEMS User Manual 64

Screen 4.6

Validation (Screen 4.6)

• Distance of Nearest Raingauge Station should range: 0 to 100 kms.

Working Steps • By default Basin Name, Sub-Basin Name, Minor Basin Name/Watershed

and Structure Lies In are selected from the map. If map is not available, a message stating that the respective layer is not available and the user has to select it from respective fields, is displayed.

• If Structure Lies In selected is command or poor ground water, then only Irrigation Project Name gets enabled and on its selection Main Canal Command Name gets enabled and on selecting, Distributary Name gets enabled.

• Raingauge Station Maintaining Agency Name is displayed corresponding to the raingauge station selected.

• Select Nearest Monitoring Station Name. • Enter the hydrological details. • Click <Next>, the following screen “Hydrogeology” appears.

GEMS User Manual 65

Screen 4.7

• By default Local Geology, Regional Geology, Soil Type, Local

Geomorphology and Regional Geomorphology are picked from the map. If the map is not available, a message stating that the respective layer is not available and the user has to select it from respective fields, is displayed.

• Enter the hydrogeology details and click <Finish>, a message appears

asking for the specific details. Click <Yes> to enter the specific details and click <No> if the user does not want to enter specific detail at that time and return to the “Selection Of Artificial Recharge Structure” (Screen 4.2). Hence, a new artificial recharge structure is created and can be seen in the list of structures on “Selection Of Artificial Recharge Structure” (Screen 4.2) and also on map.

• <Structure Specific Details>, <Add New Structure>, <Modify>,

<Delete>, <Relocate>, <Refresh> and <Exit> get enabled on the screen “Selection Of Artificial Recharge Structure” (Screen 4.2) for all types of structures.

• <Grain Size Data>, <Geophysical Logging Data>, <Pumping Test Data>, <Spillway Data> and <Infiltration Test Data> get enabled depending upon the type of structure selected and accordingly the details are entered.

GEMS User Manual 66

5.1.2.2. Structure Specific Details

Structure specific details of a particular structure can be entered as follows.

Select the Structure Name / Structure ID / Old Structure ID from the list of structure and click <Structure Specific Details> on screen “Selection Of Artificial Recharge Structure”.

Screen 4.8

5.1.2.2.1. Recharge Shaft – Specific Details

GEMS User Manual 67

Screen 4.9

Enter details related to recharge shaft.

5.1.2.2.2. Injection Well – Specific Details

In this case <Geophysical Logging Data> and <Pumping Test Data> gets enabled apart from other buttons and if sub type is tube then <Grain Size Data> also gets enabled in the screen “Selection Of Artificial Recharge Structure” (Screen 4.2). If <Structure Specific Details> is clicked, then the following screen “Specific Details – Injection Well (Bore) – Drilling Details” appears.

GEMS User Manual 68

Screen 4.10

The following tabs in this screen can increase and decrease according to the structure sub type.

• Drilling Details • Development Details • Drill Time Log • Litholog • Water Bearing Zones • Construction Details (if sub type is bore) • Well Assembly (if sub type is tube) • Grouting / Sealing / Cement Packing (if sub type is tube) • Preliminary Yield Test • Aquifer Performance Test • Step Drawdown Test • Geophysical Logging • Grain Size Analysis (if sub type is tube)

Explanation of various tabs

GEMS User Manual 69

Drilling Details Validations (Screen 4.11)

• Start Date and End Date cannot be future dates and Start Date should be

less than or equal to the End Date. • Drilled Depth should be greater than or equal to Construction Depth.

Screen 4.11

Development Details Validations (Screen 4.12)

• Final Discharge should be greater than or equal to the value of last Discharge entered in the dynamic records.

• The sum of Static Water Level and Final Drawdown should be less than Drilled Depth.

• Silt Content is enabled in the case if structure sub type is tube. Silt Content should range: 0 to10 %.

GEMS User Manual 70

• Date (From) and Date (To) cannot be future dates and Date (From) should be less than equal to Date (To).

Screen 4.12

• For adding a new record, enter the relevant details and click <Save>. • For modifying a record, double click the record, the data gets populated in

the respective fields, make the relevant changes and click <Save>. • For deleting a record, double click the record from the list, check

<Delete> and click <Save>. • Records are sorted in ascending order of Date (From).

Drill Time Log Validations (Screen 4.13)

• Bit size should be reducing according with increasing depth. • Depth From should be less than or equal to Depth To.

GEMS User Manual 71

Screen 4.13


the respective fields, make the relevant changes and click <Save>. • For deleting a record, double click the record from the list and check

<Delete> and click <Save>. • The records are sorted according to the Activity, and Depth From.

Litholog

GEMS User Manual 72

Screen 4.14


the respective fields, make the relevant changes and click <Save>. • For deleting a record, double click the record from the list and check

<Delete> and click <Save>. • The records are sorted in ascending order of Cumulative Depth. • Bedrock Reached is enabled if the sub type of the structure is tube. • If the <Bedrock Reached> is checked, then the last Cumulative Depth is

displayed in the Depth of Bedrock.

Water Bearing Zones Validations (Screen 4.15)

• Depth From should be less than or equal to Depth To.

GEMS User Manual 73

Screen 4.15

• For adding a new record, enter the relevant details and click <Save>. • For modifying a record, double click the record, the data get populated in


<Delete> and click <Save>. • The records are sorted in ascending order of Depth (From).

Construction Details Validations (Screen 4.16)

• Depth of Casing should be less than Drilled Depth. • Height of Casing should range: 0 to 5 magl.

GEMS User Manual 74

Screen 4.16

• Enter the construction details in the relevant fields.

Well Assembly Validations (Screen 4.17)

• Depth From should be less than or equal to Depth To • Depth To should be less than Drilled Depth entered earlier in the screen

“Drilling Details”. • Depth From and Depth To values for a new record should not overlap

with the existing records i.e. Depth From value for a new record should be greater than or equal to the Depth To value of the last entered record.

• Diameter decreases as Depth increases. • Size should range: 0 to 50 mm. • Open Area should range: 0 to 25 %.

GEMS User Manual 75

Screen 4.17

• If Assembly Description selected is slotted then Slot Type, Size and Open

Area gets enabled, otherwise it is disabled. • For adding a new record, enter the relevant details and click <Save>. • For modifying a record, double click the record, the data gets populated in


<Delete> and again click <Save>. • The records are sorted in ascending order of Depth From.

Grouting / Sealing / Gravel Packing Validations (Screen 4.18)

• Depth From should be less than or equal to Depth To. • Depth To should be less than Drilled Depth entered earlier in the screen

“Drilling Details”.

GEMS User Manual 76

Screen 4.18

• For adding a new record, enter the relevant details and click <Save>. • If the Material selected is gravel, then Roundedness and Average Size

gets enabled. • For modifying a record, double click the record, the data gets populated in


<Delete> and click <Save>. • The records are sorted in ascending order of Depth From.

Preliminary Yield Test Validations (Screen 4.19)

• Sum of Static Water Level and Drawdown should be less than Drilled Depth.

• Date cannot be a future date. • Temperature should range : – 4ºC to + 60 ºC.

GEMS User Manual 77

• Discharge should range : 0 to 500 lps.

Screen 4.19

Click <Dynamic Data> to add dynamic data. The following screen “Dynamic Data For Preliminary Yield Test” appears. Dynamic Data For Preliminary Yield Test Validations (Screen 4.20)

• Time in Minutes Since Test Started cannot exceed the Time Duration

entered on the screen “Preliminary Yield Test” (Screen 4.19). • Water level cannot be greater than the Drilled Depth.

GEMS User Manual 78

Screen 4.20



<Delete> and click <Save>. • The records are sorted in ascending order of Time.

Aquifer Performance Test (APT) Validations (Screen 4.21)

• Start Date cannot be future date. • Static Water Level should be less than or equal to Drilled Depth entered

in screen “Drilling Details”. • Discharge should range: 0 to 500 lps. • Temperature should range: 0 to 100 °C. • Diameter of Suction Pipe should be greater than the Diameter of Delivery

Pipe. • Horse Power should range: 0 to 20.

GEMS User Manual 79

Screen 4.21

• Select the Type of APT. This can be either pumping and recovery or slug. • Click <Add New Test> to enter the record for a particular test. • The relevant fields get enabled, enter the data in the enabled fields and

click <Save> for saving the record. • A Test Id gets generated for that particular test. Test Id gets displayed as a

combination of Start Date and Start Time of the test. • The user can enter as many records (tests) for the selected Type of APT. • For entering the next record, click <Add New Test> and perform the

same steps as above. The user can enter Water quality Data for a particular Test by clicking <Add Water Quality Data>. The following screen “Sample Details” appears.

GEMS User Manual 80

Screen 4.22

For more details about adding water quality data, refer to Chapter 6 Water Quality.

The user can modify the data entered on the screen “Aquifer Performance Test” (Screen 4.21) for an already entered test.

• Select the Type of APT. • Test Id gets enabled and is filled with the corresponding Test Ids. • Select the Test Id to be modified. • All the data get displayed in the respective fields in disabled mode. • Click <Modify>. All the data in disabled mode, get enabled. The user can

modify the data according to the requirement. • Click <Save> for saving the changes.

The user can enter dynamic data for an existing test in the following steps:

• Select the Type of APT. • Test Id gets enabled and is filled with the corresponding Test Ids. • Select the Test Id for which Dynamic Data is to be entered. • All the data get displayed in the respective fields in disabled mode. • Click <Dynamic Data> the following screen “Dynamic Data For Aquifer

Performance Test” appears

Dynamic Data For Aquifer Performance Test

GEMS User Manual 81


• If the user clicks <Pumping> then the Time (in min) Since Pump Started should be less than or equal to the Pumping Duration already entered on the screen “Aquifer Performance Test” (Screen 4.21).

• If the user clicks <Recovery> then the Time (in min) Since Pump Started should be greater than or equal to the Pumping Duration already entered on the screen “Aquifer Performance Test” (Screen 4.21).

• Water Level should less than or equal to the Drilled Depth.

Screen 4.23

To enter data in the above screen.

• Select the Main/Observation Well Id and Name. The Main and Observation Well Id and Name is filled with the Main Well Id and Name where the pumping device is installed. In case, some observation wells are also attached with the main well then the observation well id and name of all the observation wells also get displayed along with the main well id and name.

• Click either <Pumping> or <Recovery>. • Enter the data in the enabled fields for the selected main/observation well.

GEMS User Manual 82

• Click <Save> for saving the data for the selected main/observation well. • Sorting of data is done in ascending order of Time and Water Level. • Drawdown is a calculated field. It is calculated as the difference between

Water Level and Static Water Level. The user can also enter the result of analysis for a test.

• Select the Type of APT. • Test Id gets enabled and is filled with the corresponding Test Ids. • Select the Test Id for which result is to be entered. • All the data get displayed in the respective fields in disabled mode. • Click <Result> and the following screen “Result of Analysis” appears.

Result of Analysis Validations (Screen 4.24)

• Specific Yield should range: 0 to 1.

Screen 4.24

The data in the above screen can be entered as

• Select the Method of Analysis. • The fields corresponding to the selected method get enabled. • Enter the data and click <Save> to save the record.

Step Drawdown Test

GEMS User Manual 83


• Start Date cannot be a future date. • Static Water Level should be less than or equal to Drilled Depth. • Temperature should range: 0 to 100 °C. • Diameter of Suction Pipe should be greater than the Diameter of Delivery

Pipe. • Horse Power should range: 0 to 20. • Time Duration cannot be greater than the Pumping Duration under the

heading Step Drawdown Test Static Data. • Discharge should range between: 0 to 500 lps. • The maximum number of records (that is Step No) in Result of Analysis

is dependent on the value entered in the No. of Steps under Step Drawdown Test Static Data.

Screen 4.25

To enter data in the above screen

• Enter the relevant data in the fields related to Step Drawdown Test Static Data.

GEMS User Manual 84

• Click <Save> for saving the Step Drawdown Test Static Data. • Step No. is generated and is dependent on the value entered in No. of

Steps under the heading Step Drawdown Test Static Data. • The user can enter the records by entering data in the enabled fields

related to Result of Analysis and click <Save> for saving the record. • If the Number of records entered is equal to the No. of Steps, Well Loss

Coefficient and Aquifer Loss Coefficient are displayed on the screen. • Specific Drawdown is a calculated field. It is calculated as:

Specific Drawdown = Corrected Drawdown Discharge

• The user can modify the data entered under Step Drawdown Test Static Data by clicking <Modify>, all the related fields get enabled; the user can make the changes and click <Save> to save the data.

The user can view the details of a particular step as described below

• Select the step no for which the details are required by double clicking on the record in Screen “Step Drawdown Test” (Screen 4.25).

• The data related to that record is displyed in the fields below and <Details> gets enabled.

• Click <Details> the following screen “Dynamic Data For Step” appears. Dynamic Data For Step Validations (Screen 4.26)

• Water Level should be less than or equal to Drilled Depth.

GEMS User Manual 85

Screen 4.26

In the above screen, the user can enter dynamic data for selected step (record).

• Step No. remains constant for a step. • Enter the values in the enabled fields for dynamic data and click <Save>

for saving the record. • For modifying a record, double click the record, the data gets populated in

the respective fields, make the relevant changes and click <Save>. • Sorting of records is done in ascending order of Time.

The user can enter water quality data for the step drawdown test. All the steps are same as discussed earlier in aquifer performance test. On Screen “Step Drawdown Test” (Screen 4.25) the <Graph> gets enabled after all the records have been entered to the specified limit i.e. No. of Steps. Click <Graph>, the following Screen “Specific Drawdown Vs. Discharge Graph” appears

GEMS User Manual 86

Screen 4.27

Geophysical Logging Validations (Screen 4.28)

• Temperature should range: – 60º to + 60º C • Depth From should be less than or equal to Depth To • Depth To should be less than Drilled Depth entered earlier on the Screen

“Drilling Details” (Screen 4.11). • Logging Date cannot be a future date.

GEMS User Manual 87

Screen 4.28

• Enter the details regarding Logging Agency, Instrument 1, Instrument 2,

Logging Date, Mud Resistivity, Depth From etc. and click <Save>. • For making changes in any existing record, click <Modify> and do the

changes required and then click <Save>, the Logging Methods gets enabled. This can be seen in the following screen “Geophysical Logging” (Screen 4.29).

GEMS User Manual 88

Screen 4.29

Select the Logging Method. Depending upon the Logging Method selected, the relevant fields required for the method are displayed as shown in the following screen “Geophysical Logging” (Screen 4.30).

GEMS User Manual 89

Screen 4.30

• For adding a new record, enter the data in the enabled fields and click

<Save>. • For modifying a record, double click the record, the data gets populated in

the respective fields, make the relevant changes and click <Save>. • For deleting a record, double click the record, check <Delete> and click

<Save>. • Records are sorted in ascending order of Depth. • Corrected Depth is a calculated field and is calculated as

Corrected Depth = Depth – Depth Correction With respect To SP. The <Add Logging Recommendation > is used when the user wants to add interpreted data. This interpretation is based on lithology and geophysical logging. Click <Add Logging Recommendation>, the following screen “Geophysical Log Recommendation” appears.

GEMS User Manual 90

Screen 4.31

Grain Size Analysis Validations (Screen 4.32)

• Depth From should be less than or equal to Depth To • Depth To should be less than Drilled Depth entered earlier in the Screen

“Drilling Details” (Screen 4.11). • Date for conducting grain size analysis test cannot be a future date.

GEMS User Manual 91

Screen 4.32


• Click <ASTM> or <BSS> to choose the standard of sieve. • Click <Add New Sample>, Standard, Sample Details and Weight

Retained gets enabled. • Sample ID is generated and is unique for each sample. • Enter the data and click <Compute>. • Percent Weight Retained is generated. It is calculated as:

Percent Weight Retained = Weight Retained X 100 Weight

• Click <Save> to save the data.

5.1.2.2.3. Percolation Tank – Specific Details

In this case <Spillway Data> and <Infiltration Test Data> get enabled apart from other buttons. If <Structure Specific Details> is clicked, then the following screen “Specific Details – Percolation Tank – Catchment Area Details” appears.

GEMS User Manual 92

Screen 4.33

The following tabs are present in case of percolation tank.

• Catchment Area Details • Embankment Details • Area And Capacity Curve Details • Infiltration Test • Spillway Details

Explanation for various tabs.

Catchment Area Validations (Screen 4.34)

• Area should be less than or equal to Catchment Area. • Number of records cannot be greater than Order of the Stream.

GEMS User Manual 93

Screen 4.34

• Enter the data and click <Save> the relevant fields get enabled. • For adding a new record, enter the data in given fields, which are enabled

and click <Save>. • For modifying a record, double click the record, the data gets populated in


<Delete> and click <Save>. • Relief Ratio, Circulatory Ratio, Form Factor, Elongation Ratio,

Bifurcation Ratio and Drainage Density are calculated fields. These are calculated on the basis of data entered by the user.

Relief Ratio = Maximum Relief / Maximum Length Circulatory Ratio = (Area of microwatershed) / (Area of circle with radius same as that circle having perimeter same as perimeter of microwatershed) Form Factor = (Area of microwatershed)/ (Maximum Length * Maximum Length)

GEMS User Manual 94

Elongation Ratio = (Diameter of the circle whose area is the same as area of microwatershed) / Maximum Length Bifurcation Ration = Number of 1st order stream / Number of 2nd order stream Drainage Density = Total Length of Stream /Area of microwatershed

Embankment Details Validations (Screen 4.35)

• Downstream Side Slope and Upstream Side Slope should range: 0 to 100%.

Screen 4.35

Enter the data in the relevant fields for the Embankment Details. Area And Capacity Curve Details

GEMS User Manual 95

This tab is available if the user has checked <Data Available on Area Capacity Curve> on the screen “Topography” (Screen 4.5). Validations (Screen 4.36)

• RL of GL increases with Height of Gauge, i.e., as the height increases RL of GL should also increase.

• Capacity increases with Height of Gauge, i.e., as the height increases capacity should also increase.

• Capacity should be less than the Storage capacity entered on the screen “Embankment Details” (Screen 4.35).

• Area increases with Height of Gauge, i.e., as the height increases Area should also increase.

Screen 4.36

For entering records in the above screen.

• For adding a new record, enter the data in given fields and click <Save>. • For modifying a record, double click the record, the data gets populated in

the respective fields, make the relevant changes and click <Save>.

GEMS User Manual 96

• For deleting a record, double click the record from the list and check <Delete> checkbox and click <Save>.

• Records are sorted in ascending order of Height of Gauge.

Spillway Details

Screen 4.37

Enter the data in the fields for spillway details. Infiltration Test Validations (Screen 4.38)

• Date cannot be a future date. • Time Interval should be greater than 0 and less than or equal to No. Of

Minutes Test Conducted.

GEMS User Manual 97

Screen 4.38

• Click <Add New Test>, Test Id is system generated which is unique for

each Infiltration Test. • Enter the No. of Minutes Test Conducted, select the Instrument Used,

Date and Time and click <Save>, Time Interval and Cumulative Volume Infiltrated fields get enabled.

• For adding a new record, enter the data in the enabled fields and click <Save>.

• For modifying a record, double click the record, the data gets populated in the respective fields, make the relevant changes and click <Save>.

• For deleting a record, double click the record from the list, check <Delete> and click <Save>.

5.1.2.2.4. Nallah Band or Cement Plug – Specific Details

In this case <Infiltration Test Data> gets enabled apart from other buttons. If <Structure Specific Details> is clicked, then the following screen “Specific Details – Nallah Bund – Catchment Area Details” or “Specific Details – Cement Plug – Catchment Area Details” appears.

GEMS User Manual 98

Screen 4.39

The following tabs are present in case of nallah band or cement plug.

• Catchment Area Details • Embankment Details • Area And Capacity Curve Details • Infiltration Test

Explanation for various tabs. Catchment Area Details Validations (Screen 4.40)

• Area should be less than or equal to Catchment Area. • Number of records cannot be greater than Order of the Stream.

GEMS User Manual 99

Screen 4.40

• Enter the data and click <Save> to save the static data, the relevant fields

get enabled in dynamic data. • For adding a new record, enter the data in given enabled fields and click

<Save>. • For modifying a record, double click the record, the data gets populated in


<Delete> and click <Save>. • Relief Ratio, Circulatory Ratio, Form Factor, Elongation Ratio,

Bifurcation Ratio and Drainage Density are calculated fields. These are calculated on the basis of data entered by the user.

Relief Ratio = Maximum Relief / Maximum Length Circulatory Ratio = (Area of microwatershed) / (Area of circle with radius same as that circle having perimeter same as perimeter of microwatershed)

GEMS User Manual 100

Form Factor = (Area of microwatershed) / (Maximum Length * Maximum Length) Elongation Ratio = (Diameter of the circle whose area is the same as area of microwatershed) / Maximum Length Bifurcation Ration = Number of 1st order stream / Number of 2nd order stream Drainage Density = Total Length of Stream /Area of microwatershed.

Embankment Details

Screen 4.41

Enter the data in the relevant fields for the embankment details. Area And Capacity Curve Details This Tab is only available if the user has checked <Data Available on Area Capacity Curve> on the screen “Topography” (Screen 4.5).



• RL of GL increases with Height of Gauge, i.e., as the height increases RL of GL should also increase.

• Capacity increases with Height of Gauge, i.e., as the height increases capacity should also increase.

• Capacity should be less than the Storage Capacity entered on the screen “Embankment Details” (Screen 4.41).

• Area increases with Height of Gauge, i.e, as the height increases area should also increase.

Screen 4.42

To enter data in above screen.

• For adding a new record, enter the data in given fields and click <Save>. • For modifying a record, double click the record, the data gets populated in


<Delete> and click <Save>.


• Records are sorted in ascending order of Height of Gauge.

Infiltration Test Validations (Screen 4.43)

• Date on which infiltration test is conducted cannot be a future date. • Time Interval should be greater than 0 and less than or equal to No. Of

Minutes Test Conducted.

Screen 4.43

• Click <Add New Test>, Test Id is system generated which is unique for

each infiltration test. • Enter the No. of Minutes Test Conducted, select the Instrument Used,

Date and Time and click <Save> the static data gets saved and Time Interval and Cumulative Volume Infiltrated fields get enabled.

• For adding a new record, enter the data fields enabled and click <Save>. • For modifying a record, double click the record, the data gets populated in

the respective fields, make the relevant changes and click <Save>.



5.1.2.3. Modify Structure

This enables the user to modify an existing data pertaining to the selected artificial recharge structure.

• Select the Artificial Recharge Structure Id /Artificial Recharge Structure

Name / Old Artificial Recharge Structure Id. On selecting data from any one field Structure Id or Structure Name or Old Structure Id, the corresponding data in the other two fields also gets selected.

• The Administrative Boundaries corresponding to the selections are filled up in the disabled mode. All the buttons get enabled.

• Click <Modify>, the screen “Structure Details –Location” appears. Modify the details of the existing artificial recharge structure. There are five tabs in this dialog box namely “Location”, “General”, “Topography”, “Hydrology” and “Hydrogeology”.

Screen 4.44

Note: To refresh the screen “Selection Of Artificial Recharge Structure” (Screen 4.2) click <Refresh>, all the Artificial Recharge Structure Id / Artificial


Recharge Structure Name / Old Artificial Recharge Structure Id gets deselected and the Structure Type gets enabled.

5.1.2.4. Delete Structure

• Select the Artificial Recharge Structure Id /Artificial Recharge Structure

Name/ Old Artificial Recharge Structure Id. On selecting data from any one Structure Id or Structure Name or Old Structure Id, the corresponding data in the other two fields also get selected.

• The Administrative Boundaries corresponding to the selections are filled up in the disabled mode. All the buttons gets enabled.

o Click <Delete> to delete the selected artificial recharge structure. A screen appears for confirmation of deletion. The user has to click <Yes> to confirm the deletion or else click <No> to cancel the deletion.

5.1.2.5. Relocate Structure

This is used to change the location of the structure. Click <Relocate> on the screen “Selection Of Artificial Recharge Structure” (Screen 4.2) the following screen “Relocate” appears. The user can change the administrative boundary or the geographic location of the artificial recharge structures or both.

Screen 4.55


• Select State, District, Tahsil/Taluka, Block/Mandal, Village/Town where the artificial recharge structure is to be relocated

• Enter the Latitude and Longitude where the artificial recharge structure is to be relocated

• Click <Save>, artificial recharge structure is relocated to the new location.

5.1.2.6. Add Artificial Recharge Structure - Map.

Screen 4.56

• Click <Add Artificial Recharge Structure On Map> from toolbar • Click on the point in the map where the artificial recharge structure has to

be created. The following screen appears showing the information about the latitude and longitude where the user has clicked and is to confirm whether at this point the user wants to create the artificial recharge structure.


Screen 4.57

• If the user clicks <No> then he can click on any other point to get the

accurate latitude and longitude where the structure has to be created. • Click <Yes> the screen “Location” appears, the administrative boundary

is picked from the maps on the basis of selected latitude and longitude.

Screen 4.58

Then the user can follow the steps described in Add New Structure (Sec 4.1.2.1) to fill the details for all the screens.

5.1.2.7. Modify Artificial Recharge Structure - Map


Screen 4.59

• Select <Select> from toolbar. The following screen appears.

Screen 4.60

• Click <OK> and select the artificial recharge structure from the map

whose data is to be modified as shown in the figure below. • Click <Select Site from Map> from toolbar.


Screen 4.61

The following screen “Selection Of Artificial Recharge Structure” appears showing the artificial recharge structure selected by the user. The user can Click <Modify> and follow steps to modify the data as described in Modify Structure (Sec. 4.1.2.4).

Screen 4.62


5.2. Hydromet Station 5.2.1. Description

<Hydromet Station> allows the user to add a new hydromet station, modify the data for an existing hydromet station, delete an existing hydromet station and relocate an existing hydromet station.


Click Site and then click <Hydromet Station>.

Screen 4.63

The following screen “Selection of Hydromet Station” appears.


Screen 4.64

• The above screen displays the list of all hydromet stations within the

user’s work area with the last created hydromet station highlighted. If the user is creating the hydromet station first time, the above screen is blank with <Add New Hydromet Station> enabled. However if the <Add New Hydromet Station> is clicked along with selected station then the data of the selected hydromet station is carried to “Location” screen for creation of new hydromet and the user can make the required changes. The screen “Location” appears for adding the relevant data about the station. The same screen can also be used to modify the data for existing station.

• The <Add New Hydromet Station> is highlighted by default and all the

other buttons are also enabled.

• By clicking <Refresh> all the other buttons get disabled except <Add New Hydromet Station>. The Hydromet Station Id / Hydromet Station Name / Old Hydromet Station Id gets deselected and the Type of Hydromet Station and State gets enabled as shown in the following screen “Selection Of Hydromet Station” (Screen 4.65).


Screen 4.65

5.2.2.1. Add New Hydromet Station

• Select the Type of Hydromet Station to be added. The type of structure

can be raingauge station or meteorological station. • Select the State. The District gets enabled and is filled with the districts

corresponding to the selected state. • Select the District. The Tahsil/Taluka gets enabled and is filled with the

tahsil/talukas corresponding to the selected district. • Select the Tahsil/Taluka. The Block/Mandal gets enabled and is filled

with the block/mandals corresponding to the selected tahsil/taluka. • Select the Block/Mandal. The Village/Town gets enabled and is filled

with the village/towns corresponding to the selected block/mandal. • Select the Village/Town. • Click <Add New Hydromet Station> to proceed to the “Location”

screen for creating a new Hydromet Station.

Note: The user can select Administrative Boundaries and the Type Of Hydromet Station in the “Location” screen also. In this case, directly click <Add New Hydromet Station> to proceed to the “Location” screen to add a new station.


Screen 4.66





• The Administrative Boundary and Type of Hydromet Station is filled up with the values that were selected in the screen “Selection of Hydromet Stations” (Screen 4.65). If no selection was made in that screen then select State, District, Tahsil/Taluka, Block/Mandal, Village/Town and Type of Hydromet Station.

• Enter Latitude (Degree, Min, Sec) and Longitude (Degree, Min, sec). • Click on the Toposheet No. The toposheet number is calculated on the

basis of the latitude and longitude entered. This can be edited if required. • Enter Old Hydromet Station Name


• Enter Hydromet Station Name. This name has to be unique for a particular hydromet station. By default the village name is populated here.

• Basin, Sub Basin and Watershed reflects the corresponding basin, sub-basin and watershed from the map. In absence of map data select Basin, Sub Basin and Watershed.

• Select Area Type and Agency Name. • Select the Date of Establishment of the hydromet station • Select Exposure Details • Enter the Hamlet / Wadi, Khasra No., Mohalla / Sector, Khasra No., Soil

Thickness, Area of Influence, Altitude, Locational Details and Access Details.

• If the area is under notification then check <Area Notified> • Click <Save>, a new Hydromet Station Id is generated which is unique

for each station and the user returns to the screen “Selection of Hydromet Station” (Screen 4.65) with the last created hydromet station shown as selected.

• Click <Cancel> to cancel the entered data and quit the process. 5.2.2.2. Modify Hydromet Station

• Select the Hydromet Station Id / Hydromet Station Name / Old Hydromet

Station Id in the screen “Selection of Hydromet Station” (Screen 4.65).On selecting data from any one field Hydromet Station Id or Hydromet Station Name or Old Hydromet Station Id, the corresponding data in the other two fields also get selected.

• The Administrative Boundaries corresponding to the selections are filled up in disabled mode. All the buttons get enabled.

• Click <Modify> to modify the details in the screen “Location” (Screen 4.66). In modify mode the user cannot change the Administrative Details, Type of Hydromet Station, and Geographic Location. These are in disabled mode. The user is allowed to change the Hydrologic Details, Hydromet Station Name, Old Hydromet Station Id and Other Details of a hydromet station

• Click <Save> to save modifications and the user returns to the screen “Selection of Hydromet Station”.

• Click <Cancel>, the modifications are not saved and the user returns to the screen “Selection of Hydromet Station”.

5.2.2.3. Delete Hydromet Station


• Select the Hydromet Station Id / Hydromet Station Name / Old Hydromet Station Id to be deleted in the screen “Selection of Hydromet Station” (Screen 4.65).

• On selecting data from any one field Hydromet Station Id or Hydromet Station Name or Old Hydromet Station Id, the corresponding data in the other two field also gets selected.


• Click <Delete> to delete the selected hydromet station. A screen appears for confirmation of deletion. Click <Yes> to confirm the deletion or else Click <No> to cancel the deletion.

5.2.2.4. Normal Data for Hydromet Station

Normal data can be added for the selected hydromet station by clicking <Add Normal Data>. The following screen “Normal Hydromet Data” appears. Validations (Screen 4.66)

• Rainfall should range: 0 to 500 mm. Rainfall cannot be left blank if No of Rainy Days is entered. Similarly, No of Rainy Days cannot be left blank if Rainfall is entered.

Screen 4.67


To enter data in the above screen. • Enter the data in the enabled fields. • Intensity gets calculated after entering the required data. • Click <Save> to save the normal data for a selected the station.

Monsoon / Non-Monsoon Data

• Monsoon and Non Monsoon Rainfall data is computed in mm on the basis of the data entered for given monsoon period.

• No of Days for monsoon and non-monsoon period is computed on the basis of data entered and displays the number of rainy days for Monsoon/Non-Monsoon period.

• Intensity is computed and displays the intensity of rainfall in mm/day. It is calculated as

Intensity = Rainfall / No. of rainy days Annual

• Annual Rainfall is computed and displays the total annual rainfall in mm. • No of Days for which the rain has occurred in the year is computed and

displays the annual number of rainy days for which the data is taken. • Intensity is computed and displays the annual intensity of rainfall in

mm/day. It is calculated as Annual Intensity = Annual Rainfall / Annual No. of rainy days

5.2.2.5. Add Full Climatic Station Data

The <Add Full Climatic Station Data> is enabled if the type of hydromet station is meteorological station. Click <Add Full Climatic Station Data> in the screen “Normal Rainfall Data” the following screen “Full Climatic Station Data” appears. Validations (Screen 4.68)

• Temperature (Minimum and Maximum) should range: – 600 C to + 600 C • Potential Evaporation should range: 0 to 3000 mm/month. • Wind Speed should range: 0 to 500 km/hr. • Wind Direction should be either N / S / E / W or NE / NW / SE / SW or

(N / S >00 and 900 < E / W) etc. For e.g. N300W or S450E. • No of Sunshine Hours should range: 0 to 15. • Potential Evapo-Transpiration should range: 0 to 3000 mm/month. • Relative Humidity (At 8:30 & 17:30) should range: 0 to 100 %.


• Soil Moisture should range: 0 to 100 %.

Screen 4.68

Note: The user can enter either monthly or annual data. To enter monthly data

• Click <Monthly> the Month gets enabled. • Select the Month for which the data is to be entered. • Click <Save> to save the data entered in this screen. • Click <Next Month> to enter the data for the next month. The user can

view and modify the existing data • If the user clicks <Exit> without clicking <Save> the entered data is not

saved and if <Exit> is clicked after <Save> the entered data is saved and the user returns to the screen “Normal Hydromet Data” (Screen 4.67).

To enter annual data

• Click <Annual> and enter the data. • Click <Save> to save the data entered in this screen.


• If the user click <Exit> without clicking <Save> the entered data is not saved and if <Exit> is clicked after <Save> the entered data is saved and the user returns to the screen “Normal Hydromet Data” (Screen 4.67).

5.2.2.6. Relocate Hydromet Station

Relocate is used to change the location of a hydromet station. The user can change the administrative boundary or the geographic location of the hydromet station or both. Click <Relocate> on the screen “Selection of Hydromet Station” (Screen 4.65), the following screen “Relocate” appears.

Screen 4.69

• Select State, District, Tahsil/Taluka, Block/Mandal, Village/Town where

the hydromet station is to be relocated • Enter the Latitude and Longitude where the hydromet station is to be

relocated • Click <Save>, hydromet station is relocated to the new location.

5.2.2.7. Add Hydromet Station - Map


Screen 4.70

• Click <Add Hydromet Station On Map> from toolbar • Click on the point in the map where the hydromet station has to be created

The following screen appears showing the information about the latitude and longitude where the user has clicked and is to confirm whether at this point the user wants to create the hydromet station.

Screen 4.71

• If the user clicks <No> then the user can click on any other point to get

the accurate latitude and longitude where the station has to be created. • Click <Yes> the screen “Location” appears, the administrative boundary



Screen 4.72

Then the user can follow the steps described in Add New Hydromet Station (Sec 4.2.2.1) to fill the details for the entire.

5.2.2.8. Modify Hydromet Station - Map


Screen 4.73

Click <Select> from toolbar. The following screen appears.

Screen 4.74

• Click <OK>, select the hydromet station from the map whose data has to

be modified. • Click <Select Site from Map> from toolbar.


Screen 4.75

• The screen “Selection of Hydromet Station” appears showing the

Hydromet Station selected by the user. Click <Modify> and repeat the steps to modify the data as described in Modify Hydromet Station (Sec. 4.2.2.2).


5.3. Surface Water Site 5.3.1. Description

<Surface Water Sites> allows the user to create a new surface water site, modify, delete and relocate an existing surface water site.

5.3.2. Working Steps

Click Site and then click <Surface Water Site>.

Screen 4.76

The following screen “Selection of Surface Water Sites” appears.


Screen 4.77

The above screen displays the list of all surface water sites within the users’ work area with the last created site highlighted. If the user is creating the site first time, the above screen is blank with <Add New Site> enabled. However, if the <Add New Site> is clicked along with selected site then the data of the selected site is carried to all the screens for creation of new site and the user can make the required changes. The following screens appear for adding the relevant data about the site.


The same screens can also be used to modify the data for existing site. 5.3.2.1. Add New Site

• Select the Site Type to be added. The type of site can be canal water,

industrial effluent, municipal waste water, river water, tanks / ponds water, treated sewage water, etc.

• Select the State. The District gets enabled and is filled with the districts corresponding to the selected state.


• Select the District. The Tahsil/Taluka gets enabled and is filled with the tahsil/talukas corresponding to the selected district.

• Select the Tahsil/Taluka. The Block/Mandal gets enabled and is filled with the block/mandals corresponding to the selected tahsil/taluka.

• Select the Block/Mandal. The Village/Town gets enabled and is filled with the village/towns corresponding to the selected block/mandal.

• Select the Village/Town. • Click <Add New Site> to proceed to the “Location” screen to create a

new surface water site.

Note: The user can select Administrative Boundaries in the “Location” screen also and the Site Type in “General” Screen. In this case, directly click <Add New Site> to proceed to the “Location” screen to add a new Site.

Screen 4.78





Enter the Administrative Boundary, Geographic Location and Other Details. Toposheet Number is generated based on the latitude and longitude values. Click <Next>, the following screen “General” appears.

Note: (*) Marked fields are mandatory.

Screen 4.79

Site Id is generated by the system based upon the latitude and longitude entered on “Location” screen and is unique. Site Name is same as the village name. The user can edit it. Enter the general details in relevant fields, which are enabled and click <Next>, the following screen “Topography” appears.


Screen 4.80


• Surface Elevation of GL of Site should range: –10 to 8858 meters. • Distance to Bench Mark should range: 0 to 100000 meters. • Bench Mark Direction should range: 0 to 360°.

Enter the topographical details in the relevant fields and click <Next> the following screen “Hydrology” appears.


Screen 4.81

By default Basin Name, Sub-Basin Name, Minor Basin Name/Watershed and Site Lies In are picked from the Map. If the map is not available a message stating, the respective layer is not available the user has to select from respective fields. If Site Lies In selected is Command or Poor Ground Water, then Irrigation Project Name gets enabled and on its selection Main Canal Command Name gets enabled and on selecting, Distributary Name gets enabled. Enter the hydrological details and click <Next>, the following screen “Hydrogeology” appears.


Screen 4.82

By default Geology is picked from the Map. If the map is not available a message stating the respective layer is not available the user has to select from the fields. Enter the hydrogeological details and click <Finish>. Hence, a new surface water site is created and can be seen in the list of sites on “Selection of Surface Water Sites” (Screen 4.77) and also on map. <Add New Sites>, <Modify>, <Delete>, <Relocate>, <Refresh> and <Exit> gets enabled on the screen “Selection of Surface Water Sites” (Screen 4.77) for all types of sites.

5.3.2.2. Modify Site

This enables the user to modify the existing data of the selected surface water site.

• Select the Surface Water Site Id / Surface Water Site Name / Old Surface Water Site Id. On selecting data from any one field Site Id or Site Name or Old Site Id, the corresponding data in the other two fields also get selected.

• The Administrative Boundaries corresponding to the selections are filled up in the disabled mode. All buttons are enabled.


• Click <Modify> to proceed to the screen “Site Details –Location” which allows the user to modify the details of the existing surface water site. There are five tabs in this screen namely “Location”, “General”, “Topography”, “Hydrology” and “Hydrogeology”.

Screen 4.83

Note: To refresh the screen “Selection of Surface Water Sites” (Screen 4.77) click <Refresh> all the Surface Water Site Id / Surface Water Site Name / Old Surface Water Site Id gets deselected and the Site Type gets enabled.

5.3.2.3. Delete Site

• Select the Surface Water Site Id / Surface Water Site Name/ Old Surface

Water Site Id. On selecting data from any one field Site Id or Site Name or Old Site Id, the corresponding data in the other two fields also get selected.

• The Administrative Boundaries corresponding to the selections are filled up in the disabled mode. All buttons are enabled.

Click <Delete> to delete the selected surface water sites. A screen appears for confirmation of deletion. Click <Yes> to confirm the deletion or else click <No> to cancel the deletion.


5.3.2.4. Relocate Site

This is used to change the location of the site. Click <Relocate> on the screen “Selection of Surface Water Sites” (Screen 4.77) the following screen “Relocate” appears. The user can change the administrative boundary or the geographic location of the surface water sites or both.

Screen 4.84


the surface water site is to be relocated • Enter the Latitude and Longitude where the surface water site is to be

relocated • Click <Save>, surface water site is relocated to the new location.

5.3.2.5. Add Surface Water Site - Map


Screen 4.85

• Click <Add Surface Water Site On Map> from toolbar • Click on the point in the map where the surface water site is to be created.

The following screen appears showing the information about the latitude and longitude where the user has clicked and is to confirm whether at this point the user wants to create the surface water sites.

Screen 4.86

• If the user clicks <No> then he can click on any other point to get the

accurate latitude and longitude where the site has to be created. • Click <Yes> the screen “Location” appears, the administrative boundary



Screen 4.87

Then the user can follow the steps described in Add New Site (Sec 4.3.2.1) to fill the details of all the screens.

5.3.2.6. Modify Surface Water Site - Map


Screen 4.88

• Click <Select> from Toolbar. The following screen appears.

Screen 4.89

• Click <OK> and select the surface water site from the map whose data is

to be modified. • Click <Select Site from Map> from toolbar.


Screen 4.90

• The following Screen “Selection of Surface Water Sites” appears showing the surface water site selected by the user.

• Click <Modify> and follow the steps to modify the data as described under Modify Site (Sec. 4.3.2.2).

Screen 4.91


5.4. Well 5.4.1. Description

<Well> allows the user to create a new well and modify, delete, relocate the data for an existing well. In addition to this, user can add, modify and delete the data by clicking on the map as described in section 4.4.2.6 and 4.4.2.7. This option helps in adding the data related to well type like bore well (exploratory, piezometer and observation), dug well, dug cum bore well, slim hole, spring, tube well (exploratory, piezometer and observation). It also allows the user to enter other well specific details based upon the well type.


Click Site and then click <Well>.

Screen 4.92

The following Screen “Selection of Well” appears.


Screen 4.93

The above screen displays the list of all wells within the users’ workarea with the last created well highlighted. If the user is creating the well first time, the above screen is blank with <Add New Well> enabled. However, if the <Add New Well> is clicked along with the selected well then the data of the selected well is carried to all the screens for creation of new well and the user can make the required changes. The following screens appear for adding the relevant data about the well.


The same screens can also be used to modify data for existing well. 5.4.2.1. Add New Well

• Select the Well Type. The type of well can be bore well, dug cum bore

well, dug well, slim hole, spring and tube well. • Select the Well Sub Type. In this case only the bore well and tube well

has the sub-type – exploratory, observation and piezometer. • Select the State. The District gets enabled and is filled with the districts

corresponding to the selected state. • Select the District. The Tahsil / Taluka gets enabled and is filled with the

tahsil / talukas corresponding to the selected district.


• Select the Tahsil / Taluka. The Block / Mandal gets enabled and is filled with the block / mandals corresponding to the selected tahsil / taluka .

• Select the Block / Mandal. The Village / Town gets enabled and is filled with the village / towns corresponding to the selected block / mandal.

• Select the Village / Town. • Click <Add New Well> to proceed to the “Location” screen for creating a

new well. Note: The user can select Administrative Boundaries in the “Location” screen also and the Well Type and Well Sub Type in “General” Screen. In this case, directly click <Add New Well> to proceed to the “Location” screen for creating a new well.

- Screen 4.94


• Latitude Degree should be greater than or equal to 4 and less than 40. The range of minutes and seconds should be between 0 to 59 (both end points included).

• Longitude Degree should be greater than or equal to 68 and less than 100. The range of minutes and seconds should be between 0 to 59 (both end points included).


Enter the Administrative Boundary, Geographic Location and Other Details. Toposheet Number is generated based on the latitude and longitude values. Click <Next> the following screen “General” appears. Note: (*) marked fields are mandatory.

Screen 4.95

Validation (Screen 4.95)

• Horse Power should range: 0 to 25.

Well Id is generated by the system based upon the latitude and longitude entered on “Location” screen and is unique. Well name is the same as the village name the user can edit it. Installation Date and Horse Power is enabled only if the Lifting Device is some pump (except hand pump). Enter the general details in relevant fields, which are enabled and click <Next>, the following screen “Topography” appears.


Screen 4.96


• Height of Measuring Point should range: –1 to 5 meters. • Surface Elevation of GL of well should range: –10 to 8858 meters. • Distance to Bench Mark should range: 0 to 100000 meters. • Bench Mark Direction should range: 0 to 360°.

Enter the topographical details in the relevant fields and click <Next>, the following screen “Hydrology” appears.


Screen 4.97


• Distance of Nearest Rain gauge Station should range: 0 to 100 kms. Working Steps

By default Basin Name, Sub-Basin Name, Minor Basin Name/Watershed and Well Lies In are picked from the Map. If the map is not available a message stating the respective layer is not available the user has to select from the fields. If Well Lies In selected is Command or Poor Ground Water, then only Irrigation Project Name gets enabled and on its selection Main Canal Command Name gets enabled and on selecting, Distributary Name gets enabled. Raingauge Station Maintaining Agency Name is shown corresponding to the raingauge station selected.

• Enter the hydrological details and click <Next>, the following screen “Hydrogeology” appears.


Screen 4.98

• By default Local Geology, Regional Geology, Land Use, Soil Type, Local

Geomorphology and Regional Geomorphology are picked from the map. If the map is not available, a message stating the respective layer is not available the user has to select from respective combo is displayed and the user has to select the appropriate values. Enter the Hydrogeological Details and click <Finish>, a message appears asking for the specific details. Click <Yes> to enter the specific details and click <No> if user does not want to enter specific detail at that time and returns to the screen “Selection of Well” (Screen 4.93). Hence, a new well is created and can be seen in the list of wells on “Selection of Well” (Screen 4.93) and also on map.

<Well Specific Details>, <Add New Well>, <Modify>, <Delete>, <Relocate>, <Refresh> and <Exit> get enabled on the screen “Selection of Well” (Screen 4.93) for all types of well. <Grain Size Data>, <Geophysical Logging Data>, <Pumping Test Data>, <Zone Test Data> and <DWLR Details> get enabled depending upon the type of well selected and accordingly the details can be entered.

5.4.2.2. Well Specific Details

Well specific details of a particular well can be entered as follows.


Select the Well Name / Well Id / Old Well Id from the list of wells and click on <Well Specific Details>.

Screen 4.99

Note: The screen descriptions for following sections are the same as discussed in Structure Specific Details (Sec. 4.1.2.2).

5.4.2.2.1. Spring Well – Specific Details

In this case when <Well Specific Details> is clicked the following screen “Specific Details – Spring” appears. Validations ( Screen 4.100)

• Discharge should range: 0 to 10 lps. • Temperature should range: –4 to 60°C. • If Nature is selected, as perennial the No of Running Days is equal to 365

otherwise it is less than 365.


Screen 4.100

Enter the other details for spring in the relevant fields.

5.4.2.2.2. Dug Well – Specific Well

In this case <Pumping Test Data> gets enabled apart from other buttons. If <Well Specific Details> is clicked, the following screen “Specific Details - Dug Wells – Digging Details” appears.


Screen 4.101

The following tabs are there in case of dug well.

• Digging Details • Litholog • Aquifer Performance Test

Explanation to various Tabs Digging Details Validations (Screen 4.102)

• Well Diameter / Well Breadth should range: 0.5 to 20meters. • Well Breadth should range: 0.5 to 20meters. • Depth of Well should be greater than 0 and less than or equal to 200

meters. • Static Water Level should be less than or equal to the Depth of Well. • Curbing Depth should be less than or equal to the Depth of Well.


Screen 4.102

To enter the data for Digging Details

• Click <Circular> or <Rectangular> depending upon the shape of the well. If <Circular> is clicked then Well Breadth gets disabled and only Well Diameter is enabled. If <Rectangular> is clicked then both Well Length and Well Breadth are enabled.

• If <Dry Well> is checked then the Static Water Level gets disabled and is populated with the Depth Of Well.

• If <Pumping Test Conducted> is checked then one more tab page “Aquifer Performance Test” gets added.

• Enter the Digging Details in the relevant fields. Litholog For explanation of this screen refer Injection Well – Specific Details (Sec 4.1.2.2.2) “Litholog” screen. Aquifer Performance Test (APT)


For explanation of this screen refer Injection Well – Specific Details (Sec 4.1.2.2.2) “Aquifer Performance Test” screen.

5.4.2.2.3. Dug Cum Bore Well - Specific Details

In this case <Pumping Test Data> gets enabled apart from other buttons. If <Well Specific Details> is clicked, then the following screen “Well Specific Details - Dug Cum Bore Well – Digging Details” appears.

Screen 4.103

The following tabs are there in case of dug cum bore well.

• Digging Details • Inwell Details • Water Bearing Zones • Aquifer Performance Test

Explanation to various tabs. Digging Details


For explanations of this screen refer Dug Well – Specific Details (Sec 4.4.2.2.2) “Digging Details” screen. Inwell Details Validations ( Screen 4.104)

• If Disposition is V (Vertical) then Bore Part Start At is equal to Depth of

Well entered on Digging Details Tab. If it is H (Horizontal) then it should be less than the Depth of Well.

Screen 4.104



<Delete> and click <Save>.

Water Bearing Zones


For explanations of this screen refer Injection Well – Specific Details (Sec 4.1.2.2.2) “Water Bearing Zones” screen. Aquifer Performance Test For explanations of this screen refer Injection Well – Specific Details (Sec 4.1.2.2.2) “Aquifer Performance Test” screen.

5.4.2.2.4. Slim Hole - Specific Details

In this case <Geophysical Logging Data>, <Pumping Test Data> and <Zone Test Data> gets enabled apart from other buttons. If <Well Specific Details> is clicked, the following screen “Specific Details - Slim Hole – Drilling Details” appears.

Screen 4.105

The following tabs are displayed in case of slim hole.

• Drilling Details • Drill Time Log • Litholog


• Water Bearing Zones • Preliminary Yield Test • Geophysical Logging • Zone Test

Explanation to various tabs Drilling Details For explanations of this screen refer Injection Well – Specific Details (Sec 4.1.2.2.2) “Drilling Details” screen. Drill Time Log For explanations of this screen refer Injection Well – Specific Details (Sec 4.1.2.2.2) “Drill Time Log” screen. Litholog For explanations of this screen refer Injection Well – Specific Details (Sec 4.1.2.2.2) “Lithoog” screen. Water Bearing Zones For explanations of this screen refer Injection Well – Specific Details (Sec 4.1.2.2.2) “Water Bearing Zones” screen. Preliminary Yield Test (PYT) For explanations of this screen refer Injection Well – Specific Details (Sec 4.1.2.2.2) “Preliminary Yield Test” screen. Geophysical Logging For explanations of this screen refer Injection Well – Specific Details (Sec 4.1.2.2.2) “Geophysical Logging” screen.

Zone Test Validations ( Screen 4.106)

• Depth From should be less than or equal to Depth To.


• Depth To should be less than Drilled Depth entered earlier in the screen “Drilling Details”.

• Date for zone test cannot be a future date. • Discharge should range: 0 to 20 lps.

Screen 4.106



<Delete> and click <Save>. The user can enter water quality data for a particular test by clicking <Add Water Quality Data>. The following screen “Sample Details” appears:


Screen 4.107

For more details about adding water quality data, refer to Chapter 6 Water Quality.

5.4.2.2.5. Bore Well - Specific Details

In this case <Geophysical Logging Data>, <Pumping Test Data>, <DWLR Details> and <Zone Test Data> get enabled apart from other buttons. In bore well type, there are three sub types exploratory, piezometer and observation. In case of observation sub-type, the <Pumping Test Data> does not get enabled. If <Well Specific Details> is clicked, then the following screen “Specific Details - Bore Well – Drilling Details” appears.


Screen 4.108

The following tabs in this screen can increase or decrease according to the well sub type.

• Drilling Details • Development Details • Drill Time Log • Litholog • Water Bearing Zones • Construction Details • Transfer Details (when sub type is exploratory) • Observation Well (when sub type is observation) • Aquifer Performance Test • Preliminary Yield Test • Step Drawdown Test • Geophysical Logging • DWLR Details • Zone Test


Explanation to various tabs Drilling Details For explanations of this screen refer Injection Well – Specific Details (Sec 4.1.2.2.2) “Drilling Details” screen. Development Details For explanations of this screen refer Injection Well – Specific Details (Sec 4.1.2.2.2) “Development Details” screen.

Drill Time Log For explanations of this screen refer Injection Well – Specific Details (Sec 4.1.2.2.2) “Drill Time Log” screen. Litholog For explanations of this screen refer Injection Well – Specific Details (Sec 4.1.2.2.2) “Litholog” screen. Water Bearing Zones For explanations of this screen refer Injection Well – Specific Details (Sec 4.1.2.2.2) “Water Bearing Zones” screen. Construction Details. For explanations of this screen refer Injection Well – Specific Details (Sec 4.1.2.2.2) “Construction Details” screen. Transfer Details Validations ( Screen 4.109)

• Offer Date, Acceptance Date, Recovery Date can’t be a future date. • Offer Date should be less than or equal to the Acceptance Date. • Acceptance Date should be less than or equal to Recovery Date. • Cost of Material should be less than or equal to the Total Cost of Well. • Cost to be Recovered should be less than or equal to the Total Cost of

Well.


Screen 4.109

Enter the transfer details in the relevant fields. Observation Well Validations (Screen 4.110)

• Distance from Main Well should range: 0 to 10000 meters. • Fore Bearing To Main Well should range: 0 to 360°.


Screen 4.110

To enter data for observation well, select the main well name for this observation well, the id of main well gets displayed in disabled mode. Enter Distance from Main Well and Fore Bearing to Main Well.

Aquifer Performance Test For explanations of this screen refer Injection Well – Specific Details (Sec 4.1.2.2.2) “Aquifer Performance Test” screen. Preliminary Yield Test For explanations of this screen refer Injection Well – Specific Details (Sec 4.1.2.2.2) “Preliminary Yield Test” screen. Step Drawdown Test For explanations of this screen refer Injection Well – Specific Details (Sec 4.1.2.2.2) “Step Drawdown Test” screen.


Geophysical Logging For explanations of this screen refer Injection Well – Specific Details (Sec 4.1.2.2.2) “Geophysical Logging” screen. DWLR Details Validations (Screen 4.111)

• Installation Date and Removal Date cannot be a future date. Removal Date can’t be smaller than the Installation Date.

• Depth of Transducers should be less than Drilled Depth entered on “Drilling Details”.

• Initial Water Level Reading should be less than Depth of Transducers. • Only one DWLR is operational at a time

Screen 4.111


• For adding a record, select the Installation Date, DWLR Make & DWLR Model and enter the data in DWLR ID that should be unique, Depth of Transducers & Initial Water Level Reading. Click <Save>.

• In case the user wants to work on the DWLR Model other than the selected one, check <Non Operational>, fill the data in the enabled fields and click <Save>.

• For modifying a record, double click the record, the data gets populated in the respective fields, make the relevant changes and click <Save>.


Zone Test For explanations of this screen refer Slim Hole – Specific Details (Sec 4.4.2.2.4) “Zone Test” screen.

5.4.2.2.6. Tube Well - Specific Details

In this case, <Grain Size Data>, <Geophysical Logging Data>, <Pumping Test Data>, <DWLR Details> and <Zone Test Data> get enabled apart from other buttons. In tube well there are three sub types exploratory, piezometer and observation. In case of observation <Pumping Test Data> does not get enabled. If <Well Specific Details> is clicked, then the following screen “Specific Details - Tube Well – Drilling Details” appears.


Screen 4.112

The following tabs in this screen can increase or decrease according to the well sub type.

• Drilling Details • Development Details • Drill Time Log • Litholog • Water Bearing Zones • Well Assembly • Grouting / Sealing / Gravel Packing • Transfer Details (when sub type is exploratory) • Observation Well (when sub type is observation) • Aquifer Performance Test • Preliminary Yield Test • Step Drawdown Test • Geophysical Logging • DWLR Details


• Zone Test • Grainsize Analysis

Explanation to various tabs. Drilling Details For explanations of this screen refer Injection Well – Specific Details (Sec 4.1.2.2.2) “Drilling Details” screen. Development Details For explanations of this screen refer Injection Well – Specific Details (Sec 4.1.2.2.2) “Development Details” screen. Drill Time Log For explanations of this screen refer Injection Well – Specific Details (Sec 4.1.2.2.2) “Drill Time Log” screen. Litholog For explanations of this screen refer Injection Well – Specific Details (Sec 4.1.2.2.2) “Litholog” screen. Water Bearing Zones For explanations of this screen refer Injection Well – Specific Details (Sec 4.1.2.2.2) “Water Bearing Zones” screen. Well Assembly For explanations of this screen refer Injection Well – Specific Details (Sec 4.1.2.2.2) “Well Assembly” screen. Grouting / Sealing / Gravel Packing For explanations of this screen refer Injection Well – Specific Details (Sec 4.1.2.2.2) “Grouting / Sealing / Gravel Packing” screen. Transfer Details


For explanations of this screen refer Bore Well – Specific Details (Sec 4.4.2.2.5) “Transfer Details” screen. Observation Well For explanations of this screen refer Bore Well – Specific Details (Sec 4.4.2.2.5) “Observation Well” screen. Aquifer Performance Test For explanations of this screen refer Injection Well – Specific Details (Sec 4.1.2.2.2) “Aquifer Performance Test” screen. Preliminary Yield Test For explanations of this screen refer Injection Well – Specific Details (Sec 4.1.2.2.2) “Preliminary Yield Test” screen. Step Drawdown Test For explanations of this screen refer Injection Well – Specific Details (Sec 4.1.2.2.2) “Step Drawdown Test” screen. Geophysical Logging For explanations of this screen refer Injection Well – Specific Details (Sec 4.1.2.2.2) “Geophysical Logging” screen. DWLR Details For explanations of this screen refer Bore Well – Specific Details (Sec 4.4.2.2.5) “DWLR Details” screen. Zone Test For explanations of this screen refer Bore Well – Specific Details (Sec 4.4.2.2.4) “Zone Test” screen. Grainsize Analysis For explanations of this screen refer Injection Well – Specific Details (Sec 4.1.2.2.2) “Grainsize Analysis” screen.


5.4.2.3. Modify Well

This enables the user to modify the existing data pertaining to the selected well

• Select the Well Id /Well Name/ Old Well Id. On selecting data from any

one field Well Id or Well Name or Old Well id, the corresponding data in the other two fields also get selected.


• Click <Modify> “Well Details – Location” screen appears. Modify the details of the existing well. There are five tabs namely “Location”, “General”, “Topography”, “Hydrology” and “Hydrogeology”.

Screen 4.113

Note: To refresh the screen “Selection of Well” (Screen 4.99) click <Refresh>, all the Well Id / Well Name / Old Well Id get deselected and the Type of Well gets enabled.

5.4.2.4. Delete Well


• Select the Well Id / Well Name / Old Well Id.On selecting data from any one Well Id or Well Name or Old Well Id, the corresponding data in the other two also get selected.

• The Administrative Boundaries corresponding to the selections are filled up in the disabled mode. All the buttons gets enabled.

Click <Delete> to delete the selected well, a screen appears for confirmation of deletion. Click <Yes> to confirm the deletion or else click <No> to cancel the deletion.

5.4.2.5. Relocate Well

This is used to change the location of the well. Click <Relocate> on “Selection of Well” (Screen 4.99) the following Screen “Relocate” appears. The user can change the administrative boundary or the geographic location of the well or both.

Screen 4.114


the well is to be relocated • Enter the Latitude and Longitude where the well is to be relocated.


• Click <Save>, well is relocated to the new location.

5.4.2.6. Add Well - Map

Screen 4.115

• Click <Add Well On Map> from toolbar • Click on the point in the map where the well has to be created. A screen

showing the information about the latitude and longitude where the user has clicked appears and is to confirm whether at this point the user wants to create the Well. The following screen appears.

Screen 4.116

• Click <No> and click on any other point to get the accurate latitude and

longitude where the well has to be created.


• Click <Yes> the location screen “Location” appears the administrative boundary is picked from the map on the basis of selected latitude and longitude.

Screen 4.117

Then the user can follow the steps described in Add New Well (Sec 4.4.2.1) to fill the details for all the screen.

5.4.2.7. Modify Well – Map


Screen 4.118

• Click <Select> from toolbar. The following screen appears.

Screen 4.119

• Click <OK> and select the well from the map whose data has to be

modified, as shown in the figure below • Click <Select Site from Map> from toolbar.


Screen 4.120

• The following Screen “Selection of Well” appears showing the Well

selected by the user • Click <Modify> and follow the steps to modify the data as described

under Modify Well (Sec. 4.4.2.4).

Screen 4.121


6. Dynamic Data This module is used for capturing the dynamic data for <Artificial Recharge Structures>, <Hydromet Stations> and <Wells>. Dynamic data for <Hydromet Station> and <Well> both can be captured in two ways:

• Manual: In this process the user enters the data manually. • Automated: This option is used to load data from files generated by the

Digital Water Level Recorders in case of wells and from other file formats in case of hydromet stations

6.1. Artificial Recharge Structure 6.1.1. Description

These are man-made structures used to recharge the ground water of an area. This allows the user to add, modify, and delete data of artificial recharge structures, created earlier via Site. The fields like Stage, Inflow Rate, Visual Seepage, Water Level, Recharge Rate displayed on the screen depend upon the type of artificial recharge structures like Nallah Band, Percolation Tank, Cement Plug, Injection Well and Recharge Shaft selected. The data for above mentioned fields is based upon date and time. This has the facility to enter the above-mentioned data for single site or multiple sites.


To enter dynamic data for Artificial Recharge Structures, click Dynamic Data and then click <Artificial Recharge Structure>.


Screen 5.1

The following screen “Selection of Site for Artificial Recharge” appears.

Screen 5.2

• This screen shows the list of all those artificial recharge structures that

have already been added through Site.


• The artificial recharge structures can be filtered on the basis of the Site Type and Administrative Boundary.

• This is a multiple selection screen, which allows a user to select more than one artificial recharge structure at a time. Multiple sites are selected by using a combination of shift key and mouse

• The user has the facility to Sort /Find the artificial recharge structure by name/id/old id after/before selection is made.

• Before any selection is made <Select All>, <Refresh>, <Cancel> are enabled.

• <Refresh> is clicked to deselect any selection and <Cancel> is clicked to cancel the current operations / screen and return to the main-menu.

• On selecting a single site on the screen, <Proceed> gets enabled and the Activity, Site Type, Site Sub-Type and Administrative Boundary of the selected site are displayed (In case multiple sites are selected, Activity, Site Type, Site Sub Type and Administrative Boundary of the selected sites are displayed till the level they are similar).

Screen 5.3

6.1.2.1. Add Data

The user can either select single structure and add multiple data to it or select multiple structures and add single data to each structure. Single Site and Multiple Data

• Select the Structure or Structures for which data is to be entered.


• Click <Proceed>, the following screen “Dynamic Data for Artificial Recharge” appears.

Screen 5.4

• Click <Single Site Multiple Data>. • Select the first site from Site Id. • The Site Type of the selected site is displayed. Depending on the Site

Type, the Source of Water (i.e. for Injection Well or Recharge Shaft) is also displayed. The fields related to the selected site get enabled

• Enter the values in the relevant fields for a given date/time and click <Save>.

• Again the user can enter next set of data for the same site for another date/time.

• The user can select next site from Site Id and enter data in similar way. • Click <Exit> to quit the process.

Note: In case of Site Types Nallah Bund, Percolation Tank and Cement Plug

the fields Stage, Inflow Rate and Visual Seepage are enabled whereas in case of Injection Well and Recharge Shaft the fields Water Level and Recharge Rate are enabled.


Screen 5.5

Multiple Site and Single Data

• Select multiple sites on the screen “Selection of Site for Artificial

Recharge” as shown below.


Screen 5.6 • Click <Proceed>.

Screen 5.7

• Click <Multiple Site Single Data>. • Select the Site Id. • Add the relevant data for the selected site and click <Save>. • The Site Id changes, as <Multiple Site Single Data> has been clicked,

after entering the data for one site, the next site in Site Id is selected and depending upon its type the fields are enabled.

6.1.2.2. Modify Data

• Select data by double clicking on a row to be modified as shown (screen 5.8).

• All the values of the selected row appear in the fields where the data was entered.

• The user can now modify data by entering new values in the fields. • Click <Save> for saving the changes.


Screen 5.8

6.1.2.3. Delete Data

• Select data by double clicking on the row to be deleted as shown (screen 5.9).

• All the values of the selected row appear in the fields where the data was entered.

• Check <Delete> and Click <Delete> to delete the selected row.


Screen 5.9


6.2. Hydromet Station 6.2.1. Manual Dynamic Data for Hydromet Station


This Manual option of <Hydromet> allows the user to Add, Modify and Delete dynamic rainfall data manually. This data can be hourly, daily or monthly. This option facilitates the user to generate a graph of dynamic data entered. It also allows the user to Add, Modify and Delete full climatic station data for metrological station (another type of hydromet station).


Click Dynamic data, <Hydromet Station> and select Manual option.

Screen 5.10 The screen “Selection of Hydromet Station for Dynamic Data” appears


Screen 5.11

• This is a multiple selection screen, which allows a user to select more

than one hydromet station at a time and proceed to the screen “Dynamic Rainfall Data” to add dynamic data.

• The user has the facility to Sort /Find the hydromet stations by name/id/old id after/ before selection is made.

• The screen shows all the hydromet stations initially which can be filtered on the basis of the Type of Hydromet Station and Administrative Boundary.

• Select the Hydromet Station/Stations. • Click <Proceed>. The following screen “Dynamic Rainfall Data”

appears.


Screen 5.12

Dynamic Rainfall Data can be of three types:

• Hourly Data: While adding data, time increases by 1 hour after each record is saved

• Daily Data: Daily data can be added twice a day at 8.30 and at 17.30 only. The time control is disabled in this case.

• Monthly Data: Data can be added once every month. Date and Time can be fixed as per requirements.

Dynamic Rainfall Data can be added in two modes:

• Single Hydromet Station Multiple Data: The user can enter multiple data (Hourly/Daily/Monthly) for a single hydromet station. • Multiple Hydromet Station Single Data: The user can enter only single

record for each Hydromet Station at a time. On saving one record for a particular hydromet station, the Hydromet Station Id displays the next hydromet station.

Validation (for screen 5.12):

• Soil Moisture: Range: 0 to 100


6.2.1.2.1. Add Data

• Select the Type of Data to be entered (i.e. Hourly, Daily, Monthly) • Select the Mode of entry (in case only one Hydromet Station is selected,

<Multiple Hydromet Station Single Data> is disabled). • Select Hydromet Station Id . • Select Date and Time. • Enter Rainfall, Soil Moisture and Runoff. • Click < Save>.

6.2.1.2.2. Modify Data


• Modify Rainfall, Soil Moisture and Runoff . • Click <Save>.

Screen 5.13

6.2.1.2.3. Delete Data


• Check <Delete> and Click <Delete> to delete the data.


Screen 5.14

6.2.1.2.4. Graph

The <Graph> facilitates the user to generate a graph of dynamic data entered.

• Click < Graph> on the screen “Dynamic Rainfall Data”. • Rainfall vs. Date-Time Graph is generated for the set of records • The trend for rainfall is also generated.

Screen 5.15


. • Click <Back> returns to the previous screen. • Click <Cancel> cancels all the operations and returns to the main menu.

6.2.1.2.5. Full Climatic Station Data

• The <Full Climatic Station Data> is enabled if Type of Hydromet Station is Meteorological Station and is used for giving other meteorological details such as temperature (max, min), relative humidity, and station level pressure etc.

• Click <Full Climatic Station Data> in the screen “Dynamic Rainfall Data”. The following screen “Dynamic Full Climatic Station Data” appears.

Screen 5.16

Validations (for screen 5.16):

• Temperature (Minimum and Maximum): Range: -60 to +60 • Wet Bulb Temperature (Minimum and Maximum): Range: -60 to +60 • Dry Bulb Temperature (Minimum and Maximum): Range: -60 to +60 • Potential Evaporation: Range: >0 to <= 3000 • Wind Speed: Range: 0 to 500. • Wind Direction: Must be entered if Wind Speed is entered. Direction can

be entered in formats like N/NE/N30E • No of Sunshine Hours: Range: 0 to 15 • PET (Potential Evapo-Transpiration): Range: >0 to <= 3000


• Relative Humidity (At 8:30 and 17:30): Range: 0 to 100.

Add Data • Select Date. • Enter data in the fields within the range as described above • Click < Save>.

Modify Data


• Modify the data in the fields within the range as described above. • Click <Save>.

Screen 5.17

Delete Data


• Check <Delete>, Click <Delete> to delete the data.


Screen 5.18

Graph This option facilitates the user to generate a graph of dynamic data entered.

• Click <Graph>. • Rainfall, Max. Temp, Min. Temp, Potential Evaporation, PET, Wind

Speed, Relative Humidity at 8.30 and 17.30 vs. Date-Time Graph are generated for the set of records

• The Trend for Rainfall is also generated.


Screen 5.19

• Click <Back> returns to the previous screen. • Click <Cancel> to cancel all the operations and returns to the main menu.

6.2.2. Automated Dynamic Data for Hydromet Station


The Automated option of <Hydromet> allows the user to upload dynamic rainfall data with the help of files. These files can be in three formats

• IMD Data Format • General Data Format • SWDES Format


Click Dynamic Data, then click <Hydromet Station> and click Automated option.


Screen 5.20

The following screen “Selection of Hydromet Station for Automated Data” appears

Screen 5.21

• Select a Hydromet Station. • Select Data Format.


• Click <Proceed>

In Case of IMD Data Format and General Data Format, the following dialog box appears.

Screen 5.22

• Select the .txt or .dat file. • Click <Open>. • If valid file is not chosen, then an error message pops up “Invalid File

chosen”. • If the selected hydromet station is not present in the selected file, then a

message pops up “No data Available for the station”. • If a correct file is chosen and data is available, then the system displays a

message “Do You want to overwrite?” If the user selects “Yes”, then the data for the same dates, which are already present before, gets overwritten and also new data, if any, is added. On the other hand, if “No”, is chosen then only new data are added. After uploading, it displays the message, “Please Check C:\\Program Files\\GWIS\\Temp\\ReportLog.txt for Error Log.” Any error list corresponding to any row due to invalid data appears in this file.

In case of SWDES format, the following dialog appears.


Screen 5.23

• Select the .mdb file. • Click <Open> • The data from the selected file corresponding to the selected hydromet

station gets uploaded.


6.3. Well 6.3.1. Manual Dynamic Data for Well


The Manual option of <Well> allows the user to Add, Modify and Delete the dynamic well data that is water level in bgl or bmp, temperature, pH, EC, TDS etc manually. Also the application provides the facility to represent this data in graphs.


Click Dynamic Data, then click <Well> and click Manual option.

Screen 5.24

The following screen “Selection of Well for Depth to Water Table Data” appears.


Screen 5.25

• This is a multiple selection screen, which allows a user to select more

than one well at a time and proceed to the screen “Depth to Water Table Data” to add dynamic data.

• The user has the facility to Sort /Find the well by name/id/old id after/before selection is made.

• Initially all the wells are displayed which can be filtered on the basis of the Activity, Well Type, Well Sub-Type and Administrative Boundary.

• Select the well/wells for which data is to be entered. • Check the parameters for which data is to be entered (By default Water

Level is checked). • Click <Proceed> the following screen “Dynamic Data for Well” appears.


Screen 5.26

Water level data (dynamic data for well) can be added in two modes:

• Single Well Multiple Data: The user can enter multiple data for a single well.

• Multiple Wells Single Data: The user can enter only single record for each well at a time. On saving one record for a particular well the Well Id displays the next well. This option is enabled when the user has selected multiple wells in the selection screen.

Water level data can be entered in 2 units:

• Bgl (below ground level) • Bmp (below measuring point): In this case the height of the measuring

point is added to the data in bgl. BMP = BGL + Height of Measuring Point.

Validation (for screen 5.26):

• Water Level: Range: –20 to Depth of the Well • Temperature: Range: -100 to +100 • pH: Range: 0 to 14 • EC should be greater than TDS.

6.3.1.2.1. Add Data

• Select the mode of entry (in case only one well is selected, <Multiple Well Single Data> is disabled).


• Select Well Id and Date and Time. • Enter Water Level, Temperature, pH, EC, TDS (the fields are enabled

according to the selection of parameters in the selection screen). • Click < Save>.



• Modify Water Level, Temperature, pH, EC, TDS • Click <Save>.

Screen 5.27

6.3.1.2.3. Delete Data


• Check <Delete>. Click < Delete> to delete the data.


Screen 5.28

6.3.1.2.4. Dry Well

• Check <Dry Well>. The Water Level gets populated with the depth of the well and all the parameters are disabled.

Screen 5.29

6.3.1.2.5. Graph

<Graph> facilitates the user to generate a graph of dynamic data entered.


• Click < Graph>. • Water Level, EC, TDS, Temperature, pH vs. Date-Time Graph are

generated for the set of records

Screen 5.30

• Click <Back> to return to the previous screen.

6.3.2. Automated Dynamic Data for Well


The purpose of this option is to upload water level data, which is measured by Digital Water Level Recorders (DWLR). The data can be present in a .txt or .dat or .csv or mdd or general format (.txt). The types of DWLR whose data can be directly uploaded are Iris, Insitu, Green Span, Msqr. The DWLR can be installed only in case of bore wells and tube wells, so this option is not available for any other type of well. If the history of DWLR has not been entered for well, inspite of DWLR being installed in it, the user can’t upload the data (although the well is shown). The user has to enter the history of DWLR installed in that well, and then upload the DWLR data.


• Click Dynamic Data, click <Well> and click Automated option.


Screen 5.31

• The following screen “Selection of Wells for DWLR Data” appears and it

shows only those wells for which DWLR has been installed.

Screen 5.32

• On selecting the well, the Administrative Boundary, Well Type and Well

Sub Type for the selected well are shown in the disabled mode. • The DWLR Model is populated with the DWLR’s installed with the

selected well. • Select DWLR Model for which the user has to upload the data • Click <Proceed>. The following screen “Open” appears.


Screen 5.33

• The user can select the file from which data has to be uploaded. • Click <Open> to select the file for uploading. (Click <Cancel> to cancel

the operation and return to the selection screen “Selection of Well for DWLR Data” (Screen 5.32)).

• The data file generated by the DWLR contains the unique serial no. If the serial no. in the file does not match with that present in the history of DWLR mentioned, a message is shown stating serial no does not match and asks whether the user wants to proceed.

• Click<No> to cancel this process of uploading the data and return to the screen “Selection of Well for DWLR Data” (Screen 5.32).

• If <Yes> is clicked, a message stating the no of records found in the selected file is displayed as shown below:

Screen 5.34

• Click <OK>, the following screen “Data Correction” appears.


Screen 5.35

Through this screen the user can adjust any errors introduced by the measuring instrument in the following ways.

• Enter the Time shift (in minutes) with appropriate sign (i.e. –ve/+ve). e.g. –5/+2 • Click <Time shift to be added/subtracted from each record>

adds/subtracts the time to/from each record in the file. • Click <Time shift to be equally divided among all records> divides the

entered time shift by the number of records and adds the resultant time shift to each record in the file.

• Enter the Water Level shift with appropriate sign (i.e. –ve/ +ve). The entered value is added/subtracted to/from each water level record in the file.

• Click <OK>, the following screen “Data and Graph for DWLR Data” appears showing all the records present in the file and also the graph for it.


Screen 5.36

• Click <Upload> to upload this data to the database. • Click <Reject> to reject this data. • Click <Add Other Batches> in the screen “Data and Graph for DWLR

Data” (Screen 5.36) to add the other batch data and graph to the screen. The following screen “Selection of Batch” appears.


Screen 5.37

• The user can select the batches whose graphs need to be displayed on the

screen “Data and Graph for DWLR Data” (Screen 5.36) and click <OK>. • Click <Cancel> to cancel the operation and return to the screen “Data and

Graph for DWLR Data” (Screen 5.36).


Screen 5.38

Graph for all the batches are displayed in the above screen.

• Click<Delete> to delete the data for a complete file. One transaction, i.e. uploading one file is known as one Batch and a system generated unique no is allotted to it known as Batch Id. The user can follow the steps described in Deletion of Batch (Sec 5.3.2.2.1)

• After uploading or rejecting the data, click <Cancel> to exit from this screen and return to the screen “Selection of Well for DWLR Data” (Screen 5.32). The user can select another well or select another file to be uploaded for the same well as shown below.


Screen 5.39

• The user can directly delete the batches from the above screen

corresponding to the selected well as described in Deletion of Batch. (Sec 5.3.2.2.1).

• Click <Refresh> to deselect all selection • Click <Exit> to quit the screen.

If, without uploading or rejecting the data, the user clicks <Cancel> on the screen “Data and Graph for DWLR Data” (Screen 5.36) then the following screen “Selection of Well for DWLR Data” appears.

Screen 5.40


• Click <View/Graph> on the above screen to return to the screen “Data and Graph for DWLR Data” (Screen 5.36).

• The user can upload or reject the data by clicking <Upload> or <Reject> respectively on the above screen also.

• If the user click <Exit> without uploading or rejecting the data, the system prompts for either uploading or rejecting first and allows the user to exit the screen.

6.3.2.2.1. Deletion Of Batch

Click <Delete> on the screen “Selection of Well for DWLR Data” (Screen 5.39) or the screen “Data and Graph for DWLR Data” (Screen 5.36) to delete data for a complete batch. The following screen “Selection of Batch for Deletion” appears.

Screen 5.41

• This screen shows the different batch ids, the date range for data available

in that batch, the name of the file and the no of records that were uploaded in that batch.

• Select a Batch Id and click <Delete> to delete all records corresponding to that batch id.

• Click <Cancel> to cancel the current operation and return to the screen “Data and Graph for DWLR Data” (Screen 5.36) or to the screen “Selection of Well for DWLR Data” (Screen 5.39).



7. Water Quality 7.1. Description This module is used to determine the chemical quality of parameters of water. Various water samples are collected and sent to different laboratories for analysis and interpretation of their viability on different uses like Drinking, Industrial and Irrigation. Click Water Quality and the following screen “Selection Of Sampling Site” appears.

Screen 6.1

7.2. Working steps • Select the Sampling Site Name or Sampling Site ID. • The Sampling Source and Administrative Boundary for that site are displayed

on the screen. The <APT Samples>, <SDT Samples>, <Zone Test Samples>, <Monitoring Samples> are used as filters to see how many samples in a site come from an individual method e.g. if a site has 10 samples out of which 5 are from APT and 5 are from SDT then by checking <APT Samples> and unchecking <SDT Samples>, <Zone Test Samples>, <Monitoring Samples> shows only the samples received for APT.

7.2.1. Adding Sample

• Select the Site Name from where the water sample has been collected. • Click <Add Sample> for adding data for the new water sample. The

following screen “Sample Details” appears.


Screen 6.2

• The screen displays the General Details of the sampling site like State/District/Tahsil/Block/Village etc.

• Select the Monitoring Type from the Type of Monitoring. • Enter Sample ID given by Lab, Sample Date and Sample Time, Receiving

Date, Sampling Depth . The terms defined are • Sample Date and Sample Time: Date and Time at which Sample is

collected from the Site. • Receiving Date: Date on which the laboratory receives sample. • Sampling Depth: The depth in meters at which water sample was

collected. • Validations for Sampling Depth (Screen 6.2)

• Dug Well and Dug Cum Bore Well It must be less than the depth of dug well.

• Tube Well, Bore Well, Slim Hole, Injection Well (Bore and Tube) It must be less than the drilled depth.

• Recharge Shaft It must be less than the depth of recharge shaft.

• Sample ID: This is generated for each sample from system date. • Check < Sample Collected > for Parameter Codes (Types of Tests to be

conducted) for the corresponding <Sample Collected>. The corresponding Lab Name, Container, Preservation Methods etc. are enabled and the user can select the desired values as shown in the screen.


Screen 6.3

• Click <OK>. The screen “Water Quality Parameters” appears. • For a particular sample, there are certain Water Quality Parameters. These

parameters are analysed in the laboratory to check the Quality of the water sample. The most common water quality parameters are presented in the screen “Water Quality Parameters” and the user can enter the values of these parameters.

• If the water sample has been analysed for Trace elements, Pesticides or any other parameter, the user can enter the values through the screen “Other Parameters”. If the water sample collected is a purged sample then the user can enter Purging Data through the screen “Purging Data”.

Notes: <Purged Sample> is enabled only if the Sampling Source is Tube Well or

Bore Well or Injection Well. The user can add data for the purged sample by clicking <Add Purging Data>.

7.2.1.1. Water Quality Parameters

This screen contains the following tabs • Field Parameters • General Parameters • Cations • Anions • Biological and Bacteriological Parameters • Others • Calculated


Screen 6.4

• After entering the data click <OK> to save the data. • Click <Cancel> to cancel the data on screen. • Click <Help> to view the Help file.

7.2.1.1.1. Field Parameters

Field Parameters are the values of the parameters recorded at the time of collecting the sample.

Screen 6.5


• Field pH should range 0 to 14. • Field DO (Dissolved Oxygen) should range 0 to 15 mg/L.

• Field Temperature should range 0 to 100°C. • Field EC (Electrical Conductivity) should range 0 to 200000 µS/cm at 25°C.


7.2.1.1.2. General Parameters

General Parameters are the values recorded at the time of testing the sample.

Screen 6.6


• pH should range 0 to 14. • TSS should range 0 to 1000mg/L. • EC should range 0 to 200000 µS/cm at 25°C • TDS should range 0 to 100000mg/L. • Total Hardness should range 0 to 20000 mg/L • Total Alkalinity and Phenolphthalein Alkalinity are calculated

fields.

Calculations (Screen 6.6)

Total Alkalinity ((Carbonatex0.03333)+(Bicarbonatex0.01639)+(Hydroxylx0.05880))x50

Phenolphthalein Alkalinity

(Carbonatex0.03333)x50 Total Hardness ((Calciumx0.04990)+(Magnesiumx0.08226))x50 7.2.1.1.3. Cations

This includes the major cations analyzed for regular monitoring.


Screen 6.7


• Ca2+ should range 0 to 5000 mg/L • Na+ should range 0 to 20000 mg/L • K+ should range 0 to 1000 mg/L • Fe2+ + Fe3+ should range 0 to 1000 mg/L • Mg2+ should range 0 to 2000 mg/L

7.2.1.1.4. Anions

This includes the major anions analyzed for regular monitoring.

Screen 6.8

Validations (Screen 6.8) • CO3

2- should range 0 to 200 mg/L. • HCO3

- should range 0 to 12000 mg/L. • OH- should range 0 to 500 mg/L. • SO4

2-should range 0 to 5000 mg/L. • NO3

- should range 0 to 5000 mg/L. • Cl- should range 0 to 20000 mg/L.


• PO43- should range 0 to 200 mg/L.

• S- should range 0 to 100 mg/L. • F-should range 0 to 100 mg/L.

7.2.1.1.5. Biological and Bacteriological Parameters

This includes the major Biological And Bacteriological Parameters analyzed for regular monitoring.

Screen 6.9

Validations (Screen 6.9) • BOD (Biological Oxygen Demand 5 days) should range 0 to

50000 mg/L. • COD (Chemical Oxygen Demand) should range 0 to 100000

mg/L. • Chlorophyll-A should range 0 to 1000 mg/L. • Total Organic Carbon should range 0 to 10000 mg/L.

7.2.1.1.6. Others

This includes all the major radicals except Biological, Bacteriological, anions and cations, which are analyzed for regular monitoring.


Screen 6.10


• Silica should range 0 to 200 mg/L. • Boron should range 0 to 10 mg/L. • NH3 – N should range 0 to 20 mg/L. • NO3

- - N - It means Nitrate as Nitrogen. It is a calculated field and its formula is (NO3

-) value entered in Anions Tab x 14 62 7.2.1.1.7. Calculated

This includes the parameters calculated from data of anions and cations for regular monitoring.

Screen 6.11

The formulae are given below

Calculated Fields Ca/Mg Ratio : ((Calciumx0.04990)/(Magnesiumx0.08226))


Calculated TDS: (0.6xTotalAlkalinity) + Sodium +Potassium +Calcium +Magnesium +Chloride +Sulphate +Silica +Nitrate +Fluoride

NO3/Cl Ratio: (Nitratex0.01613) / (Chloridex0.02821) Percent Sodium:

(((Sodium)x.04350)/((Sodium)x.04350+ (Calcium)x.04990+(Magnesium)x.08226+ Potassium)x0.02557)x100)

RSC:

((((Carbonate)x.03333 + ( Bicarbonate)x0.01639 )-(( Calcium)x.04990 + ( Magnesium)x.08226)))

SAR:

((Sodiumx. 04350)/(sqrt ((Calciumx.04990+ Magnesiumx.08226)/2))) Sum Of Anions:

Chloridex0.02821 + Sulphatex0.02082 + Carbonatex0.03333 + Bicarbonatex0.01639 + Nitratex0.01613 + Hydroxylx0.05880 + Phosphatex0.03159 + Sulphidex0.06238 + Fluoridex0.05264 meq/L.

Sum Of Cations:

Sodiumx0.04350 + Potassiumx0.02557 + Magnesiumx0.08226 + Calciumx0.04990 + Total Ironx0.044765 meq/L

Difference: Sum Of Cations - Sum Of Anions meq/L % Error =

(Sum Of Cations – Sum Of Anions) x100 (Sum Of Cations + Sum Of Anions)


Cl/Na Ratio: (Chloridex0.02821) / (Sodiumx0.04350) 7.2.2. Other Parameters

Parameters in the screen “Water Quality Parameters” are the commonly analyzed parameters. In addition to the parameters present in the screen “Water Quality Parameters”, if a water sample has been analyzed for some other parameters then the user can enter the values of these parameters through the following screen “Other Parameters”.

Screen 6.12

• Select the Parameter Group and Parameter. Select the Analysis method (if available).

• Enter Concentration for the selected parameter of the analysed water sample in Concentration.

• Click <Next> to save the current record and enter the next record. • Click <OK> to end entry of records and exit. • Click <Exit> to exit the screen.

7.2.3. Purging Data

• Check <Purged Sample> in the screen “Sample Details”. • Click <Add Purging Data>, the following screen “Purging Data”

appears.


Screen 6.13

• Enter the Well, Pump, Field Flow Data. • Click <Save Static Data>. • Enter Field Chemical Data and click <Next> to enter next record. • Click <Exit> to exit the screen.

Calculations

• Avg. SWL : Avg. of water level in mbgl. data for that site for the month of Sampling date.

• Well Diameter for tube: Diameter in mm. at the sampling depth from Well Assembly. Bit Size at the sampling depth from Well Assembly for Bore.

• Well Depth : Same as in case of Sampling Depth in mbgl. • WellWaterColumn : (Well Depth) – (AvgSWL) m. • InitialVolume = ((22.0f/28.0f) x (pow (WellDiameter,2.0) x

WellWaterColumn)/1000000) cum. • Projected TimeReqd =

((InitialVolumex5000000.0f)/(PumpDischarge))/60 mins. • VolumePurged = (60.0f x PumpDischarge) x (PumpingDuration) /

1000000.0f cum.

Validations (Screen 6.13) • DWL After Pumping cannot be less than SWL. • Pump Setting should be between Depth Of Well and SWL. • Pumping Duration should be in the range 1 to 999 mins.


• Time should be in the range 1 to 999 mins. • Temperature should be in the range 1 to 99°C. • EC should range 0 to 200000 µS/cm at 25°C

7.2.4. Modify Sample

• Select the Sampling Site Name/Sampling Site Id. The Samples available for that site are displayed in Sample Id by Lab.

• Select sample to be modified from the Sample Id by Lab. • The modification options <Modify Purging Data>, <Modify Water

Quality Parameters>, <Modify Other Parameters> are enabled and the user can check any for modification as displayed in the following screen.

Screen 6.14

• Click <Modify Sample> to make modifications in existing data.

7.2.5. Delete Sample

• Select the Sampling Site Name or Sampling Site Id. The samples available for that site are displayed in Sample Id by Lab.

• Select Sample from Sample Id by Lab, which is to be deleted. • Click <Delete Sample> to delete the selected sample.

GEMS User Manual

214

8. Geophysical Exploration 8.1. Description

Geophysical Exploration is the study of resources of the earth using some Physical Parameters like Magnetism, Electricity, Gravity and Seismic etc. Based on the Geophysical Exploration, the user can find out the possibility of a Resource Occurrence. Geophysical Techniques serve as a useful tool in constructing a picture of the Hydrogeological condition of the area based on surface investigations. This module is used for collecting exploration data from Geophysical Exploration Sites based on different methods. In this module, user can create a new Geophysical Exploration Site, modify the data for existing sites, delete an existing site and can enter interpreted data for the sites.

8.2. Working Steps

Click Geophysical Exploration. The following screen “Selection Of Exploration Site” appears.

Screen 7.1 8.2.1. Add Site

Click <Add Site>, the following screen “Investigation Site Details” appears.

GEMS User Manual

215

Screen 7.2

Validations (Screen 7.2) • Latitude Degree: Range: Greater than or equal to 4 and less than 40. • Longitude Degree: Range: Greater than or equal to 68 and less than

100. • Toposheet No. is calculated based on the Latitude and Longitude. • Date should not be a future date. Working Steps • Select State, District, Tahsil/Taluka, Block/Mandal, Village/Town. • Enter Site Name. • Select Basin, Sub-Basin and Watershed. • Enter Latitude, Longitude in degrees, minutes and seconds. • Exploration Site ID is generated on the basis of the latitude and

longitude. • Enter Date of exploration. • Select Agency, Purpose/ Project, Geology and Instrument. • RL of the GL (mamsl): Enter the Reduced Level of the Ground Level

of the Site in mamsl. • Check Topographic Survey Done if it is done at site. • Enter Access Details and Remarks. • Select Method, Sub-Method, Sounding/Profiling and Electrode

Configuration. • Profiling Data gets enabled only if <Profiling> is checked in the

Method Details.

GEMS User Manual

216

• Method: This option displays different methods used for geophysical studies. The possible values are:

• Electrical • Magnetic • Electro-magnetic • Seismic

• Sub-method: This option displays the different sub-methods under each method specified above. Method is selected, the sub-methods are filtered and displayed to the selected method.

• Sounding / Profiling: This has two options only, either <Sounding> or <Profiling>. The user can click any one.

• Electrode configuration: This option displays the possible electrode configurations for different sets of Methods and Sub-methods.

• No. of profiles: This option represents the total number of profiles taken at site. All these profiles are associated with the site.

• Profile Type: This displays the two types of profiling:

• <Parallel> • <Radial>

• Station Interval (m): This option is the distance in meters between two sets of electrode settings.

• Click <Cancel> to cancel the entered data and exit from the screen. • Click <OK>. Different screens corresponding to the selected methods

appear as explained. 8.2.1.1. Method Details:

In the following table, various combinations of methods, sub-method, sounding and profiling and electorde configuration are described. Each combination has been explained in the following sections

Method Sub-Method Sounding/Profiling

Electrode Configuration Schlumberger Sounding Wenner Schlumberger

Induced Polarization

Profiling Wenner

Electrical

Misse-La-Masse Profiling None

GEMS User Manual

217

DD-Azimuthal DD-Equational DD-Parallel DD-Perpendicular DD-Radial Half SchlumbergerSchlumberger Wenner

Sounding

Lee-Partitioning DD-Axial Lee-Partitioning Schlumberger Wenner

Resistivity

Profiling

Gradient

Self Potential Profiling None Magnetic None Profiling None

Sounding None HLEM

Profiling None Electro Magnetic VLF Profiling None Reflection Profiling None

Seismic Refraction Profiling None

Table 7.1 Explanation to various methods

8.2.1.2. Electrical/ Induced Polarization/ Sounding/ Schlumberger

On selecting this combination of Method, Sub-Method, Sounding / Profiling and Electrode Configuration, the following screen “Investigation Details” appears.

GEMS User Manual

218

Screen 7.3

• Orientation:

User can enter the direction in this field. It can be in the form of N, NE, NW, S, SE, SW, N45E etc.

• MN/2 (m): Term used to describe the potential electrode separation (MN).

• AB/2 (m): Term used to describe the current electrode separation (AB).

• Del V (mVolt): Potential difference measured in milliVolts in case of Electrical Method.

• Current Input I (mAmp): Current passed through the current electrode.

• Resistance (ohm): Calculated field. Resistance (ohm) = Del V

Current Input

User can also edit the calculated value. • Apparent Resistivity (ohm-m):

Apparent resistivity is calculated from the resistance measured in the field. For different sets of Sounding/Profiling Techniques the Resistance is multiplied by the Geometric Factor to get this. This is a calculated field. The user can edit the calculated value.

GEMS User Manual

219

Apparent Resistivity = Geometric Factor x Resistance where, Geometric Factor = Π {(AB/2)2 - (MN/2)2}/ MN

Note: Geometric Factors are different for different Electrode Configurations.

• M, M1, M2, M3, M4 (%): These are the chargeability measured by the multiple receiver-electrode pairs in case of Induced Polarization Sub-Method.

• Remarks: This field is for entering any remarks associated with the record. User can enter the remarks in this field.

• For adding a new record, enter the relevant details and click <Next>. • For deleting a record, double click the record from the list and check

<Delete>, click <Next>. • Click <Exit> to exit from the screen.

Validations (Screen 7.3) • AB/2 cannot be less than MN/2. • AB/2 cannot be reducing i.e. value of AB/2 in a new record should be

greater than the value of AB/2 in the previous record.

8.2.1.3. Electrical/ Induced Polarization/ Sounding/ Wenner


GEMS User Manual

220

Screen 7.4

• a (m): Term used in the Wenner method of Sounding /Profiling for describing Current Electrode Separation.


<Delete>, click <Next>. • Click <Exit> to exit from the screen. • All the other fields are similar to those described in section Electrical/

Induced Polarization/ Sounding/ Schlumberger. Only Geometric Factor is different, Geometric Factor = 2Πa.

8.2.1.4. Electrical/ Induced Polarization/ Profiling/ Schlumberger

On selecting this combination of Method, Sub-Method, Sounding / Profiling and Electrode Configuration, the following screen “Profile Data” appears.

GEMS User Manual

221

Screen 7.5

• Lateral Distance From Base Station (m):

User can enter the value of Profile Interval in meters. In case of radial profiling this field is disabled.

• Longitudinal Distance From The Base Station (m):

User can enter the longitudinal distance from base station in meters in this field. In case of radial profiling this field is disabled.

• All the other fields are similar to those described in section Electrical/ Induced Polarization/ Sounding/ Schlumberger. Enter the profile data, click <OK> and the following screen “Investigation Details” appears.

Screen 7.6

GEMS User Manual

222

• Stn No.

Station Number at which the reading is collected. This is incremented by the system after adding each record.

• Dist From Start Pt (m): This is a calculated field, filled up with the values depending upon the Station Interval. It always starts with 0 and its values get incremented by the value of Station Interval.



Induced Polarization/ Sounding/ Schlumberger. 8.2.1.5. Electrical/ Induced Polarization/ Profiling/ Wenner


Screen 7.7

• Lateral Distance From Base Station (m):

User can enter the value of Profile Interval in meters. In case of radial profiling this field is disabled.

• Longitudinal Distance From The Base Station (m): User can enter the longitudinal distance from base station in meters in this field. In case of radial profiling this field is disabled.

• All the other fields are similar to those described in section Electrical/ Induced Polarization/ Sounding/ Wenner.

GEMS User Manual

223

Click <OK> and the following screen “Investigation Details” appears.

Screen 7.8

• Stn No.

Station Number, the reading is collected. This is incremented by the system after adding each record.

• Dist From Start Pt (m): This is a generated field, filled up with the values depending upon the Station Interval. It always starts with zero and its values are incremented by the value of Station Interval.

For adding a new record, enter the relevant details and click <Next>. • For deleting a record, double click the record from the list and check


Induced Polarization/ Sounding/ Wenner. 8.2.1.6. Electrical/ Miss-e-La-Masse/ Profiling

On selecting this combination of Method, Sub-Method, Sounding / Profiling and Electrode Configuration, the following screen “Miss-e-La-Masse” appears.

GEMS User Manual

224

Screen 7.9

• FB To Borehole From Base Stn(°):

Direction to the borehole from base station in degrees. • Dist To Borehole From Base Stn(m):

Distance to borehole from base station in meters. • Depth Of Charged Body (m):

Depth to charged body in meters. • FB To Potential Electrode (°):

Direction to the Potential Electrode from base station in degrees. • Dist To Potential Electrode (m):

Distance to potential electrode from base station in meters. • FB To Curr Electrode (°):

Direction to the Current Electrode from base station in degrees. • Dist To Curr Electrode (m):

Distance to current electrode from base station in meters. • Lateral Distance From Base Station (m):

User can enter the value of Profile Interval in meters in this field. In case of radial profiling this field is disabled.


• Stn No. Station number, the reading is collected. This is incremented by the system after adding each record.

GEMS User Manual

225

• Dist From Start Pt (m): Generated field, filled up with the values depending upon the Station Interval. It always starts with 0 and its values get incremented by the value of Station Interval.

• Del V (mVolt): Potential difference measured in milliVolts

• Del V Normalized (mVolt): Normalized potential difference measured in milliVolts, if the Current Input is not fixed in case of Misse-a-la-Masse Method.

• Current Input (mA): Enabled when <Current Input is Varying> is checked. If <Current Input is Varying> is checked then the value of Current Input varies for different records. If <Current Input is Varying> is not checked then the value of Fixed Current Input will be considered for all the records.



8.2.1.7. Electrical/ Resistivity/ Sounding/ DD-Azimuthal

On selecting this combination of Method, Sub-Method, Sounding / Profiling and Electrode Configuration, the following screen “Dipole – Dipole Sounding” appears.

GEMS User Manual

226

Screen 7.10 • AB (m):

Term used to describe the current electrode separation (AB). User can enter the value of AB in meters in this field.

• MN (m): Term used to describe the potential electrode separation (MN). User can enter the value of MN in meters in this field.

• Theta (°): Angle between the potential dipole and the current dipole.

• r (m): Distance between the centers of the current dipole and the potential dipole.


• Current Input I (mAmp): Current passed through the current electrode.

• Resistance (ohm): Calculated field.

Resistance (ohm) = Del V

Current Input

User can also edit the generated value.

• Apparent Resistivity (ohm-m): Apparent Resistivity = Geometric Factor x Resistance where, Geometric Factor = 2Πr3 / L l Sinθ l = MN L = AB r = distance between the centers of the current dipole and the potential dipole θ = Angle between the potential dipole and the current dipole.



GEMS User Manual

227

8.2.1.8. Electrical/ Resistivity/ Sounding/ DD-Equatorial


Screen 7.11

All the other fields are similar to those described in section Electrical/ Resistivity/ Sounding/ DD-Azimuthal. Only Geometric Factor is different, Geometric Factor =2 Π r3 / L l

8.2.1.9. Electrical/ Resistivity/ Sounding/ DD-Parallel


GEMS User Manual

228

Screen 7.12

All the other fields are similar to those described in section Electrical/ Resistivity/ Sounding/ DD-Azimuthal. Only Geometric Factor is different, Geometric Factor = 2 Π r3 / L l (3 Cos2θ -1)

8.2.1.10. Electrical/ Resistivity/ Sounding/ DD-Perpendicular


GEMS User Manual

229

Screen 7.13

All the other fields are similar to those described in section Electrical/ Resistivity/ Sounding/ DD-Azimuthal. Only Geometric Factor is different, Geometric Factor = 2 Π r3 / 3 L 1 (Sinθ Cosθ)

8.2.1.11. Electrical/ Resistivity/ Sounding/ DD- Radial


GEMS User Manual

230

Screen 7.14

All the other fields are similar to those described in section Electrical/ Resistivity/ Sounding/ DD-Azimuthal. Only Geometric Factor is different, Geometric Factor = Π r3 / L l Cosθ

8.2.1.12. Electrical/ Resistivity/ Sounding/ Half-Schlumberger


GEMS User Manual

231

Screen 7.15

• AO (m):

This convention is used for the current electrode separation for Half-Schlumberger Electrode Configuration. AO cannot be less than MN.

• All the other fields are similar to those described in section Electrical/

Resistivity/ Sounding/ DD-Azimuthal. Only Geometric Factor is different, Geometric Factor = 2 Π a2 /δa

where, a = distance between current electrode and center of potential electrode spacing. δa = Potential electrode separation

8.2.1.13. Electrical/Resistivity/ Sounding/ Lee-Partitioning


GEMS User Manual

232

Screen 7.16

• Enter the values of DelV-Left, DelV-Right and Current Input. • Resistance-Left = DelV-Left / Current-Input • Resistance-Right = DelV-Right / Current-Input • App. Resistivity (L) = Geometric Factor x Resistance-Left • App. Resistivity (R) = Geometric Factor x Resistance-Right • Apparent Resistivity (W) = 0.5 [App. Resistivity (L) +

App.Resistivity(R)] • All the other fields are similar to those described in section Electrical/

Induced Polarisation/ Sounding/ Schlumberger. Only Geometric Factor is different, Geometric Factor = 4 Π a

8.2.1.14. Electrical/ Resistivity/ Sounding/ Schlumberger


GEMS User Manual

233

Screen 7.17


Induced Polarisation/ Sounding/ Schlumberger. 8.2.1.15. Electrical/ Resistivity/ Sounding/ Wenner


GEMS User Manual

234

Screen 7.18

• All the fields are similar to those described in section Electrical/

Induced Polarisation/ Sounding/ Wenner. 8.2.1.16. Electrical/ Resistivity/ Profiling/ DD-Axial

On selecting this combination of Method, Sub-Method, Sounding / Profiling and Electrode Configuration, the following screen “DD – Axial Profiling” appears.

GEMS User Manual

235

Screen 7.19

• All the other fields are similar to those described in section Electrical/ Induced Polarisation/ Profiling/ Schlumberger and Electrical/ Resistivity/ Sounding/ DD-Azimuthal. Only Geometric Factor is different,

8.2.1.17. Electrical/Resistivity/ Profiling/ Lee-Partitioning


Screen 7.20


Induced Polarisation/ Profiling/ Wenner. • After entering Profile Data click <OK>, the following screen

“Investigation Details” appears

GEMS User Manual

236

Screen 7.21


Resistivity/ Sounding/ Lee-Partitioning .

8.2.1.18. Electrical/ Resistivity/ Profiling/ Schlumberger


Screen 7.22

• All the other fields are similar to those described in section Electrical/ Induced Polarisation / Profiling / Schlumberger .

GEMS User Manual

237

• Enter Profile Data and click <OK>, the following screen “Investigation Details” appears

Screen 7.23


Induced Polarisation / Profiling / Schlumberger . 8.2.1.19. Electrical/ Resistivity/ Profiling/ Wenner


Screen 7.24

GEMS User Manual

238

• All the other fields are similar to those described in section Electrical/ Induced Polarisation / Profiling / Wenner .

• Enter Profile Data and click <OK>, the following screen

“Investigation Details” appears

Screen 7.25

• All the other fields are similar to those described in section Electrical/ Induced Polarisation / Profiling / Wenner .

8.2.1.20. Electrical/ Self Potential/ Profiling


GEMS User Manual

239

Screen 7.26

• Enter Y/N in the Leap Frog Method field. • In the above screen, if the Leap Frog Method is (Y) then the value of

MN will remain the same. • If the Leap Frog Method is (N) then the value of MN will vary • Lateral Distance From Base Station (m):

User can enter the value of Profile Interval in meters in this field. In case of radial profiling this field is disabled.


• Click <OK> and the following screen “Investigation Details” appears

Screen 7.27

• MN (m):

GEMS User Manual

240

Term used to describe the potential electrode separation (MN). User can enter the value of MN in meters in this field.




8.2.1.21. Magnetic/ Profiling


Screen 7.28

• Time (Start) must be less than Time (End). • Enter the Total Number of Stations, 2nd Repeat Station Number, Repeat V

Intensity of 1st Station and 2nd Repeat Intensity in the above screen. • Click <OK>. The following screen “Investigation Details” appears.

GEMS User Manual

241

Screen 7.29

• Vertical Intensity (nT):

Vertical magnetic intensity measured at the station. • Corrected Intensity (nT):

Calculated field. User cannot enter a value in this field. The intensities are measured at different Stations for a single Profile. In this case, the intensity at the first Station is measured and then after going to a certain point, the intensity at the first Station is measured again. These two different intensities are compared, the difference of error is calculated and is shown in the Corrected Intensity.



8.2.1.22. Electromagnetic/ HLEM/ Sounding

On selecting this combination of Method, Sub-Method, Sounding / Profiling and Electrode Configuration, the following screen “HLEM Sounding / Profiling” appears.

GEMS User Manual

242

Screen 7.30

Lateral Distance from Base Station, Longitudinal Distance from Base Station, T-R Spacing, Station number and Distance from Station 1 are enabled in the case of Profiling data.

• Frequency (F): Frequency of the electro-magnetic radiation transmitted by the Transmitter in electro-magnetic profiling

• Inphase (IP): Direction of the secondary electromagnetic radiation received, with respect to the primary electromagnetic radiation.

• Quadrature (Q): Time delay of the secondary electromagnetic radiation received, in relation to the primary electromagnetic radiation.

Data for a number of frequency pairs (F1 and F2) are collected for each T-R Separation (T-R Space). User has to specify the frequency pairs for the first T-R Separation value. Suppose the data set contains 5 pairs for each T-R Separation, user has to enter the first five records for the first T-R Separation. Then user has to change the T-R Separation value, which must be greater than the previous T-R Space. User has to select the first frequency pair which was there for the first T-R Separation value. Once this record is entered, from the next record the frequency pairs come from the entered set of frequency pairs.

GEMS User Manual

243



8.2.1.23. Electromagnetic/ HLEM/ Profiling

On selecting this combination of Method, Sub-Method, Sounding / Profiling and Electrode Configuration, the following screen “HLEM Sounding / Profiling” appears.

Screen 7.31

• T-R Spacing (m):

Distance between transmitter and receiver in the electro-magnetic profiling. The value of T-R Spacing is constant for all the Stations. Data for a number of frequency pairs (F1 and F2) are collected for each Station. User has to specify the frequency pairs for the first Station. Suppose the data set contains 5 pairs for each station, and then the user has to enter the first five records for the first station. The user has to change the Station number and select the first frequency pair, which was there for the first station. Once this record is entered, from the next record the frequency pairs come from the entered set of frequency pairs.

• For adding a new record, enter the relevant details and click <Next>.

GEMS User Manual

244

• For deleting a record, double click the record from the list and check <Delete>, click <Next>.

• Click <Exit> to exit from the screen.

8.2.1.24. Electromagnetic/ VLF

On selecting this combination of Method, Sub-Method, Sounding / Profiling and Electrode Configuration, the following screen “VLF Exploration” appears.

Screen 7.32

• VLF Transmitter Stn1: User can select the VLF Transmitter Station for the first frequency from the list. The frequency transmitted from that station is displayed in the corresponding frequency.

• VLF Transmitter Stn2: User can select the VLF Transmitter Station for the second frequency from the list. The frequency transmitted from that station is displayed in the corresponding frequency.

• All the other fields are similar to those described in section Electromagnetic / VLF / Profiling.



GEMS User Manual

245

8.2.1.25. Seismic/ Reflection


Screen 7.33

• Enter the Time for each Station. • Time field cannot be reducing i.e. value entered in Time for a record

should be greater than the value entered in the previous record. • Distance(m) is generated from the station interval.



8.2.1.26. Seismic/ Refraction


GEMS User Manual

246

Screen 7.34

• Enter the Time for each Station. • Time field cannot be reducing i.e. value entered in Time for a record

should be greater than the value entered in the previous record. • Distance (m) is generated from the station interval.



8.2.2. Modify Existing Data

• Select the Exploration Site Id/ Exploration Site Name. • The Administrative Boundary Details corresponding to the selected site

are displayed in disabled mode. • For modification, all the options are enabled relevant for that site. Check

the items to be modified. • Click <Proceed>. The screens corresponding to the checked options

appear one after another. • The user can modify the existing data.

8.2.3. Delete Existing Data

• Select the Exploration Site Id/ Exploration Site. • Click <Delete>. A confirmation message comes.

GEMS User Manual

247

After confirmation the data for the site is deleted.

8.2.4. Interpretation of Exploration Site

• Select the Exploration Site Id/ Exploration Site. • Click <Interpreted Results> and the following screen “Interpreted

Results Of Geophysical Exploration” appears.

Screen 7.35

• Here user can enter the Interpreted Data for the exploration site. Enter

the layer thickness, layer resistivity and the layer lithology. • Click <Next>. Enter multiple records in the same way. • Click <Exit> to exit.

8.2.5. Other Options

• Click <Refresh> to refresh the screen. • Click <Exit> to exit from the screen.

GEMS User Manual

248

9. Statistics

This module is used to perform some statistical analysis on dynamic data. In this module, user can acess to the statistical reports and graphs for different types of Analysis like Time Series Analysis, Trend Analysis etc.

Screen 8.1 9.1. Basic Statistics 9.1.1. Description

In <Basic Statistics>, the statistical analysis is done based upon simple measures like Mean, Median, Standard Deviation, Range, Variance.


• Click <Basic Statistics> from Statistics. • Select the Site Id/ Site Name/ Old Site Id.

GEMS User Manual

249

Screen 8.2

• Project/Activities, Site Type, Site Sub-Type, Administrative Boundary

and Hydrological Boundary corresponding to the selected site is displayed in disabled mode.

• Click <Next> and the following screen “Selection Criteria” appears:

Screen 8.3

• Click <Summary> or <Detailed>.

GEMS User Manual

250

• Click <Monthly> / <Pre-Monsoon> / <Post-Monsoon> / <Annual> data.

• In case <Monthly > is selected then the months section is enabled and filled up with all the twelve months like Jan, Feb etc.

• In case <Pre-Monsoon> / <Post-Monsoon> is clicked, then the Months section get filled up with Pre-Monsoon or Post-Monsoon months respectively.

• In case <Annual> is clicked then the <Months> section is filled up with all the months

• Depending upon the selected site in screen “Selection Criteria”, the <Parameter Selection> list is filled up with the tables (Domain or Subject Area) as shown below:

Site Type/Table (Subject Area)

Depth to Water Level Well

Water Quality

Hydromet Station Rainfall

Artificial Recharge Structure Water Quality

Surface Water Site Water Quality

Table 8.1

• In case of Water Quality, there are forty-six Water Quality Parameters. • <Year From> displays the year in which the first data (record) for the

selected site is entered. • <Year To> displays the year of the maximum date on which data of the

selected parameter is available. • If the user has selected a Well Site and Selection Criteria as <Summary>,

all relevant data in <Parameter Selection> is displayed in the following screen “Selection Criteria”.

GEMS User Manual

251

Screen 8.4

• Click <Proceed>. • Data Editor and Output window are opened. • Data Editor shows the table containing the data for the selected

site. This can be viewed in the following screen “Data Editor”.

Screen 8.5

Output Window shows the output of the Table in three categories.

GEMS User Manual

252

• National Data Centre: It shows the Location Details of the selected site.

E.g. National Data Centre, Faridabad State : Maharashtra District : Jalgaon Tahsil : Jamner Block : Jamner Village : Shendurni Site Name : T/JG-027 Site Id : W203900075361501

• Means : It shows the Case Processing Summary and the Report of the

Statistical Analysis depending upon the data extracted from the table as given below.

Means

Case Processing Summary

55 98.2% 1 1.8% 56 100.0%Depth To Water LevelN Percent N Percent N Percent

Included Excluded TotalCases

Report

6.135451.153590

1.331.1555506.050006.05000

-.795.634

4.700.198.322

5.921906.02853

MeanStd. DeviationVarianceStd. Error of MeanMedianGrouped MedianKurtosisStd. Error of KurtosisRangeSkewnessStd. Error of SkewnessHarmonic MeanGeometric Mean

Depth ToWater Level

Screen 8.6

In Case Processing Summary, Included means the records for which data is present, Excluded means the records for which data is not present and the Total represents the sum of both Included & Excluded records.

GEMS User Manual

253

In Reports, values of Various Statistical Measures calculated according to the standard formulae of Statistics are shown.

Graph

Depth To Water Level

8.758.50

8.258.00

7.757.50

7.257.00

6.756.50

6.256.00

5.755.50

5.255.00

4.754.50

4.254.00

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

Std. Dev = 1.15 Mean = 6.14

N = 55.00

Screen 8.7

• The above Graph shows the Analysis of Water Level Vs Frequency. • X-Axis represents the Water Level and Y-Axis represents the Frequency. • Standard Deviation, Mean and No. of records are also shown in the

Legend.

GEMS User Manual

254

55N =

Depth To Water Level

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

Screen 8.8

The above box plot shows the Water level Box plot. Note: User can edit any area of the Graph like Legend, Axis Title, Labels etc. by double clicking on the area.

• Click <Back> to return to the screen “Selection of Site”. • Click <Refresh> to refresh the data on the screen “Selection of Site” • Click <Exit> to close the current screen. Analysis of a Hydromet Station

• If the user has selected a Hydromet Station and Selection Criteria as

<Summary>, all relevant data in <Parameter Selection> is displayed in the following screen “Selection Criteria”.

GEMS User Manual

255

Screen 8.9

• Click <Proceed> and the Data Editor and Output Viewer are opened. • The explanation of Data Editor and Viewer are same as discussed earlier

under Basic Statistics.

Rainall

850.0800.0

750.0700.0

650.0600.0

550.0500.0

450.0400.0

350.0300.0

250.0200.0

150.0100.0

50.00.0

1000

800

600

400

200

0

Std. Dev = 96.86 Mean = 39.6

N = 1190.00

Screen 8.10

• The above Graph shows the Analysis of Rainfall Vs Frequency. • X-Axis represents the Rainfall and Y-Axis represents the Frequency.

GEMS User Manual

256

• Standard Deviation, Mean and No. of records are also shown in the Legend

9.2. Analysis of Geophysical Parameters 9.2.1. Description

In this option the user can analyse the geophysical parameters like Resistance, Apparent Resistivity collected in the Geophysical Exploration.


Click <Analysis of Geophysical Parameters> from Statistics, the following screen “Analysis” appears.

Screen 8.11

• Select Site Id, Adapted Method of Exploration and Investigation Id. • Click <Proceed> and the following output screen appears.

Mean

GEMS User Manual

257

Screen 8.12

The output is divided into two sections namely the data analysis output and the Graph for the same.

Graph

ABBY2

2.001.751.50

1.2

1.0

.8

.6

.4

.2

0.0

Std. Dev = .35 Mean = 1.75

N = 2.00

Screen 8.13

GEMS User Manual

258

9.3. Time Series Analysis

Time Series Analysis is further categorized into three options • Exponential Smoothening • Auto regression • ARIMA

9.3.1. Exponential Smoothening


This option is a type of model in Time Series Analysis. This procedure smoothens out irregular components of time-series data, using any of a variety of models incorporating different assumptions about trend and seasonality.


• Click Statistics then click <Time Series Analysis>. • Click Exponential Smoothening option. Follow the same steps of

Selection of Site discussed under the topic, Basic Statistics. • Click <Proceed> and Data Editor and Output Viewer are opened. Data

Editor shows the table containing the data for the selected site. This can be viewed in the following screen “Data Editor”:

GEMS User Manual

259

Screen 8.14

The Output Viewer shows the output of the Table in three categories. National Data Centre: It shows the Location Details of the selected site.

E.g. National Data Centre, Faridabad State : Maharashtra District : Jalgaon Tahsil : Jamner Block : Jamner Village : Shendurni Site Name : T/JG-027 Site Id : W203900075361501

Exponential Smoothing has four types of Models. User can use any of these depending upon the requirement. These models are:

• Simple Model : This model assumes that the series has no trend and no seasonal variation.

• Holt Model: This model assumes that the series has a linear trend and no seasonal variation.

• Winters Model: This model assumes that the series has a linear trend and multiplicative seasonal variation (its magnitude increases or decreases with the overall level of the series).

• Custom Model: This model allows user to specify the trend and seasonality components.

GEMS User Manual

260

ExSmooth MODEL: MOD_4. _ Results of EXSMOOTH procedure for Variable V2 MODEL= LN (Linear trend, no seasonality) Initial values: Series Trend 5.39016 .01969 DFE = 127. The SSE is: Alpha Gamma SSE .1000000 .1000000 549.55050 The following new variables are being created: NAME LABEL FIT_2 Fit for V2 from EXSMOOTH, MOD_4 LN A .10 G .10 ERR_2 Error for V2 from EXSMOOTH, MOD_4 LN A .10 G .10

Graph

Date

06-JUN-2001 00:00:00

12-JAN-2000 00:00:00

23-MAY-1998 00:00:00

11-SEP-1996 00:00:00

12-NOV-1994 00:00:00

06-JAN-1993 00:00:00

08-NOV-1990 00:00:00

17-JAN-1989 00:00:00

26-MAY-1987 00:00:00

25-AUG-1985 00:00:00

05-NOV-1983 00:00:00

05-JUN-1982 00:00:00

25-AUG-1980 00:00:00

25-APR-1979 00:00:00

05-NOV-1977 00:00:00

05-JUN-1976 00:00:00

25-APR-1972 00:00:00

05-NOV-1970 00:00:00

05-JUN-1969 00:00:00

Valu

e D

epth

To

Wat

er L

evel

14

12

10

8

6

4

2

0

Screen 8.15

The above Graph shows the Analysis of Water Level to Time.

• X-Axis represents the Date and Y-Axis represents the Water Level.

GEMS User Manual

261

9.3.2. Auto regression


This procedure estimates a linear regression model with first-order autoregressive errors.


• Click Statistics then click <Time Series Analysis> and select the Auto regression option.

• Follow the same steps of Selection of Site discussed under the topic, Basic Statistics.

• Click <Proceed> and the Data Editor and Output Viewer are opened. • Data Editor shows the table containing the data for the selected site. This

can be viewed in the following “Data Editor” screen:

Screen 8.16

Output Viewer shows the output of the Table in two categories. National Data Centre: It shows the Location Details of the selected site as shown earlier. Auto Regression output:

GEMS User Manual

262

AREG MODEL: MOD_1 Model Description: Variable: V2 Regressors: V1 95.00 percent confidence intervals will be generated. Split group number: 1 Series length: 68 No missing data. Termination criteria: Parameter epsilon: .001 Maximum number of iterations: 10 Initial values: Estimate of Autocorrelation Coefficient Rho 0 Cochrane-Orcutt Estimates Multiple R .13275192 R-Squared .01762307 Adjusted R-Squared .00250958 Standard Error 2.5742701 Durbin-Watson 1.7178161 Analysis of Variance: DF Sum of Squares Mean Square Regression 1 7.72725 7.7272514 Residuals 65 430.74633 6.6268667 Variables in the Equation: B SEB BETA T SIG T V1 .00000000 .00000000 -.13275192 -1.0798375 .28420513 CONSTANT 30.55025157 24.55389600 . 1.2442120 .21788959 Iteration History: Iteration Rho SE Rho DW MSE 1 .13211161 .12294755 1.9124162 6.6105163

GEMS User Manual

263

2 .13251671 .12294084 1.9130152 6.6105058 _ Conclusion of estimation phase. Estimation terminated at iteration number 3 because: All parameter estimates changed by less than .001 FINAL PARAMETERS: Estimate of Autocorrelation Coefficient Rho .13251837 Standard Error of Rho .12294082 Cochrane-Orcutt Estimates Multiple R .10971027 R-Squared .01203634 Adjusted R-Squared -.01883752 Standard Error 2.5710904 Durbin-Watson 1.9130177 Analysis of Variance: DF Sum of Squares Mean Square Regression 1 5.15428 5.1542826 Residuals 64 423.07237 6.6105057 Variables in the Equation: B SEB BETA T SIG T V1 .00000000 .00000000 -.10971027 -.8830123 .38053443 CONSTANT 29.01670088 28.29067710 . 1.0256630 .30891156 The following new variables are being created: Name Label FIT_1 Fit for V2 from AREG, MOD_1 ERR_1 Error for V2 from AREG, MOD_1 LCL_1 95% LCL for V2 from AREG, MOD_1 UCL_1 95% UCL for V2 from AREG, MOD_1 SEP_1 SE of fit for V2 from AREG, MOD_1

Graph

GEMS User Manual

264

Date

27-AUG-2000 00:00:00

01-SEP-1999 00:00:00

19-AUG-1998 00:00:00

21-AUG-1997 00:00:00

11-SEP-1996 00:00:00

24-AUG-1995 00:00:00

27-AUG-1994 00:00:00

25-AUG-1993 00:00:00

01-SEP-1992 00:00:00

08-NOV-1990 00:00:00

04-NOV-1989 00:00:00

23-NOV-1988 00:00:00

03-NOV-1987 00:00:00

10-NOV-1986 00:00:00

05-NOV-1985 00:00:00

05-NOV-1983 00:00:00

05-NOV-1982 00:00:00

Valu

e D

epth

To

Wat

er L

evel

14

12

10

8

6

4

2

0

Screen 8.17

9.3.3. ARIMA


ARIMA stands for “Auto-Regressive Integrated Moving Average”. Auto-Regressive Integrated Moving Average is a general model widely used in time series analysis. Based upon prior investigation of the behaviour of a series, the user specifies three numbers that represent the order of Auto regression (p), the degree of differencing (d), and the order of moving average (q). The general model is written as ARIMA (p,d,q). The model can be extended to incorporate seasonality.


• Click Statistics then click <Time Series Analysis> and select option ARIMA.

• Follow the same steps of Selection of Site discussed under the topic “Basic Statistics”.

• Click <Proceed> and the Data Editor and Output Viewer are opened. 9.4. Trend Analysis

GEMS User Manual

265

9.4.1. Description

Trend is long-term changes in the level of a series. A time series with trend cannot be meaningfully described by the overall mean and standard deviation, for both statistics are influenced by the point and span in time. The autocorrelation function plot of a series characterized by trend dies out in a slow linear fashion, so that autocorrelations significantly different from zero can be found at high lags. Typically, trend is removed by the differencing transformation.


• Follow the same steps of Selection of Site discussed under the topic, Basic Statistics.

• Click <Proceed> and the Data Editor and the Output Viewer are opened. 9.5. Regression Analysis 9.5.1. Description

Regression analysis is an estimation of the linear relationship between a dependent variable and one or more independent variables or covariates. Regression Analysis is further classified as follows:

• Linear regression: Linear Regression estimates the coefficients of the linear equation, involving one or more independent variables, that best predict the value of the dependent variable.

• Curve estimation: The Curve Estimation procedure produces curve estimation regression statistics and related plots for eleven different curve estimation regression models. A separate model is produced for each dependent variable. The user can also save predicted values, residuals, and prediction intervals as new variables.

The user can select one or more curve estimation regression models. To determine which model to use, plot the data. If the variables appear to be related linearly, use a simple linear regression model. When those variables are not linearly related, try transforming the data. When a transformation does not help, a more complicated model may be needed. View a scatter plot of the data, if the plot resembles a mathematical function recognized fit the data to that type of model. For example, if the data resembles an exponential function, use an exponential model. The following models are available in the Curve Estimation procedure: linear, polynomial, logarithmic, inverse, quadratic, cubic, power, compound, S-curve, logistic, growth, and exponential. If user is unsure of which model best fits his data, the user should try several models and select among them.

GEMS User Manual

266

• Moving average: In time series analysis, the average of a series value with

surrounding series values. Moving averages are used to smooth a time series-that is, reduce noise or fluctuation in the series.


• Select <Trend Analysis> from Statistics. • Follow the same steps of Selection of Site discussed under the topic,

Basic Statistics. • Click <Proceed> and Data Editor and Output Viewer are opened.

9.6. Spectral Analysis 9.6.1. Description

Spectral Analysis is a technique whereby a time series is decomposed into a sum of periodic functions plus an error term.


• Click <Spectral analysis> from Statistics and the following screen “Spectral Analysis” appears.

Screen 8.18

GEMS User Manual

267

• Select the well from Well ID/Well Name/Old Well ID, Begin date and End date with Interval populates. Each row of the list represents the data of a different duration.

• The From date, From time, To date and To time gets filled up with the Begin date and End date values from the list. These values can be changed manually.

• The data interval and the time shift has to be entered. The interval is the interval of time between two consecutive data. For example in the above case, six is chosen which means data with six-hour interval has to be extracted.

• Shift is the time shift, can be added or subtracted from last date or begin date whenever there is change from one row to another row of the list. In the case above the shift is taken as zero.

• Click <Extract Data> and the begin date, time and end date, time as well as the number of data gets filled up. This data represents the extracted data from the total list.

• The plots of all data as well as extracted data can be viewed. • Click <Spectral> to get the Spectral Analysis of the extracted

data. The following screen “Actual/Filtered/Residual components appears.

Screen 8.19

• The above screen shows the plots of Original, Filtered and Residual

GEMS User Manual

268

Series. It has the option of entering the series name with Maximum Lag and Parameter values that are in editable mode, for further analysis.

• The value of filter used can be changed and the changes are reflected in the shape of the filtered series.

• Click <Analyse> after selecting the series and a following screen “ACF and SDF appears, displaying the Autocorrelogram (Plot of Autocorrelation Vrs. Lag) and Spectral Density Plots.

• The Spectral Density plot has the UCL (Upper Control Limit) and the LCL (Lower Control Limit).

Screen 8.20 9.7. Harmonic Analysis 9.7.1. Description

Harmonic analysis is different from other time-series techniques. Instead of analyzing the variation from one time point to the next, it analyzes the variation of the series as a whole into periodic components of different frequency. Smooth series have more variation at low frequencies; random variation ("white noise") spreads the variation over all frequencies.


• Click <Harmonic Analysis> from Statistics. • Follow the same steps of Selection of Site discussed under the topic

“Basic Statistics”. • Click <Proceed> and the Data Editor and Output Viewer are opened.

GEMS User Manual

269

Note: Spectral Analysis and Harmonic Analysis are more or less the same. The only difference is that in Spectral Analysis, Periodogram & Spectral Density are plotted while in Harmonic Analysis, Periodogram, Spectral Density, Squared Coherency, Cospectral Density, Quadrature Spectrum, Phase Spectrum, Cross amplitude and Gain are plotted.

9.8. Autocorrelation Function 9.8.1. Description

Autocorrelation is the correlations of a series with lagged values of itself, also known as serial correlation. The autocorrelation function is often represented as a plot. The ACF plot is a useful identification and diagnostic aid.


• Follow the same steps of Selection of Site discussed under the topic “Basic Statistics”.

• Click <Proceed> and the Data Editor and Output Viewer are opened. 9.9. Multivariate Statistics 9.9.1. Description

Multivariate Statistics is the type of analysis involving multiple variables. It is further classified into four methods:

Principal Component Analysis: Principal Component (Factor) analysis attempts to identify underlying variables, or factors, that explain the pattern of correlations within a set of observed variables. Factor analysis is often used in data reduction to identify a small number of factors that explain most of the variance observed in a much larger number of manifest variables. Factor analysis can also be used to generate hypotheses regarding causal mechanisms or to screen variables for subsequent analysis (for example, to identify collinearity prior to performing a linear regression analysis). Reliability Analysis: Reliability analysis allows user to study the properties of measurement scales and the items that make them up. The Reliability Analysis procedure calculates a number of commonly used measures of scale reliability and also provides information about the relationships between individual items in the scale.

GEMS User Manual

270

Intraclass correlation coefficients can be used to compute interrater reliability estimates. Cluster Analysis: This procedure attempts to identify relatively homogeneous groups of cases (or variables) based on selected characteristics, using an algorithm that starts with each case (or variable) in a separate cluster and combines clusters until only one is left. User can analyse raw variables or can choose from a variety of standardizing transformations. Distance or similarity measures are generated by the Proximities procedure. Statistics are displayed at each stage to help user select the best solution.


• Click <Multivariate Statistics> of Statistics, then click one of the three options available.

• Follow the same steps of Selection of Site discussed under topic, Basic Statistics.

• Click <Proceed> and the Data Editor and the Output Viewer are opened. 9.10. Correlation 9.10.1. Description

Correlation describes the relationship between variables or rank orders. Before calculating a correlation coefficient, screen the selected data for outliers (which can cause misleading results) and evidence of a linear relationship. Pearson’s correlation coefficient is a measure of linear association. Two variables can be perfectly related, but if the relationship is not linear, Pearson’s correlation coefficient is not an appropriate statistic for measuring their association.


• Click <Correlation> from Statistics. • Follow the same steps of Selection of Site discussed under, Basic

Statistics. • Click <Proceed> and the Data Editor and Output Viewer are opened.

9.11. Test of Stationarity 9.11.1. Description

Stationarity is a condition required by time series to fit an ARIMA model. Pure MA series are stationary, however, AR and ARMA series may not be. A stationary series has a constant mean and a constant variance over time.

GEMS User Manual

271


• Click <Test of Stationarity> from Statistics. Follow the same steps of Selection of Site as discussed earlier under, Basic Statistics.

• Click <Proceed> and the Data Editor and Output Viewer are opened. 9.12. Auto-Correlogram 9.12.1. Description

Auto-Correlogram is the graphical representation of Auto-Correlations. Correlations of a series with lagged values of itself, also known as serial correlation. The autocorrelation function is often represented as a plot. The ACF plot is a useful identification and diagnostic aid.


• Click <Auto Correlation Function> from Statistics. • Follow the same steps of Selection of Site discussed under topic, Basic


9.13. One Sample T Test 9.13.1. Description

One-Sample T Test procedure tests whether the mean of a single variable differs from a specified constant.


• Click <One-Sample T Test> from Statistics. • Follow the same steps of Selection of Site discussed under topic, Basic

Statistics. • Click <Proceed> and the Data Editor and Output Viewer are opened

9.14. Non-Parametric Tests 9.14.1. Description

Non-Parametric Tests have two options:

Chi-Square Tests: The Chi-Square Test procedure tabulates a variable into categories and computes a chi-square statistic. This goodness-of-fit test compares the observed and expected frequencies in each category to test either that all categories contain the same proportion of values or each category contains a user-specified proportion of values.

GEMS User Manual

272

One-Sample Kolmogorov-Smirnov Test: The One-Sample Kolmogorov-Smirnov Test procedure compares the observed cumulative distribution function for a variable with a specified theoretical distribution, which may be normal, uniform, Poisson, or exponential. The Kolmogorov-Smirnov Z is computed from the largest difference (in absolute value) between the observed and theoretical cumulative distribution functions. This goodness-of-fit test tests whether the observations could reasonably have come from the specified distribution or not.


• Click <Non Parametric Tests> from Statistics. Click the option Chi Square Test.

• Follow the same steps of Selection of Site discussed under topic, Basic Statistics.

• Click <Proceed> and the Data Editor and Output Viewer are opened. • Click <Non Parametric Tests> from Statistics. Click the option One

Sample Kolmogorov-Smironov Tests. • Follow the same steps of Selection of Site discussed under topic, Basic


9.15. General Linear Model 9.15.1. Description

Linear Model estimates the coefficients of the linear equation, involving one or more independent variables, that best predict the value of the dependent variable.


• Click <General Linear Model> from Statistics. • Follow the same steps of Selection of Site discussed under topic, Basic


9.16. Missing value Computation 9.16.1. Description

Missing Values defines specified data values as user missing. It is often useful to know why information is missing. For example, user might want to distinguish between data missing due to refusal to answer by the respondent and data missing due to non-applicability of the question to the respondent. Data values specified

GEMS User Manual

273

as user missing are flagged for special treatment and are excluded from most calculations.


• Click <Missing Value Computation> from Statistics. • Follow the same steps of Selection of Site discussed under topic, Basic

Statistics and click <Next> then the following screen “Selection Criteria” appears.

Screen 8.21

• Select the Method. The Methods can be Linear Interpolation, Linear Trend at Point, Mean of Nearby Point, Median of Nearby Points and Series Mean.

• After selecting any of the Methods from the Method list, follow the same steps of Selection of Site discussed under, Basic Statistics.

• Depending upon the selected Method the Missing value can be computed. • Click <Proceed> and the Data Editor and Output Viewer are opened.

9.17. Advanced Statistics Advanced Statistics option is used to move the data of a selected unit to the Data editor so that it can be used for other analysis features of the Statistical Tool.

GEMS User Manual

274

GEMS User Manual

275

10. Groundwater Assessment

The groundwater resources assessment is based on the recommendations of the Groundwater Estimation Committee (GEC), 1997. The Assessment Unit is a Tahsil/ Taluka, Block/ Mandal or Watershed. The first two units are administrative in nature and the last one is a hydrologic unit. For areas characterized predominantly by hardrocks, Watershed may be selected as the groundwater Assessment unit. For areas characterized predominantly by alluvial terrain, Block/ Mandal or Tahsil/ Taluka may be considered as Assessment Unit for analysis. Although a hydrologic unit, Watershed, is a recommended unit for analysis, the application facilitates analysis of any of the above Assessment Unit Types. For the computation purpose, each such assessment unit is divided into four sub-units viz. Hilly-, Command-, Non-Command- and Poor Groundwater Quality- Area. The area having slopes greater than 20 %, categorized as Hilly Area, has been ignored for assessment. However such areas having groundwater potential, may be included in any of the remaining sub-units whichever is the most appropriate. The estimation methodology is a discrete groundwater balancing approach of estimating a single lumped value for each component of an assessment sub-unit as a whole. Estimation of most of the groundwater balancing components viz. groundwater draft, recharge components: rainfall, canal, water conservation structures, tank and pond, return seepage from applied surface water irrigation water and applied groundwater irrigation water, and mostly ignored components such as inter-aquifer flow, evapotranspiration, evaporation, stream-aquifer interflow and inter-watershed flow are facilitated in GEMS. Estimation of the groundwater balancing components and other characteristics such as water table trend, categorization of assessment unit are made separately for each assessment subunit. The components are estimated separately for the monsoon and non-monsoon periods. Facilities for estimating other additional resources: additional potential resources and static Resources are provided in GEMS. Stage of Groundwater Development, Watertable Trend, Categorization of areas for scope of future groundwater development, Net Groundwater Available, Allocation for Domestic and Industrial Water Supply, Net Groundwater Available For Future Irrigation Uses are estimated along with the balancing components. The Resources Development and Analysis focuses on the estimation of significant groundwater balancing components, creation of a groundwater possibility map, and groundwater pollution vulnerability map. Multivariate regression analysis is implemented to detect significant groundwater balancing component(s) to storage change, and creation of a predicted storage change map.

GEMS User Manual

276

Groundwater possibility map involves a GIS based Integration and analysis of the user defined layers. Other ancillary components include evapotranspiration, evaporation, stream-aquifer inter-flow and inter-watershed flow. These components can be used in the estimation of storage change. The GW Assessment module contains five submenu items (as shown in Screen 9.1) and provides varied aspects of Groundwater Resources and Analysis.

Screen 9.1

<Extract Spatial Attributes> allows the extraction of spatial attributes from available maps (layers) in the user work-area using GIS based analysis. The <Assessment Unit Details> covers data entry of all the groundwater balancing components including the Ancillary Components (ignored on GEC, norms). <Estimation of Groundwater Balancing Components> involves the computation of all the contributive groundwater recharge and draft components and Additional Potential Resources and Static Resources. These estimates are used in the next step for estimating Stage of Groundwater Development, Watertable Trend,

GEMS User Manual

277

Categorization for Future Groundwater Development, Net Groundwater Available for Future Uses, Allocation for Domestic and Industrial water supply, Net Groundwater Availability for Future Irrigation Uses. <Extended Resources Estimation> computes map-based groundwater recharge or loss from rainfall, evaporation, evapotranspiration. <Resources Development and Analysis> analyzes for estimation of significant Groundwater balancing components, Creation of a Groundwater possibility map, and Groundwater Vulnerability map.

10.1. Extract Spatial attributes 10.1.1. Description

For the selected State/District/Basin/Sub-Basin, all the available maps (layers) are put to GIS based overlay analysis. The layers viz. canals, geology, tank / pond, cropping pattern, water conservation structures belonging to the Command/Non-Command/ Poor Groundwater Quality areas of a Watershed/ Tahsil/ Block are extracted and stored in the database. Theses attributes are retrieved while data entry of the Groundwater Balancing Components, described in Section 9.8.4.


Click<Extract Spatial Attributes> from GW Assessment. The following screen “Extract Spatial Attributes” appears.

Screen 9.2

• Select the Assessment Unit Type • Select or Enter Assessment Year. • If the selected Assessment Unit Type is Administrative (Tahsil/ Block),

Select State and District.

GEMS User Manual

278

• If selected Assessment Unit Type is Watershed, Select State, District, Basin and Sub-Basin.

• Click <Proceed>

The available layers of the user work-area are filtered as per the selection of Administrative and/or hydrologic details, and an overlay analysis is made.

10.2. Assessment Unit Details 10.2.1. Description

The sub-menu <Assessment Unit> facilitates Add/Modify/Delete the characteristics of the Assessment Unit. The Assessment Unit Details include the location information, monsoon, monitoring months, terrain type and its Command, Hilly, Poor Groundwater Quality areas.


Click <Assessment Unit Details> from GW Assessment. The following screen “Assessment Unit” appears.

Screen 9.3

10.2.2.1. Add Assessment Unit

This option facilitates adding a Watershed, Tahsil or Block as an Assessment Unit from maps or manually. If maps are not available, details of the Assessment

GEMS User Manual

279

Unit are entered manually. Otherwise the specific spatial information is selected from GIS based analysis.

Add Assessment Unit from Map

• Select or Enter Assessment Year • Select Assessment Unit Type • Select the appropriate Administrative Boundaries and Geographical

Boundaries • Click <Select from Map>. Application window displays a map of Tahsils

or Blocks or Watersheds (as per the selected Assessment Unit Type) belonging to the selected Administrative and/or Hydrologic boundary.

Screen 9.4

• Select the Tahsil or Block or Watershed and click <Select> from the Main

Menu tool bar. MapInfo Executes an overlay analysis and extracts spatial information. The screen “Assessment Unit Details” appears with the extracted spatial information.

• Select non-spatial attributes: Predominant Monsoon, Pre- Monsoon and Post-Monsoon Monitoring, Predominant Rock-Type and Geographical Location.

GEMS User Manual

280

• Click <Save> to save the Data and the Assessment Unit. The Screen “Assessment Unit Details” closes and the screen “Assessment Unit” appears.

Screen 9.5

Add Assessment Unit (Non-GIS based)

• Select or Enter Assessment Year • Select Assessment Unit Type • Select the appropriate Administrative Boundaries and Geographical

Boundaries • Click <Select>. The selection made from the screen “Assessment Unit”

are displayed in the screen “Assessment Unit Details”. If the selected Assessment Unit Type is a Tahsil, the selection of Watershed and Block is not made. If the Assessment Unit Type is a Block, the Watershed selection is not made. For Watersheds, the Tahsil and Block selections are available. On selection of a Watershed or Tahsil or Block as an Assessment Unit, the Assessment Unit Name is accordingly assigned and displayed.

• Enter Latitude and Longitude. A polygon is internally created from the entered latitude and longitude. The Toposheet No of the centroid of the polygon is calculated and displayed.

• Select the Predominant Monsoon, Pre-Monsoon and Post-Monsoon Monitoring, Predominant Rock Type (Alluvium or Hard Rock).

• If Predominant Rock Type is Alluvium, select the Geographical Location. If Predominant Rock-Type is Hard Rock, the Geographic Location is disabled.

GEMS User Manual

281

• Enter the total Geographic Area, Hilly Area, Command Area and Poor Groundwater Quality Area. The Groundwater Worthy Area and Non-Command Area are calculated as given below and are displayed.

Groundwater Worthy Area = Geographic Area - Hilly Area. Non-Command Area = Groundwater Worthy Area – Command Area - Poor Groundwater Quality Area

• Click <Save> to save the Data and the Assessment Unit. The screen “Assessment Unit Details” closes and the screen “Assessment Unit” appears.

10.2.2.2. Modify Assessment Unit Details

• Select or Enter Assessment Year. • Select Assessment Unit Type. The available Assessment Units of the

selected Assessment Unit Type in the User Work-Area are displayed. The Assessment Units are filtered on further selection of a State, District, Basin and Sub-Basin.

• Select Assessment Unit • Click <Modify> • Screen “Assessment Unit Details” appears which allows modification of

areas assigned to Hilly, Command and Poor Groundwater Quality regions. • Click <Save> to save the modified data.

10.2.2.3. Delete Assessment Unit

• Select or Enter Assessment Year • Select Assessment Unit Type • The available Assessment Units of the Assessment Unit Type in the User

Work-Area are displayed. The Assessment Units are filtered on further selection of a State, District, Basin and Sub-Basin.

• Select Assessment Unit • Click <Delete>. A confirmation message is displayed. • Click <OK>. The selected Assessment Unit is deleted and it is reflected

in the Assessment Units List. 10.3. Groundwater Draft 10.3.1. Description

The gross groundwater draft is estimated separately for different uses viz. irrigation, domestic and industrial water supply in an Assessment Unit. The draft is computed using either Cropping Pattern or Well Census data.

GEMS User Manual

282

10.3.2. Well Census Data in groundwater draft computation


Select an Assessment Unit and click <Groundwater Draft> from the screen “Assessment Unit”. The following screen “Groundwater Draft” appears.

Screen 9.6

10.3.2.1.1. Add Well Type and Unit Draft

• Select Assessment Sub-Unit and Well Type. The Average Unit Draft of the Monsoon and Non-monsoon periods are displayed.

• Enter No. Of Wells for a particular type use for Irrigation or Domestic or Industrial uses. The No. Of Wells In Use are displayed.

• Check <Data Available For The No. Of Wells In Use>, if the Number of wells operational is known.

• Enter the No Of Wells In Use. • Check <Field Data Available>, if Average Unit Draft from field studies

is available, or the user requires to make use of corresponding values of similar Well Types of neighbouring Assessment Units. The screen “Documented Field Values” appears. All field values of Well Types of neighbouring Assessment Units are displayed.

• Double click a row from the list. Click <OK>. Selected Average Draft and Running Days of the Monsoon and Non-Monsoon periods are

GEMS User Manual

283

displayed in the screen “Groundwater Draft”. These displayed values can be modified with field values.

Screen 9.7

10.3.2.1.2. Modify Well Type and Unit Draft

• Select the Assessment Sub-Unit and Well Type • Modify the displayed data. • Click <Save> to save the modified data.

10.3.2.1.3. Delete Well Type and Unit Draft

Select the Assessment Sub-Unit and Well.

• Click <Delete>. A confirmation message is displayed. • Click <OK>. Selected Well Type is deleted and it is reflected in the

Existing Well Type list. 10.3.3. Cropping Pattern Data

Crop-Water Requirement for each crop and Return Flow Factors from applied groundwater irrigation water are captured for all the available assessment subunits of an Assessment Units. Following recommendations of the GEC are adopted for computations of draft for irrigation uses using cropping pattern data.

• The average water level of the monsoon period for a sub-unit is computed as the average of the water level of pre-monsoon and post-monsoon intervals. For the non-monsoon interval, it is calculated from post-monsoon interval of the current groundwater assessment year and the pre-monsoon interval of the next immediate groundwater year. As the

GEMS User Manual

284

observation wells are generally absent in a Poor Groundwater Quality area, or wherever the water level data is missing/ unavailable, the range of water level for both the periods is assumed to be less than 10 m.

• The crop and average water level decide the Return Flow Factor as per GEC.

• The Return Flow Factor (RFF) recommended as per GEC is applicable for rotational supply of irrigation water. The Return Flow Factor increases by 0.05 for continuous supply of irrigation water.

• The actual average discharge at the outlet during any season is taken as 0.6 times the design discharge, in case of non-availability of data.


Select an Assessment Unit and click <Cropping Pattern> from the screen “Assessment Unit”. The following screen “Cropping Pattern” appears.

Screen 9.8

10.3.3.1.1. Add Crop

Add crop from Map

• Select Assessment Sub-Unit, Water Source as Groundwater, Crop Types. Crop Names from Map based analysis are displayed

GEMS User Manual

285

• Select a Crop Name. The Monsoon and Non-Monsoon Irrigated Areas, Crop-Water Requirement, Return Flow Factors of the Monsoon and Non-Monsoon seasons are displayed.

• Check < Field Data Available>, if Return Flow Factor is available, or the user requires to make use of corresponding values of similar crops of neighbouring Assessment Units. The screen “Documented Field Values” appears. All Return Flow Factors from field studies of crops of the neighbouring Assessment Units are displayed.

• Double click a row. Click <OK>. Selected Return Flow Factors are displayed in the screen “Cropping Pattern Data”. These displayed values can further be modified with Field values.

• When there is continuous supply of irrigation water, Check <Continuous Water Supply During Monsoon> and <Continuous Water Supply During Non-Monsoon>. The Return Flow Factor is modified (increases by 5% from the actual value of the GEC norms) and displayed.

• Click <Save> to save the data of the selected Crop Name. • Check <Data Entry Incomplete> if the cropping data entry is incomplete

for the selected Assessment Unit. • Click <Exit>. The screen “Cropping Pattern” closes and the screen

“Assessment Unit” appears and against the same Assessment Unit, the <Cropping Pattern Data> shows a symbol in red “I” (Incomplete) as shown in Screen 9.9. This indicates that the user has provided incomplete information.

Screen 9.9

Add Crop (Non-GIS based)

GEMS User Manual

286

• Select Assessment Sub-Unit, Water Source as Groundwater, Crop Types, Crop Name. Crop-Water Requirement, Return Flow Factors of the Monsoon and Non-Monsoon seasons are displayed.

• Enter Monsoon and Non-Monsoon Irrigated Areas. • Check < Field Data Available>, if Return Flow Factor is available, or the

user requires to make use of corresponding values of similar crops of neighbouring Assessment Units. The screen “Documented Field Values” appears. All Return Flow Factors from field studies of crops of the neighbouring Assessment Units are displayed.

• Double click a row. Click <OK>. Selected Return Flow Factors are displayed in the screen “Cropping Pattern Data”. These displayed values can further be modified with Field values.

• When there is continuous supply of irrigation water, Check <Continuous Water Supply During Monsoon> and <Continuous Water Supply During Non-Monsoon>. The Return Flow Factor is modified (increases by 5% from the actual value of the GEC norms) and displayed.

• Click <Save> to save the data of the selected Crop Name.

10.3.3.1.2. Modify Crop

• Select the Assessment Sub-Unit,Water Source of irrigation as Groundwater, Crop Type, Crop Name. Data of the selected Crop Name is displayed.

• Modify required parameters. • Click <Save> to save the modified data of the selected Crop Name.

10.3.3.1.3. Delete Crop

• Selects the Assessment Sub-Unit, Water Source of irrigation as Groundwater, Crop Type, Crop Name

• Click <Delete>. The data of the selected Crop Name is deleted, and it is reflected in the Existing Crops list.

10.4. Rainfall Recharge Data 10.4.1. Description

Computation of Recharge from rainfall requires attributes viz. rainfall, water level, Rainfall Infiltration Factor (Rif ) and Specific Yield (Sy). Three screens are provided for storing these parameters. The Rif and Sy against each geologic zone belonging to an Assessment Unit is entered. Wherever maps are available, spatial attributes are selected from GIS based analysis and queries. Rainfall and water level of hydrograph stations belonging to or in close proximity (when

GEMS User Manual

287

hydrograph stations unavailable) to the Assessment Sub-Unit are selected for analysis. Dry Season Groundwater Balancing method for Sy computation is generally recommended for Hardrock terrains belonging to Non-Command Areas. Two methods are provided for estimating the Sy viz. using cropping data and well census data. Use of the Dry Season Groundwater Balancing method for estimation of Sy is optional.


10.4.2.1. Rainfall Infiltration Factor and Specific Yield

Select an Assessment Unit and click <Rainfall Recharge Data> from the screen “Assessment Unit”. The screen “Rainfall Recharge Data” appears.

Screen 9.10

10.4.2.1.1. Add Geologic Unit

Add Geologic Unit from Map

• Select the Assessment Sub-Unit. Different Rock Groups of the Assessment Sub-Unit are displayed.

• Select the Rock Group. The Formation Age and Lithologic Units are displayed.

GEMS User Manual

288

• Select Lithologic Unit. The area, Rainfall Infiltration Factor and Specific Yield of the selected Lithogic Unit are displayed.

• Check <Watershed Development Done>. The Rainfall Infiltration Factor increases by 5% and displayed.

• Check <Field Study for Rif Done> to enter Rif from field studies or select it from similar lithology of neighbouring Assessment Units. The screen “Documented Field Values” appears.

• Double click a row and click <OK>. The screen <“Documented Field Values”> closes and the screen “Rainfall Recharge Data” displays the selected Rainfall Infiltration Factor. The Rainfall Infiltration Factor can be modified with a field value.

• Check <Field Study for Sy Done> to enter Sy from field studies or select it from similar lithology of neighbouring Assessment Units. The screen “Documented Field Values” appears.

• Double click a row and click <OK>. The screen “Documented Field Values” closes and the screen “Rainfall Recharge Data” displays selected Sy. The Sy can be modified with a field value.

• Check <Dry Season Groundwater Balance Method> for computation of Sy. The screen “Dry Season Groundwater Balance Method for Sy” appears.

Add Geologic Unit (Non-GIS based) • Select an Assessment Sub-Unit. Different Rock Group of the Assessment

Sub-Unit are displayed. • Select a Rock Group. The Formation Age and Lithologic Units are

displayed. • Select Lithologic Unit. Rainfall Infiltration Factor and Specific Yield of

the selected Lithogic Unit are displayed. • Enter Area • Check <Watershed Development Done>. The Rainfall Infiltration

Factor increases by 5% and displayed. • Check <Field Study for Rif Done> to enter Rif from field studies or

select it from similar lithology of neighbouring Assessment Units. The screen “Documented Field Values” appears.

GEMS User Manual

289

Screen 9.11

• Double click a row from the list and click <OK>. The screen “Documented Field Values” closes and the screen “Rainfall Recharge Data” displays the selected Rainfall Infiltration Factor. The Rainfall Infiltration Factor can be modified with a field value.

• Check <Field Study for Sy Done> to enter Sy from field studies or select it from similar lithology of neighbouring Assessment Units. The screen “Documented Field Values” appears.

• Double click a row and click <OK>. The screen “Documented Field Values” closes and the screen “Rainfall Recharge Data” displays the selected Sy. The Sy can be modified with a field value.

Screen 9.12

• Check <Dry Season Groundwater Balance Method> for computation

of Sy. The screen “Dry Season Groundwater Balance Method for Sy” appears.

• Click < Next > to save the data.

GEMS User Manual

290

10.4.2.1.2. Modify Geologic Unit

• Select the Assessment Sub-Unit. Regions of different Rock Group, Formation Age and Lithologic Unit, Area, Rif and Sy are displayed in a list.

• Double click a row for modification. All the attributes of the row are displayed for modification.

• Modify the data as required. • Click < Next > to save the data.

10.4.2.1.3. Delete Geologic Unit

• Select the Assessment Sub-Unit. Regions of different Rock Group, Formation Age and Lithologic Unit, Area, Rif and Sy are displayed in a list.

• Double click a row for deletion. All the attributes of the row are displayed for deletion.

• Check <Delete> • Click <Next>. The same data from the list is removed.

10.4.2.2. Dry Season Groundwater Balancing Method

Screen 9.13

GEMS User Manual

291

• No. Of Dry Season Months and No. Of Non-Monsoon Months are

displayed. • Enter a Well, Depth to Water Level of Beginning and End Of Dry Season.

Fluctuation is calculated and displayed. • Enter Base Flow and Area. Specific Yield is calculated and displayed. On

any change in the above parameters, the Sy is recalculated and displayed. • Check <Crop Data for Computation>, If crop data is required to be used

for recharge computation. • Select Crop Type. The Return Flow Factor is displayed. • Enter Draft. Return Seepage is calculated and displayed. • Click <Next>. The crop and its data are saved. The Sy si recalculated and

displayed. • Click <OK>. The screen “Dry Season Groundwater Balancing Method

for Sy” closes. The estimated Specific Yield is displayed in the screen “Rainfall Recharge Data”.

• Click <Cancel>, if the user does not require to save the data and use the estimated Sy in rainfall recharge calculations.

10.4.2.3. Rainfall and Depth to Water Level

Click <Add Rainfall and Depth to Water Level> from the Screen “Rainfall Recharge Data”. Following screen “Rainfall and Water Level Data” appears which allows Add/Modify/Delete Rainfall and Water level for the selected Assessment Sub-Unit.

GEMS User Manual

292

Screen 9.14

10.4.2.3.1. Add Rainfall and Water level data

• Select a Hydromet or Rain-Gauge Station. Monsoon, Non-Monsoon,

Annual Rainfall of the Assessment Year and Normalized data are displayed. It further displays the data availability of the previous years of the selected Hydromet/ Rain-Gauge Station.

• Click <Save>. Data of the selected Hydromet/ Rain-Gauge Station is saved.

• Select a Well. The Pre-Monsoon, Post-Monsoon water levels and the Fluctuation of water level are displayed.

• Click <Save>. Data of the selected well is saved. • Click <OK>. The user returns to the screen “Rainfall Recharge data”.

10.4.2.3.2. Modify Rainfall and Water level data

• Select Assessment Sub-Unit. Rainfall Station/Observation Wells and their data are displayed in a list.

• Double click a row (either/both Rainfall station or Observation well) for modification. The values are recalculated and displayed.

• Click <Save>. Data of the selected rainfall station or observation well is modified.

GEMS User Manual

293

10.4.2.3.3. Delete Rainfall and Water level data

• Select Assessment Sub-Unit. Rainfall station or observation wells and their data are displayed in a list.

• Double click the row (rainfall station or observation well). • Check <Delete> and click <Save>. The data is deleted and it is reflected

in the list.

10.5. Canal-Reach 10.5.1. Description

Computation of recharge from canal-reaches uses canal wetted parameters, canal running days and Seepage Factor. The screen allows Add/Modify/Delete canal-reaches and their wetted parameters. Following recommendations of the GEC is adopted for computations of recharge from canal-reaches.

• Canal Seepage Factor depends on the canal-reach type, lithology and soil

type, as per the GEC Norms. • Wetted area is calculated as

Wetted area = {((2 * Average Depth of flow) / Sin (Side Slope)) + Base Width} * Length of canal segment

• It is assumed that each canal segment in its entire stretch is such that It is either lined/unlined Traverses the same soil/rock type Has same values of design depth of flow, base width and

side slope Is in operation for the same no of days in a given season.


• Select an Assessment Unit and click <Canal Reach> from Screen “Assessment Unit”.

The following screen “Canal Reach” appears.

GEMS User Manual

294

Screen 9.15

10.5.2.1. Add Canal-Reach

Add Canal-Reach from Map • Select Assessment Sub-Unit, Canal Name. Canal-Reaches extracted from

GIS based analysis are displayed. • Select a Reach Name. The Canal-Reach Length is displayed. • Select Reach Type, Lithology, Soil Type. • Enter Full Supply Depth, Bed Width, Side Slope, • Check <Wetted Area and Perimeter Data available> to enter Wetted

area and Wetted Perimeter. • Enter Full Supply Depth, Bed Width, Length and Slide Slope (ratio),

Monsoon Running and Non-Monsoon Running Days. The Wetted Area and Perimeter are calculated and displayed.

• Check <Slide Slope as Angle> if the side slope is available in degrees. • Enter Slide Slope (degrees). Wetted perimeter (m) and wetted Area

(million sq m) are calculated and displayed. • Check <Wetted Area and Perimeter Data available> If these values are

available. • Enter Wetted Area and Perimeter. • Check <Field Canal Seepage Factor available> to enter Canal Seepage

Factor from field studies or select it from neighbouring Assessment Units.

GEMS User Manual

295

Following screen “Documented Field Values” appears. The Screen displays Available Field Seepage Factors for different soil type, lithology and reach type of different canal-reaches belonging to the neighbouring Assessment Units.

Screen 9.16

• Double click a row and click <OK>. The screen “Documented Field Values” closes. The Seepage Factors of the selected row is displayed in the Screen “Canal-Reach”. The Seepage Factors can be modified with the field value.

• Click <Save> and <Exit>. The screen “Canal-Reach” closes and Screen “Assessment Unit” appears.

Add Canal-Reach (Non-GIS based) • Select Assessment Sub-Unit, Canal Name. Available canal-reaches are

displayed. • Click <Add> • Enter a Canal-Reach Name • Select Reach Type, Lithology, Soil Type. • Check <Wetted Area and Perimeter Data available> to enter Wetted

area and Wetted Perimeter. • Enter Full Supply Depth, Bed Width, Length and Slide Slope (ratio),

Monsoon Running and Non-Monsoon Running Days. The Wetted Area and Perimeter are calculated and displayed.

• Check <Slide Slope as Angle> if the side slope is available in degrees. • Enter Slide Slope (degrees). Wetted perimeter (m) and wetted Area

(million sq m) are calculated and displayed. • Check <Wetted Area and Perimeter Data available> If these values are

available.

GEMS User Manual

296

• Enter Wetted Area and Perimeter. • Check <Field Canal Seepage Factor available> to enter Canal Seepage

Factor from field studies or select it from neighbouring Assessment Units. Following screen “Documented Field Values” appears. The Screen displays Available Field Seepage Factors for different soil type, lithology and reach type of different canal-reaches belonging to the neighbouring Assessment Units.

• Double click a row and click <OK>. The screen “Documented Field Values” closes. The Seepage Factors of the selected row is displayed in the Screen “Canal-Reach”. The Seepage Factors can be modified with the field value.

• Click <Save> and <Exit>. The screen “Canal-Reach” closes and Screen “Assessment Unit” appears.

10.5.2.2. Modify Canal-Reach

• Select Assessment Sub-Unit, Canal Name, Reach Name. Details of the selected Reach Name are displayed.

• Modify parameter as required. • Click <Save> and <Exit>

10.5.2.3. Delete Canal-Reach

• Select Assessment Sub-Unit , Canal Name, Reach Name • Click <Delete>. A confirmation message is displayed. • Click <OK>. The Canal-Reach is deleted.

10.6. Canal-Reach-Outlet 10.6.1. Description

The option facilitates entry of specific outlet information pertaining to the gross discharge of surface water for Irrigation. Incase, the Average Discharge is unknown, GEC recommends the Average Discharge as 60% of the Design Discharge of an Outlet.


• Select an Assessment Unit and click <Outlet> from the screen

“Assessment Unit”. Following screen “Outlet” appears.

GEMS User Manual

297

Screen 9.17

10.6.2.1. Add Outlet

• Click <Add> • Enter an Outlet Name. • Select a Reach Name. • Enter Latitude, Longitude, Design Discharge, Running Days of Monsoon

and Non-Monsoon periods. Average Discharge is calculated and displayed.

• Check <Actual Average Discharge Known>, if Average Discharge is available.

• Enter the Actual Average Discharge. • Click <Save>

10.6.2.2. Modify Outlet

• Select the Outlet Name. All the corresponding entries of the selected outlet is displayed.

• Make appropriate modifications • Click <Save>. The outlet data is modified.

10.6.2.3. Delete Outlet

• Select Outlet • Click <Delete>. A confirmation message is displayed. • Click <OK>. The outlet is deleted.

GEMS User Manual

298

10.7. Cropping Pattern 10.7.1. Description

The option facilitates Add/Modify/Delete crop and their specific details on groundwater recharge from applied irrigation water (surface water and groundwater) Following Recommendations of the GEC is adopted

• The average water level of the monsoon period for an Assessment Sub-Unit is computed as the average of the water level pre-monsoon and post-monsoon intervals, whereas that for the non-monsoon is calculated from post-monsoon interval of the current groundwater assessment year and the pre-monsoon interval of the next immediate groundwater year. As the observation wells are generally absent in a Poor Groundwater Quality area, or wherever the water level data is missing / unavailable, the range of water level for both the periods is assumed to be less than 10 m.

• The selected Crop and water level decides the Return Flow Factor as per GEC.

• The Return Flow Factor (RFF) recommended as per GEC is applicable for rotational supply of irrigation water. It increases by 0.05 if the supply of irrigation water from the outlet is continuous.


• Select an Assessment Unit and click <Cropping Pattern> from the screen “Assessment Unit”. Following screen “Cropping Pattern” appears.

Screen 9.18

GEMS User Manual

299

10.7.2.1. Add Crop

Add Crop from maps

• Select Assessment Sub-Unit, Water Source, Crop Type. All available Crop Names, extracted from GIS based analysis are displayed.

• Select Crop Name. Crop-Water Requirement, Irrigated Areas of Monsoon and Non-Monsoon periods and Return Flow Factors are displayed.

• Check <Field Return Flow Factors available> to enter Return Flow Factors from field studies or select it from neighbouring Assessment Units. Screen “Documented Field Values” appears. The screen shows Available Field Return Flow Factors belonging to neighbouring Assessment Units.

• Double click a row and click <OK>. The Screen “Documented Field Values” closes and the screen “Cropping Pattern” displays the selected Return Flow Factors. It allows modification of the displayed Return Flow Factor with a field value.

• Click <Save>. The Selected Crop is added to the Existing Crops list. Add Crop (Non-GIS based)

• Select the Assessment Sub-Unit, Water Source, Crop Type, Crop Name. Crop-Water Requirement and Return Flow Factors are displayed.

• Enter Irrigated Areas of the Monsoon and Non-monsoon periods. • Check <Field Return Flow Factors available> to enter Return Flow

Factors from field studies or select from neighbouring Assessment Units. Screen “Documented Field Values” appears. The screen shows Available Field Return Flow Factors belonging to the neighbouring Assessment Units.

GEMS User Manual

300

Screen 9.19

• Double click a row and click <OK>. The Screen “Documented Field Values” closes and the Screen “Cropping Pattern” displays the selected Return Flow Factors. It allows modification of the displayed Return Flow Factor with a field value.

• Click <Save>. The Selected Crop is added to the Existing Crops list.

10.7.2.2. Modify Crop

• Select the Assessment Sub-Unit, Water Source, Crop Type , Crop Name. • The fields Crop-Water Requirement, Return Flow Factors, Irrigated Areas

of the Monsoon and Non-Monsoon periods are displayed. • Modify data as required. • Click <Save> to save the modifications..

10.7.2.3. Delete Crop

• Select Assessment Sub-Unit, Water Source, Crop Type, Crop Name. • Click <Delete>. A confirmation message is displayed. • Click <OK>. The selected Crop Name is deleted.

10.8. Tanks and Ponds 10.8.1. Description

The option facilitates Add/Modify/Delete tanks and ponds and their associated data, pertaining to groundwater recharge.

GEMS User Manual

301

As per the GEC,97 recommendations, if Average Water-spread Area is unknown, it for Monsoon and Non-Monsoon periods is taken as 60% of Design Water Spread Area.


Select Assessment Unit and click <Tanks and Ponds> from the screen “Asessment Unit Details”. The following Screen “Tanks and Ponds” appears.

Screen 9.20

10.8.2.1. Add tank and pond

Add tank/ pond from maps • Select the Assessment Sub-Unit. The available tanks and ponds extracted from

GIS based analysis are displayed. • Select a Tank or Pond. Latitude, Longitude and non-spatial attributes viz. Year of

Construction, Design Water Spread Area (if available in the map) and Recharge Factor are displayed.

• Enter those non-spatial attributes not available in maps. The Average Discharge is calculated and displayed.

• Check <Average Waterspread Area available> and enter Average Waterspread Area of the monsoon and non-monsoon periods, if the field study is done.

• Check <Field Recharge Factor Available> to enter Recharge Factor from field studies or to select it from neighbouring Assessment Units. The screen

GEMS User Manual

302

“Documented Field Values” appears showing the available Field Return Flow Factors belonging to the neighbouring Assessment Units.

• Double click a row and click <OK>. The screen “Documented Field Values” closes. The screen “Tank and Pond” displays the selected Recharge Factor. It further allows modification of the Recharge Factor with the available field value.

Screen 9.21

• Click <Save>. The tank or pond is saved.

Add tank/ pond (Non-GIS based) • Select Assessment Sub-Unit. • Enter a Tank or Pond. The Recharge Factor as per the GEC Norms is displayed. • Enter Year of Construction, Design Water Spread Area, Days Water Available

for Monsoon and Non-Monsoon season. The Average Discharge for the monsoon and non-monsoon periods is displayed.

• Check <Average Waterspread Area available> and enter Average Waterspread Area of the Monsoon and Non-Monsoon periods, if the field study is done.

• Check <Field Recharge Factor Available> to enter Recharge Factor from field studies or to select it from neighbouring Assessment Units. The screen “Documented Field Values” appears showing available Field Return Flow Factors belonging to the neighbouring Assessment Units.

• Double click a row and click <OK>. The screen “Documented Field Values” closes. The screen “Tank and Pond” shows the selected Recharge Factor. It further allows the modification of Recharge Factor with the available field value.

• Click <Save>. The tank or pond and its data is saved. 10.8.2.2. Modify tank/ pond

• Select the Assessment Sub-Unit, Tank or Pond. Details of the tank or pond are displayed.

GEMS User Manual

303

• Modify required parameters. • Click <Save>. The data of the selected tank or pond is saved.

10.8.2.3. Deletion of tank/ pond

• Select the Assessment Sub-Unit, Tank or Pond. • Click <Delete>. A confirmation message is displayed. • Click <OK>. The tank or pond and its data is deleted.

10.9. Water Conservation Structures Data 10.9.1. Description

The option facilitates Add/Modify/Delete Water Conservation structures, their associated attributes of use for groundwater recharge contribution.


Select Assessment Unit and click <Water Conservation Structures> from the screen “Assessment Unit Details”. The following Screen “Water Conservation Structures” appears.

Screen 9.22

10.9.2.1. Add Water Conservation Structure

Add Water Conservation Structure from Map

GEMS User Manual

304

• Select the Assessment Sub-Unit. Water Conservation Structures extracted from GIS based analysis, are displayed.

• Select a Structure. Latitude, Longitude, Structure Type, Year of Construction, Storage Capacity (ham), and No. of Fillings stored in the map of the selected structure are extracted and displayed. The Recharge Factor is displayed.

• Check <Field Recharge Factor Available> to enter Recharge Factor from field studies or to select it from neighbouring Assessment Units. Screen “Documented Field Values” appears. The screen shows Available Field Recharge Factor belonging to the neighbouring Assessment Units.

• Double click a row and click <OK>. The screen “Documented Field Values” closes. The screen “Water Conservation Structure” displays the selected Recharge Factor. It further allows modification of the Recharge Factor with the available field value.

Screen 9.23

• Click <Save>. The Water Conservation Structure is saved. Add Water Conservation Structure (Non-GIS based, from SITE mdoule) • Select Assessment Sub-Unit. • Water Conservation Structures stored from the SITE module will be displayed. • Select a Structure Name. Type, Latitude, Longitude, Year of Construction,

Storage Capacity and Recharge Factors are displayed. • Enter Year Of Construction, Storage Capacity, and select Structure Type, if they

are not displayed on the screen. • Enter No of Fillings. • Check <Field Recharge Factor Available> to enter Recharge Factor from field

studies or to select it from neighbouring Assessment Units. Screen “Documented Field Values” appears. The screen shows Available Field Recharge Factor belonging to the neighbouring Assessment Units.

GEMS User Manual

305


• Click <Save>. The Water Conservation Structure is saved. Water Conservation Structure (Non-GIS based) • Select Assessment Sub-Unit. • Click <Add Local Structure>. • Enter a Structure Name. Recharge Factors are displayed. • Select Type and enter Latitude, Longitude, Year of Construction, Storage

Capacity, and No. Of Fillings. • Check <Field Recharge Factor Available> to enter Recharge Factor from field

studies or to select it from neighbouring Assessment Units. Screen “Documented Field Values” appears. The screen shows Available Field Recharge Factor belonging to the neighbouring Assessment Units.


• Click <Save>. The Water Conservation Structure is saved.

10.9.2.2. Modify Water Conservation Structure

• Select Assessment Sub-Unit, Structure Name. Details of the Structure viz.

Structure Type, Year of Construction, Storage Capacity and No. of fillings are displayed.

• Modify required attribute information. • Click <Save>. Data of the selected Structure Name is modified.

10.9.2.3. Delete Water Conservation Structure

• Select the Assessment Sub-Unit, Structure Name • Click <Delete>. A confirmation message is Displayed. • Click <OK>. The structure is deleted.

GEMS User Manual

306

10.10. Additional Potential Structures and Static Resources 10.10.1. Description

The option facilitates Adding/Modifying the waterlogged, shallow watertable, flood-prone areas and static resources. If maps are available, GIS based analysis is used to calculate the waterlogged areas, average water level, pre-monsoon water level and lithology.


• Select Assessment Unit and click <Additional Potential Resources and Static Resources> from the Screen “Assessment Unit”.

The following Screen “Additional Potential Resources and Static Resources” appears.

Screen 9.24

10.10.2.1.1. Water Logged and Shallow Water Table Area - Add From Maps

• Area under Water Logged and Shallow Water Table regions, Average Specific Yield and Depth to Water Level are extracted from GIS based analysis and displayed.

• Click <Save>.

GEMS User Manual

307

10.10.2.1.2. Static Resources - Add From Maps

• Area of Static resources and Pre-monsoon Water level is extracted from maps and displayed.

• Enter Vertical Extension of Aquifer and Effective Depth of Estimation.

• Click <Save>. • Aquifer Geology extracted from maps is displayed. • Select Aquifer Geology. Stratigraphy and Lithology are displayed • Select Lithology. Area and Specific Yield are displayed • Click <Save>. Entered data is saved. Similarly, multiple slices for the

one or more aquifier(s) can be stored.

Update data from Maps

10.10.2.1.3. Water Logged and Shallow Water Table Area - Update From Maps

• Updated Area under Water Logged and Shallow Water Table regions, Average Specific Yield and Depth to Water Level are extracted from GIS based analysis and displayed.

• Click <Save>.

10.10.2.1.4. Static Resources - Update From Maps

• Updated Area of Static resources and Pre-monsoon Water level is extracted from maps and displayed.


• Click <Save>. • Available updated Aquifer Geology extracted from maps are

displayed. • Select Aquifer Geology. Updated Stratigraphy and available

Lithology are displayed. • Select Lithology. Area and Specific Yield are displayed. • Click <Save>. Entered and other displayed data is saved.

10.10.2.1.5. Water Logged and Shallow Water Table Area - Add Data (Non-GIS based)

• Enter Area under Water Logged and Shallow Water Table, Average Specific Yield and Depth to Water Level.

• Click <Save>

GEMS User Manual

308

10.10.2.1.6. Static Resources - Add Data (Non-GIS based)

• Area of Static resources (Command + Non-Command Area) is displayed and it allows modification. The Pre-monsoon Water level is calculated and displayed.


• Click <Save>. • Select Aquifer Geology. Stratigraphy is displayed • Select Lithology. The Specific Yield is displayed. • Enter Area and Thickness. • Click <Save>

Modify data (Non-GIS based)

10.10.2.1.7. Water Logged and Shallow Water Table Area – Update Data (Non-GIS based)

• Enter/ Modify Area under Water Logged and Shallow Water Table, Average Specific Yield and Depth to water level.

10.10.2.1.8. Static Resources – Update Data (Non-GIS based)

• Area of Static resources (Command + Non-Command Area) is displayed and allows modification.

• The Pre-monsoon Water level is calculated and displayed. • Enter Vertical Extension of Aquifer and Effective Depth of

Estimation. • Click <Save> • Select Aquifer Geology. Stratigraphy is displayed as per the selection

of the Lithology. • Select Lithology. The Specific Yield is displayed. • Enter Area and thickness. • Click <Save>

10.10.2.1.9. Flood Prone Areas - Update Data (Non-GIS based)

• The Recharge Factor is displayed. • Enter the Flood-Prone Area, Number of Days. • Check <Field Recharge Factor Available> to enter Recharge Factor

from field studies or to select it from neighbouring Assessment Units. Screen “Documented Field Values” appears. The screen shows Available Field Recharge Factor belonging to the neighbouring Assessment Units.

GEMS User Manual

309

• Double click a row and click <OK>. The screen “Documented Field Values” closes. The screen “Additional Potential Resources and Static Resources” displays the selected Recharge Factor. It further allows modification of the Recharge Factor with the available field value.

• Click <Save>

Screen 9.25

10.11. Allocation for Future Domestic And Industrial Uses 10.11.1. Description

This option allows Add/ Modify data for calculating the requirement of groundwater for domestic and industrial allocations.


Select Assessment Unit and click <Allocation for Future Domestic And Industrial Uses>. Following screen “Allocation for Future Domestic And Industrial Uses” appears.

GEMS User Manual

310

Screen 9.26

10.11.2.1. Add Data

• Select Assessment Sub-Unit. • Select Computation Method. • Enter Population Density, “As On Year” , Population Growth Rate. The

Population Density At The End Of 25 Years is calculated and displayed. • Enter Per Capita Requirements and Dependence Of Groundwater for

Domestic and/or Industrial Uses (depending upon the computation method).

• Click <Save>.

10.11.2.2. Modify Data

• Select Assessment Sub-Unit. • Modify required parameters. • Click <Save>.

10.12. Apportioning 10.12.1. Description

If a Watershed is adopted as the Assessment Unit, it requires to present the results of the Assessment Unit in terms of an appropriate Administrative Development Unit (Block/Mandal or Taluka/Tahsil/). The estimated components are area-apportioned for the Administrative Development Unit. The estimated components are presented at Assessment Sub-Unit level. The Assessment is based on the groundwater Assessment results obtained for those Watersheds which are partly or wholly contained within the Administrative Development Unit under consideration.

GEMS User Manual

311


• Select an Assessment Unit and click <Apportioning data> from the Screen “Assessment Unit”. Following screen “Apportioning data” appears.

10.12.2.1. Add Presentation sub-units from map

Screen 9.27

• Select Assessment Sub-Unit. Tahsils/Blocks (Administrative Sub-Units)

containing partly or wholly the Watershed are extracted form GIS based analysis and are displayed.

• Select a Presentation Sub-Unit. Area is extracted from maps and displayed. • Click <Save>.

10.12.2.2. Add Presentation sub-units (Non-GIS based)

• Select the Assessment Sub-Unit. Presentation Sub-Units are displayed. • Select Presentation Sub-Unit. • Enter Area. • Click <Save>.

10.12.2.3. Delete Presentation Sub-Units

• Select Assessment Sub-Unit, Presentation Sub-Unit.

GEMS User Manual

312

• Check <Delete> and click <Save>. A confirmation message is displayed. • Click <OK>. The Presentation Sub-Unit is deleted.

10.13. Ancillary Groundwater Balancing Components

The Ancillary Groundwater Balancing Components includes the losses from evaporation and evapotranspiration, inter-aquifer flow, lateral flow across boundary and vertical inter-aquifer flow. As these components are ignored in GEC,97 Methodology of Groundwater Resources Estimation, these have been grouped together as Ancillary Groundwater Balancing Components. The application provides two discrete time intervals (monsoon and non-monsoon periods only) for the estimation of these components.

• Select an Assessment Unit and click <Ancillary Groundwater Balancing Components> from the Screen “Assessment Unit”. Following screen “Ancillary Gw Balancing Components” appears.

• Select Assessment Sub-Unit. • Click <Proceed>. A screen carrying all the above four components

appears. • Click <Exit> to exit from the screen.

Screen 9.28

10.13.1. Lateral Flow Across Boundary


The flow of groundwater among interconnected watersheds follows the Darcy’s law in some form. The boundary of two interconnected watersheds is classified into few segments of same/similar transmissivity. For each segment, the hydraulic conductivity is calculated for each discrete time intervals (Monsoon and Non-Monsoon) by selecting few representative observation wells.

GEMS User Manual

313

Screen 9.29


10.13.1.2.1. Add Data

• Select Neighbouring Assessment Unit • Enter Transmissivity and Length for each segment. • Double click Observation Wells from both the Neighbouring and selected

Watersheds for each segment. It is recommended to select wells close to the boundary of the Watersheds.

• Click <Compute>, The Hydraulic conductivity is calculated from the water level of the selected wells at each discrete time and data of the segment are stored.

• Click <Save>. The Lateral Flow is computed and they are stored. More segments are added similarly.

• Click <Cancel> to exit from the screen.


• Double click a row from the list. Selected data is displayed in the respective fields.

• Modify the selected of Observation well. Hydraulic Conductivity. Modify Segment Length and Transmissivity.

• Click <Compute>, The Hydraulic conductivity is recalculated from the water level of the selected wells at each discrete time and the data for the segment are stored.

• Click <Save>. The data entered and the wells taken for computation are stored. More segments are added similarly.

GEMS User Manual

314

10.13.1.2.3. Delete data

• Double click a Row from the list. The data of the same row is selected and displayed in the respective fields.

• Check <Delete> and click <Save>. Data gets deleted and it is reflected in the list.

10.13.2. Vertical Inter-aquifer Flow


The boundary of interconnected watersheds are classified into few segments of same/similar hydraulic resistance.


Screen 9.30

10.13.2.2.1. Add Data

• Enter Area, Piezometric Elevation and Hydraulic Resistance for each segment zone.

• Select Observation Wells for calculation of the water table elevation. • Click <Compute>. The water table elevation is calculated for both the

seasons. • Click <Save>. The volume of flow is calculated and displayed on the list. • Click <Cancel> to exit from the screen.

GEMS User Manual

315


• Double click a row for modification. The Wells and other data corresponding to the selected segment are displayed in the respective fields.

• Modify required fields. • Click <Compute>. The water table elevation is recalculated for both the

seasons. • Click <Save>. The volume of flow is calculated and displayed on the list.


• Double click a Row from the list. The data of the same row is selected and displayed in the respective fields.


10.13.3. Stream-Aquifer Inter-flow

10.13.3.1. Descriptions

Depending on the head gradient between the stream and the aquifer (groundwater regime), the interflow of groundwater-surface water takes place. The situation where stream water is separated from the groundwater system by a layer of low permeability stream bed material is being considered here. The interflow between stream and aquifer for fully penetrating streams is calculated similarly as is done for the inter-Watershed Lateral flow. However for partially penetrating streams, one factor called attenuation factor is multiplied to the calculated flow volume.

GEMS User Manual

316


Screen 9.31

10.13.3.2.1. Add Data

• Assign Stream Length, Stream Width, Bed-Hydraulic Conductivity,

Saturated Thickness of Aquifer, Bed Conductance and Stream Water Level.

• Select wells from the available wells for estimation of average Well Water level.

• Click <Compute>. Average Water level is calculated and displayed. • The Attenuation Factor is calculated and displayed. • Click <Save>. The inter-flow volume is calculated for both monsoon and

non-monsoon seasons and are displayed on the list. • Click <Cancel> to exit from the screen.


• Double click a row from the list. Selected data is displayed in the

respective fields. • Click <Compute>. Average water level is recalculated and displayed. • The Attenuation Factor is recalculated and displayed. • Click <Save>. The inter-flow volume is recalculated for both monsoon

and non-monsoon seasons and are displayed on the list. • Click <Cancel> to exit from the screen.

GEMS User Manual

317


• Double click a Row from the list. Selected data is displayed in the respective fields.


10.13.4. Evaporation and Evapotranspiration loss

10.13.4.1. Descriptions

The region is classified into homogenous areas of same evaporation and evapo-transpiration rates. Data is also selected from maps, if maps are available. 10.13.4.2. Working Steps

Screen 9.32

10.13.4.2.1. Add data

• Select the Stress Period • Enter Capillary Height, Root Zone Depth, and Average Forest/Canopy

Fraction. • Check <Data from Maps>. If maps are available, the evaporating area,

evaporation rate, evapotranspirating area and evapotranspirating rate are selected and displayed. Else, Enters all these values.

GEMS User Manual

318

• Click <Save>, the losses due to evaporation and evapotranspiration are calculated and displayed on the list. Same procedure is followed for the Non-monsoon stress period.

• Click <Cancel> to exit from the screen.

10.13.4.2.2. Modify data


• Modify required fields. • Click <Save>. Losses due to Evaporation and Evapotranspiration are

calculated displayed on the list.




10.14. Estimation of Groundwater Balancing Components 10.14.1. Description

This option executes for the estimation of all the groundwater balancing components. Use of the ancillary components in groundwater balancing is optional for the user. Other analysis components include estimation of Watertable Trend (Pre-monsoon and post-monsoon), Stage of Groundwater Development and Categorization. The estimation of the Additional Potential Resources and Static Resources are made together and are kept separately from other components.


Click <Estimation of GW Balancing Components> from GW Assessment. The following screen “Estimation of Gw Balancing Components” appears.

GEMS User Manual

319

Screen 9.33

10.14.1.1.1. GW Balancing Components and Error Estimation

• Select or Enter the Assessment year, Assessment Unit Type. Existing

Assessment Units of the selected Assessment Unit type are displayed. • Selection of the State, District, Basin, Sub-Basin filters the Assessment

Units. • Select an Assessment Unit. • Click <Groundwater Balancing Components and Error Estimation>,

and <Cropping Data> or <Well Census Data> • Check <Evaporation>, <Evapotranspiration>, <Lateral Flow Across

Boundary>, <Stream-Aquifer Interflow> and <Vertical Inter-Aquifer Interflow>.

• The Average WT Fluctuation of the Assessment Unit is calculated and displayed.

• Enter the No. Of Previous Years • Check <Compute From Map data> and <Regression with a constant> • Select Assessment Sub-Unit and the interval. All the Assessment Years

for which data is available is displayed. It further displays the Available Assessment Years.

• Select Assessment Year. Rainfall is calculated and displayed. • Enter corresponding Recharge. • Click <Compute>. All the balancing components are estimated. The

results are shown in a report. • Click <Validation>. Regression analysis of recharge with rainfall of

previous years is made from SPSS window.

GEMS User Manual

320

10.14.1.1.2. Watertable Trend and Categorization

Screen 9.34

• Select or Enter Assessment Year, Assessment Unit Type. Existing

Assessment Units of the selected Assessment Unit type are displayed. • Selection of the State, District, Basin, Sub-Basin filters the Assessment

Unit. • Select an Assessment Unit and an Interval • Click <Watertable Trend And Categorization>. • Enter the No. Of Previous Years • Check <Compute From Map data>, if map data is used for computation. • Check <Regression With A Constant> if the user intends to do

Normalization of Recharge with Rainfall using the model y = mx + c. • Click <Compute>. A Report of the Calculations of Trend, Net Annual

Groudnwater Available, Stage of Groundwater Development and Category is created.

• Click <Hydrograph>. The screen “Hydrograph” appears showing Pre-Monsoon, Post-Monsoon Water levels and Trend.

• Click <Validation>. Regression analysis of Water Level with the year is made for the selected interval in the SPSS window.

10.14.1.1.3. Additional Potential Resources and Static Resources

GEMS User Manual

321

Screen 9.35

• Select or Enter Assessment year, Assessment Unit Type. Existing

Assessment Units of the selected Assessment Unit Type are displayed. • Selection of the State, District, Basin, Sub-Basin filters the Assessment

Unit. • Select An Assessment Unit. • Click <Additional Potential Resources and Static Resources>. • Click <Proceed>. A report of the Computed Additional Potential

Resources and Static Resources is made.

10.15. Extended Resources Assessment 10.15.1. Description

Extended Resources Estimation provides a discrete vector-GIS model of estimating Storage Change, Recharge from Rainfall, Evaporation and Evapotranspiration. It involves integration of maps: Watershed/Tahsil/Block as per the selection of the Assessment Unit Type, geology, point data on Evaporation, Evapotranspiration, Rainfall, Depth to Water level. The point data is interpolated, and classified into regions of user-defined intervals. As a Watershed/Basin/Sub-Basin maintains hydrologic boundary conditions, this approach of interpolation of data is restricted to Basin, Sub-Basin level, where Assessment Unit Type is a Watershed, whereas, its restricted to a State/District where the Assessment Unit Type is Tahsil or Block.


GEMS User Manual

322

Click <Extended Resources Assement> sub menu of GW Assessment. The following screen “Extended Resources Assement” appears.

Screen 9.36

• Select the Assessment Unit type, Assessment year. • Click <State>, <District>, <Basin>, <Sub-Basin>. If the Selected

Assessment Unit type is a watershed, <State>, <District> will be disabled, whereas <Basin>, <Sub-Basin> will be disabled for Tahsil or Block.

• Select Component, Stress Period. • Enter Average Capillary Height for calculating Evaporation loss or

Average Root Zone Depth for Evapotranspiration loss. • Click <Proceed>. Output map is created from the MapInfo window.

NOTE:

• If the component selected is “Rainfall Recharge”, all the Hydrometerologic/ Rain Gauge stations are displayed. A contour map of the rainfall of the selected Assessment Year is created from the point data of rainfall of the selected/ all stations. If no station is selected for its use in the estimation, it is assumed that all are considered for their use in interpolation and contouring.

• If the selected component is Storage Change, all the observation wells are displayed of the selected administrative / hydrologic boundary and are similarly used for contouring as described above.

• When the selected component is either Evaporation or Evapotranspiration, both the Hydrometeorologic Stations and Observation Wells are displayed. If none of the Hydrometeorologic Stations is selected, rainfall of all the stations are used for interpolation followed with classification.

GEMS User Manual

323

Otherwise, those selected stations are used for interpolation. The Observation wells are similarly treated where the depth to water level is used for interpolation followed with classification.

• Rainfall of the selected Stress Period and Assessment Year are interpolated and classified as per the user specified method and intervals. Similar procedure is adopted for the creation of the depth to water level map from the available data of the observation wells. These two maps along with the Tahsil/Block/ Watershed (as per the Assessment Unit Type adopted) and the Assessment Sub-Unit maps are put to overlay analysis. The entire process finally creates a map of Evaporation or Evapotranspiration loss, storage change or Rainfall recharge map.

10.16. Resources Development and Analysis

This option analyzes Prioritization of groundwater balancing components and creation of Groundwater Potential Map / Groundwater Pollution Vulnerability Map Prioritization of groundwater balancing components involves a multivariate regression analysis of groundwater balancing components of different Assessment Years and Assessment Units to assess the effective groundwater balancing components to storage change. The independent variables include components: groundwater draft and recharge components from rainfall, canal, water conservation structures, tank and pond, return seepage (from applied surface water irrigation water, applied groundwater irrigation water), inter-aquifer flow, evapotranspiration, evaporation, stream-aquifer interflow and inter-watershed flow. The fitted regression model is used to predict the storage change for a particular year. A predicted storage change map is generated using the fitted regression model. Sensitivity Analysis is treated similarly as that of Prioritization, except that the model fitting is done using step-wise multivariate regression analysis of groundwater balancing components.

Groundwater Potential Map / Groundwater Pollution Vulnerability Map provides a Vector-GIS based integration of the user specified maps and analysis for the creation of a groundwater potential / pollution vulnerability map. Each layer is assigned a relative weight, and the associated attributes with a rank. All the layers with its attributes with their weight and rank are put to overlay analysis. For

GEMS User Manual

324

pollution vulnerability analysis, a water quality parameter is added for its use overlay analysis.

All layers of point and line objects are pre-processed and converted into polygon layers. A buffer map of the user defined radius is made from Lineament map for a selected hydrologic/ administrative boundary. Similarly the slope, aspect and relief maps are also generated from the topographic contours of a selected hydrologic/administrative boundary. Topographic map is interpolated, a slope or aspect map is generated followed by a user specified classification. Similarly water level of a user defined month and year is interpolated and grouped into regions at user-defined method and number of classes. All these layers along with other polygon layers (ex. geomorphology, geology, soil etc) are put to overlay analysis to make a groundwater possibility map. 10.16.1. Working Steps

Click <Resources Development and Analysis> from GW Assessment. The screen “Resources Development and Analysis” appears.

Screen 9.37

10.16.1.1. Prioritization / Sensitivity Analysis

• Select the Assessment Unit Type • Click <State>, <District>, <Basin> or <Sub-Basin>

GEMS User Manual

325

• Click <Prioritization of Groundwater Balancing Components” or “Sensitivity Analysis”. All the available Assessment Years and the Assessment Units are displayed.

• Selection an Assessment Year. Available Assessment Units are displayed.

• Check atleast one item from the <Groundwater Balancing Components>

• Enter a p value (pin and pout) which is the Observed Significance Level, for a significant variable to be included in a model and for removal respectively.

• Click <Proceed>. Multiple regression analysis is made using the data of the selected Groundwater balancing components of the selected period and Assessment Year from the SPSS window. It follows with a MapInfo Window displaying the predicted map.

10.16.2. Groundwater Potential Map And Groundwater Vulnerability Map

• Select the Assessment Unit Type • Click <State>, <District>, <Basin> or <Sub-Basin> • Click <Groundwater Potential Map> or <Groundwater Pollution

Vulnerability Map> • Click <Proceed>. The screen “Risk Analysis” appears.

Screen 9.38

Screen 9.39

GEMS User Manual

326

Screen 9.40

• Select at least two Layer from Available layers . • Select a Month and Year if selected layer is water level. • Enter Buffer Width for lineaments if lineament is selected. If a selected

layer carries either point and line objects, procedures of pre-processing as discussed in Section 9.16.1 are done. (Water level, Rainfall and lineaments).

• Assign Weight for the selected Layer. As the sum of weights of all the specified layers is taken as 100, a warning message is displayed when the sum does not make 100.

• Click <Update Multiplier>. The screen “Rank” appears where the user assigns Rank for each attribute of each of the selected layer.

• Click <Proceed> the selected layers are put to overlay analysis and a Groundwater Potential Map or Groundwater Vulnerability Map is created in MapInfo Window.

GEMS User Manual

327

GEMS User Manual

328

11. Report and Query This module helps the user to generate various reports and queries like Predefined reports, Ground Water Assessment reports, GIS based reports, Map queries. The user has facility to enter adhoc queries on Maps, Reports on the data entered in the modules like Site, Water Quality, Geophysical Exploration, Ground Water Assessment. To generate a report, click Report and Query.

Screen Reports & Query

Screen 10.1

The options available under Reports and Query are as follows: • Reports • Groundwater Assessment Reports • GIS Reports • Adhoc Map Query • Adhoc Oracle Query • Adhoc Thematic Maps • Adhoc Reports • Adhoc Maps

GEMS User Manual

329

11.1. Reports

Click <Reports> in Report and Query, the following screen “Master Selection For Reports” appears.

Screen 10.2

The above screen is divided into three sections.

• Main Selection Criteria • Main Selection Area • Current Selection

Main Selection Criteria section In this section of the screen, the user checks the work area as <Administrative>, <Hydrological> or <Project> separately or in any combination of two or three checkbox’s. The checking of <Adminstrative> organizes the output reports on state/district/ tahsil/ block. By default, the <State> is selected, however, the user can select any one of <State> / <District> / <Tahsil> / <Block>.T The checking of <Hydrology> organizes the output reports on basin/sub-basin. Similarly, In this, by default, the <Basin> is selected, however, the user can select any one of <Basin> / <Sub-basin> / <Watershed>. Main Selection Area section

GEMS User Manual

330

This section consists of <Administrative>, <Hydrological> and <Project> and are enabled depending upon the selection in Main Selection Criteria section. It also has <Selectable Items> to display the list of items and <Selected Items> to display the list of selected items. The user has option to deselect the selected item in <selected item> by double click on the record. Similarly the user can return to previous selection by clicking . Current Selection section This section displays the Graphics of the selection of items from Main selection area in tree format. Working steps for main selection criteria Check <Administrative> and click any of <State> / <District> / <Tahsil> / <Block> as described below.

• State: Click <State> , <Administrative> in main selection area section gets selected and the states defined for the current user (in the user Workarea) appear in the <Selectable Items>

Screen 10.3

• District: if <District> is selected in main selection criteria, double click the state name in <Selectable Items>. Click in the Main Selection Area, names of all districts in the state gets displayed in <Selectable Items>. Double click the districts for selection. The current selection is displayed in the Current Selection area.

GEMS User Manual

331

• Similar steps are applicable for Tahsil and Block Level.

Note: Only those states and districts, which lie in the user Workarea, are displayed for selection.

Screen 10.4

Check <Hydrology> and click any of <Basin> / <Sub Basin> / <Watershed> as described below.

• Basin: Click <Basin>, <Hydrology> in main selection area section gets selected and the states defined for the current user (in the user Workarea) appear in the <Selectable Items>

• Sub Basin: if <Sub Basin> is selected in main selection criteria, double

click the basin names in <Selectable Items>. Click in the Main Selection Area, names of all sub basins in the basin gets displayed in <Selectable Items>. Double click the sub basins for selection. The current selection is displayed in the Current Selection area.

• Similar steps are applicable for Watershed.

Note: Only those basins and sub basins, which lie in the user Workarea, are displayed for selection.

GEMS User Manual

332

Screen 10.5

• Check <Project> to view all the available projects in selectable items and

select any number of projects as required. • Double click in selectable items to select any project. The current

selection is displayed in the Current Selection area.

Screen 10.6

Click <Next> and the following screen “Report Selection” appears.

GEMS User Manual

333

Screen 10.6

The screen has five sections

• Report Selection • Single Selection • Site Selection • Report Header • Office Name

Report Selection Report Selection area provide the user a facility of selecting the different categories of report.

GEMS User Manual

334

Screen 10.7

Working steps for report selection:

Select any category of report; a list of all types of reports gets populated. Each category of Report consists of following types:

• Reports • Contours • Maps • Plots

The selection of any category of report displays all the reports as shown in the following screen “Report Selection”.

GEMS User Manual

335

Screen 10.8

These listed reports can be filtered depending upon types <Reports> / <Contours> / <Maps> / <Plots> enabled. If any category of reports consists reports and plots only, then <Reports> / <Plots> are enabled. The user can further filter the list by selecting either <Reports> or <Plots>. In the Screen 10.8, if the user clicks <Contours> then the reports listed are only contours. The screen then looks as shown below

GEMS User Manual

336

Screen 10.9

The user has facility to select single/multiple sites, if available, from Site Selection section.

Single Selection In this section, the user has the option of selecting further a single Administrative / Hydrology / Project boundary provided the user has selected multiple Administrative / Hydrology / Project. This option is particularly used when the user wants to generate any map.

Screen 10.10

Report Header

GEMS User Manual

337

Screen 10.11

In this section, the name of the selected report from the listed reports is visible. If the user requires any other report header (which is displayed at top of the report) in the actual report, then it can be changed in this section.

Office Name

Screen 10.12

This section contains the name of the office and by default the office name shown in this section reflects from the <Machine Parameter Setting> of Administration.

• Click <Back> returns to previous screen. • Click <Cancel> cancels the current selection and returns to main menu . • <Report> changes according to the type of report selected.

Based upon the type of report, the Report caption becomes <Next> and the following screen “Custom Selection criteria” appears. Otherwise the caption is <Map> / <Report> / <Plot> / <Contour>.

GEMS User Manual

338

Screen 10.13

In the above screen, the user selects the required inputs for the given report. For example if the user has selected <Report> from Event Report, then From and To dates in Date Selection section is mandatory.

If the user selects Frequency Distribution table from Water Quality Reports, then fields ‘From’ and ‘To’ Years from Year Selection section, parameter and range are mandatory. Report Sample

GEMS User Manual

339

11.1.1. Artificial recharge report

11.1.1.1. Reports

The available reports are listed below:

11.1.1.1.1. Basic Information for Recharge Structures

This shows the details about type, location and construction. Selection criteria is site/sites.

11.1.1.1.2. Daily Data for Artificial Recharge Structure

This shows the dynamic data for the different parameters for different artificial recharge structure types. Selection criteria is site/sites.

11.1.2. Bore Hole data Report

11.1.2.1. Maps

11.1.2.1.1. Site Plan

This map shows the location, nearest village location, approaching road and rail of the selected site / sites.

11.1.2.2. Reports

Under this type of report, the user has a number of reports, which are listed below.

11.1.2.2.1. Drill Time Log Table

This shows the drilling details like the start and finish dates, drilling methods. It also displays detailed information about how the drilling has taken place.

11.1.2.2.2. Grain Size Table

This shows the details of Grain Size Analysis. Selection criteria is site/sites.

11.1.2.2.3. Results of Geophysical Interpretation

This shows Depth-wise formation of water quality as interpreted by a geophysicist comparing litholog data with geophysical logging data. Also static information of sites is shown. (cf. Logging recommendation data entry screen). Selection criteria is site/sites.

GEMS User Manual

340

11.1.2.2.4. Calibrated Litholog - Compromised Log

This shows the depth-wise details of the interpreted Lithology . It is based upon the actual Lithology and the one found at the time of geophysical logs. Selection criteria is site/sites.

11.1.2.2.5. Well assembly Table

This shows the well design details. The Selection criteria is site/sites.

11.1.2.2.6. Gravel Packing Details/Grouting

This shows the grouting details of the selected site / sites namely, what type of material has been used for gravel and grouting. Selection criteria is site/sites.

11.1.2.2.7. Development details

This shows the depth-wise details report about which method has been used in the development of the site. Selection criteria is site/sites.

11.1.2.2.8. Hydrological test APT

This shows the details for the Aquifer Performance Test conducted at the site. Selection criteria is site/sites.

11.1.2.2.9. Hydrological test SDT

This shows the details for the Step Drawdown Test conducted at the site. Selection criteria are site/sites.

11.1.2.2.10. Hydrological test Zone test

This shows the discharge in different zones. Selection criteria are site/sites.

11.1.2.2.11. Hydrological test PYT test

This shows the details of the Preliminary Yield Test. Selection criteria are site/sites.

11.1.2.2.12. Final Result Table of APT

This shows the result of the analysis done on APT. Selection criteria are site/sites.

11.1.2.2.13. Final Result Table of SDT

This shows the result of the analysis done on SDT. Selection criteria are site/sites.

GEMS User Manual

341

11.1.2.2.14. HP of the prime mover

This shows the required HP of the pump to be used for pumping. Selection criteria are site/sites.

11.1.2.2.15. Miscellaneous information report

This shows the status of handing over or the transfer details of the site showing what is the cost recovered, total cost etc. Selection criteria are site/sites.

11.1.2.2.16. Basic details

This shows the details namely, location details, additional details and Geomorphologic details etc. Selection criteria are site/sites.

11.1.2.2.17. Lithological Table

This shows the depth-wise lithology of a particular site. Selection criteria are site/sites.

11.1.2.2.18. List of Sites with DWLR

This shows the details of the all the sites where DWLR is installed. There is no selection criteria.

11.1.2.3. Plots

The available plots are listed below:

11.1.2.3.1. APT Plot

This shows the graphical representation of Aquifer Performance Test

11.1.2.3.2. SDT Plot

This shows the graphical representation of Step Drawdown Test 11.1.3. Brochure

11.1.3.1. Maps:

The available maps are listed below:

11.1.3.1.1. Geological Map

This shows the area of individual geology in a block for a district/state

GEMS User Manual

342

11.1.3.1.2. Administrative Map

This shows the rail, road, village locations, different tahsils inside a district and different districts inside a state.

11.1.3.1.3. Geomorphological Map

This shows the area of individual geomorphology in a block for a district/state. 11.1.3.2. Reports:

The available reports are listed below: 11.1.3.2.1. Geomorphological Table

This shows the area of individual geomorphology in a block for a district map and in a district for a state map.

11.1.3.2.2. Geological Table

This shows the area of individual geology in a block for a district map and in a district for the State map.

11.1.4. Event report

11.1.4.1. Contours:

The available contours are listed below:

11.1.4.1.1. Depth To Water Level Map [Drought Event] (Pre-Event)

This shows the contour of Depth to Water Level for Drought-Pre Event. Selection criteria are From and To date.

11.1.4.1.2. Depth To Water Level Map [Drought Event] (Post-Event)

This shows the contour of Depth to Water Level for Drought-Post Event. Selection criteria are From and To date.

11.1.4.1.3. Depth To Water Level Fluctuation Map [Drought Event]

This shows the contour of Depth to Water Level for Drought Event. Selection criteria are From and To dates.

11.1.4.1.4. Depth To Water Level Map [Earthquake Event] (Pre-Event)

This shows the contour of Depth to Water Level for Earthquake-Pre Event. Selection criteria are From and To dates.

GEMS User Manual

343

11.1.4.1.5. Depth To Water Level Map [Flood Event] (Pre-Event)

This shows the contour of Depth to Water Level for Flood-Pre Event. Selection criteria are From and To dates.

11.1.4.1.6. Depth To Water Level Map [Flood Event] (Post-Event

This shows the contour of Depth to Water Level for Flood-Post Event. Selection criteria are From and To dates.

11.1.4.1.7. Depth To Water Level Map [Earthquake Event] (Post-Event)

This shows the contour of Depth to Water Level for Earthquake-Post Event. Selection criteria are From and To dates.

11.1.4.1.8. Depth To Water Level Fluctuation Map [Earthquake Event]

This shows the contour of Depth to Water Level for Earthquake Event. Selection criteria are From and To dates.

11.1.4.1.9. Depth To Water Level Fluctuation Map [Flood Event]

This shows the contour of Depth to Water Level for Flood Event. Selection criteria are From and To dates.

11.1.4.2. Reports


11.1.4.2.1. Drought

This shows the pre and post water levels and their fluctuation during drought. Selection criteria are From and To dates.

11.1.4.2.2. Earthquake

This shows the pre and post water levels and there fluctuation during drought. Selection criteria are From and To dates.

11.1.4.2.3. Flood

This shows the pre and post water levels and there fluctuation during drought. Selection criteria are From and To dates.

11.1.5. Forecasting report

11.1.5.1. Contours


GEMS User Manual

344

11.1.5.1.1. Water Logged Area Map

This shows the contour of waterlogged area. 11.1.5.2. Reports:


11.1.5.2.1. Long term trends on selectable period

This shows the site-wise Rise, Fall, Intercept for specified years and for Premonsoon / Postmonsoon / Annually.

11.1.6. Geophysical report

11.1.6.1. Reports


11.1.6.1.1. Well Logging

This shows the basic details of the site, method-wise depth logged and Up/Down log and borehole diameters and its depth from and depth to. Selection criteria are site/sites.

11.1.6.1.2. Recommendation of well construction table (compromised log info)

This shows Depth-wise formation of water quality as interpreted by a geophysicist comparing litholog data with geophysical logging data. Also Static Information of sites is shown. (cf. logging recommendation data entry screen). Selection criteria are site/sites.

11.1.7. Ground Water year book

11.1.7.1. Contours


11.1.7.1.1. Depth To Water Level Trend Map

This shows the trend of Depth to Water Level for Pre/Post/Annual within the specified year range.

11.1.7.2. Reports


11.1.7.2.1. Distribution of Hydrograph stations in major river basins

This shows the River-wise area and number of hydrograph stations.

GEMS User Manual

345

11.1.7.2.2. Distribution of Hydrograph stations in major canal command

This shows the Major canal-wise number of hydrograph stations.

11.1.7.2.3. Distribution of Hydrograph stations in different lithogroup

This shows the lithological unit-wise number of hydrograph stations.

11.1.7.2.4. Distribution of hydrograph station dug, Pz, area represented

This shows the block-wise different areas and number of hydrograph stations under dug wells and piezometers.

11.1.7.2.5. Depth to water Table

This shows the site-wise depth to water table for each specified month and also calculates trend for the site. Selection criteria are From and To Year and Months.

11.1.7.2.6. Trend of Water Level

This shows the location-wise rise, fall and intercept for the specified years. Selection criteria are From Year, To Year and Pre Monsoon / Post Monsoon / Annually.

11.1.7.2.7. Station-wise Rainfall analysis for the year of year book

This shows the station-wise Normal annual, Normal Monsoon, Normal Non-Monsoon data along with the annual number of rainy days.

11.1.7.2.8. Analysis of Rainfall for the year - Report

This shows the Monthly, Monsoon, Non-monsoon and Annual Rainfall for the specified year, Station-wise.

11.1.7.2.9. Analysis of Rainfall for the year and the departure for the specified period

This shows the Monthly, Monsoon, Non-monsoon and Annual Rainfall for the specified year, Station-wise.

11.1.7.2.10. Hydrogeological Details of Well Inventoried

This shows well-wise hydrogeological details. 11.1.7.2.11. Chemical Quality data

This shows the concentration of various parameters of Water Quality like pH, EC etc for the selected sites.

11.1.7.3. Plots


GEMS User Manual

346

11.1.7.3.1. Analysis of Rainfall for the year

This shows the graphical representation of Departure from Normal and Monthly Departure rainfall.

11.1.7.3.2. Analysis of Rainfall for the year and the departure for the specified period

This shows the graphical representation of Departure from Normal and Monthly Departure rainfall and also the monthly rainfall.

11.1.8. Ground Water Exploration Report

11.1.8.1. Status of Exploration

This shows the details of all the Exploration Wells. Selection criteria are Date 11.1.8.2. Details of Well Constructed Table

This shows the number of Exploratory, Observatory, Slim holes and piezometers in a District / Block. There is no selection criterion for this report.

11.1.9. GW Monitoring report

11.1.9.1. Contours

The available contours are listed below: 11.1.9.1.1. Depth To Water Level Map

This shows the contour of Depth to Water Level. Selection criteria are Semi / Confined / Unconfined, Manual / Automatic, Year.

11.1.9.1.2. Depth To Water Level Fluctuation Map (Pre-Post)

This shows the contour of Depth to Water Level Fluctuation Pre/Post. Selection criteria are Semi / Confined / Unconfined, Manual / Automatic, Year.

11.1.9.1.3. Water Level data for Specified Period -Contour

This shows the contour of Depth to Water Level Fluctuation – Contour. Selection criteria are Semi / Confined / Unconfined, Manual / Automatic, Year.

11.1.9.1.4. Depth To Water Level Fluctuation Map (wrt. Decadal Mean)

This shows the contour of Depth to Water Level Fluctuation (wrt. Decadal Mean). Selection criteria are Semi / Confined / Unconfined, Manual / Automatic, Year - Month.

GEMS User Manual

347

11.1.9.1.5. Depth To Water Level Fluctuation Map (Annual)

This shows the contour of Depth to Water Level Fluctuation (Annual). Selection criteria are Semi / Confined / Unconfined, Manual / Automatic, Year - Month.

11.1.9.1.6. Depth To Water Level Map (Postmonsoon)

This shows the contour of Depth to Water Level Fluctuation (Postmonsoon). Selection criteria are Semi / Confined / Unconfined, Manual / Automatic, Year.

11.1.9.1.7. Depth to Water Level Map (Premonsoon)

This shows the contour of Depth to Water Level Fluctuation (Premonsoon). Selection criteria are Semi / Confined / Unconfined, Manual / Automatic, Year.

11.1.9.2. Reports


11.1.9.2.1. Fluctuation and frequency distribution from different ranges from one period to other

This shows the block-wise number of wells, ranges of fluctuation, No of wells showing fluctuation. Selection criteria are Semi / Confined / UnConfined, Manual / Automatic, Year.

11.1.9.2.2. Fluctuation of Selected Period with Pre/Post Level.

This shows the well-wise Pre-Monsoon, Post-Monsoon water level and its fluctuation. Selection criteria are Semi / Confined, Manual / Automatic and year.

11.1.9.2.3. Fluctuation of water level with mean and selected period

This shows the location-wise mean water level, water level and its difference. Selection criteria are Semi / Confined, Manual / Automatic, Year-Month.

11.1.9.2.4. Status of national Hydrograph monitoring stations.

This shows the block-wise details of national hydrograph stations as on specified Year-Month. Selection criteria are Month-Year.

11.1.9.2.5. Depth to water table nos. of well, DTW min-max, percent of well in various number

This shows the block-wise number of wells analysed, depth to water table and number of wells in the specified ranges. Selection criteria are Semi / Confined, Manual / Automatic, Year-Month and ranges.

GEMS User Manual

348

11.1.9.2.6. Water Level Data/Fluctuation of the specified period

This shows the location-wise water table data for the selected year and its previous year. It also shows the water table data variation with respect to the selected year and its previous year. Selection criteria are Semi /Confined / Unconfined, Manual / Annual and year.

11.1.9.2.7. Water Level fluctuation (Pre/Post) for the selected year

This shows the location-wise fluctuation of water level (for pre and post months). Selection criteria are Semi / Confined / Unconfined, Manual / Annual and year.

11.1.9.3. Plots


11.1.9.3.1. Depth to water Table nos. of well - Plot

This shows the graphical representation of block-wise number of wells analyzed, depth to water table and number of wells in the specified ranges. Selection criteria are Semi / Confined, Manual / Automatic, Year-Month and ranges.

11.1.9.3.2. Fluctuation and frequency distribution from different ranges from one period to other

This shows the graphical representation of block-wise number of wells, ranges of fluctuation and No of wells showing fluctuation. Selection criteria are Semi / Confined, Manual / Automatic, Year.

11.1.9.3.3. Fluctuation of water level with mean and Selected period

This shows the graphical representation of location-wise mean water level, water level and its difference. Selection criteria are Semi / Confined, Manual / Automatic, Year-Month.

11.1.10. Investigation Report

11.1.10.1. Contours


11.1.10.1.1. Map of Aquifer Properties (Transmissivity)

Transmissivity contours are generated for a defined area using various interpolation methods. The user has the option to select interpolation method and define the classes.

GEMS User Manual

349

11.1.10.1.2. Hydrogeological Map

Hydrogeological map carries information Geology, Stratigraphy, Depth of water table Contour, Lineaments. Depth of water table contour is generated for a defined area using various interpolation methods. The user has the option to select interpolation method and define the classes.

11.1.10.1.3. Water Table Elevation Map

Depth of water table contour is generated for a defined area using various interpolation methods. The user has the option to select interpolation method and define the classes. Selection criteria are Year - Month.

11.1.10.1.4. Water Table Elevation Fluctuation Map (w.r.t. Decadal Mean)

Depth of water table contour is generated for a defined area using various interpolation methods. The user has the option to select interpolation method and define the classes.. The Selection criteria are Month-Year.

11.1.10.1.5. Map of Aquifer Properties (Storativity)

Storativity contour is generated for a defined area using various interpolation methods. The user has the option to select interpolation method and define the classes.

11.1.10.1.6. Map of Aquifer Properties (Specific Yield)

Specific Yield contour is generated for a defined area using various interpolation methods. The user has the option to select interpolation method and define the classes.

11.1.10.1.7. Isohyetal Map

Rainfall contour is generated for a defined area using various interpolation methods. The user has the option to select interpolation method and define the classes.

11.1.10.1.8. Water Table Elevation Map (Postmonsoon)

This shows the contours of water table elevation in the post-monsoon period for the specified region. Selection criteria is year.

11.1.10.1.9. Water Table Elevation Map (Premonsoon)

This shows the contours of water table elevation in the pre-monsoon period for a specified region. Selection criteria is year.

GEMS User Manual

350

11.1.10.1.10. Depth To Water Level Trend Map

This shows the trend of Depth to Water Level for Pre/Post/Annual within the specified year range.

11.1.10.2. Maps

11.1.10.2.1. Soil Map

This is a thematic map of soil type for a selected district or state. The user is given an option to make the thematic map either on the basis of soil type or on the basis of soil type code. The user can select the paper size in which the map is to be printed or the scale of the map (Ratio Scale).

11.1.10.2.2. Land Use Map

This is a thematic map of land use type for a selected district or state. The user is given an option to make the thematic map either on the basis of land use type or on the basis of land use type code. The user can select the paper size in which the map is to be printed or the scale of the map (Ratio Scale).

11.1.10.2.3. Site Plan of Exploratory Well

This map shows the location, nearest village location, approaching road and rail of the site.

11.1.10.2.4. Morphometric Analysis Map

Morphometric Analysis includes creation of Drainage density, Frequency and Bifurcation Ratio maps. It uses Watershed and Drainage maps for a selected region. Further these maps can be classified into the user-defined groups.

11.1.10.2.5. Map showing Locations of Exploratory Wells

This map shows the location of exploratory, piezometer and slim holes for a district or state.

11.1.10.2.6. Map showing Locations of Tube Wells

This map shows the location of tube wells for a district / state.

11.1.10.2.7. Geomorphological Map

This shows the area of individual geomorphology in a block for a district / state. 11.1.10.3. Reports

GEMS User Manual

351

11.1.10.3.1. Hydrometeorological information rainfall

This shows the graphical representation of Percentage Departure from Normal and Percentage Departure from Mean. It also shows the Monthly, Monsoon, Nonmonsoon and Annual Rainfall for the specified years. From the data, the Mean, Variance and Std Deviation are calculated.

11.1.10.3.2. Meteorological Station Information Table

This shows meteorological data like temperature, Relative humidity, Wind velocity, PET. Selection criteria is site/sites.

11.1.10.3.3. Irrigation Details

This shows Watershed-wise areas irrigated by ground water and surface water and also shows the irrigation intensity.

11.1.10.3.4. Hydrogeological Formation-wise Aquifer Properties

This shows the geology-wise Transmissivity, Storativity and Specific capacity for different blocks.

11.1.10.3.5. Pre-Post Fluctuation Table

This shows the well-wise pre-post water level and their fluctuation under each block. Selection criteria is From and To dates.

11.1.10.3.6. Wells General

This shows general information of all the wells.

11.1.10.3.7. Soil Table

This shows the area of individual soil types in a block for a district.

11.1.10.3.8. Block at glance

This shows all the necessary Block Information in a block like: • General Information • Land Use • Climatology • Drinking water supply particulars • Irrigation particulars • Total area irrigated from all the sources • Agriculture • Geology • Hydrogeology

GEMS User Manual

352

• Average pre-monsoon water level • Average post-monsoon water level • Ground water potential • Total number of feasible ground water structures • Ground water monitoring station national hydrograph network

stations • Existing ground water structures • Hydrochemistry

11.1.10.3.9. Physiographic Units Table

This shows the area of individual soil types in a block for a district. 11.1.10.3.10. Land use Table

This shows the area of individual land use types in a block for a district.

11.1.10.3.11. Water level data of individual Hydrograph

This shows the year-wise water level data (mbgl) for all the months in a particular site. Selection criteria is site/sites, Confined/Semi Confined/Unconfined and Manual/Automatic.

11.1.10.3.12. Area Under Various Depth Ranges

This shows the block-wise depth range area for a particular district. The user can select the ranges.

11.1.10.3.13. Hydrogeological Details of Well Inventoried

This shows well-wise hydrogeological details of wells. 11.1.10.3.14. Morphometric Analysis Report

This shows the details of the Morphometric Analysis like Total Stream Length, Number of Streams, Order of Stream, Drainage Density, Drainage Frequency and Drainage Area etc.

11.1.10.3.15. District At Glance

This shows all the necessary information in a district like:

• General Information • Land Use • Climatology • Drinking water supply particulars • Irrigation particulars

GEMS User Manual

353

• Total area irrigated from all the sources • Agriculture • Geology • Hydrogeology • Average pre-monsoon water level • Average post-monsoon water level • Ground water potential • Total number of feasible ground water structures • Ground water monitoring station national hydrograph network

stations • Existing ground water structures • Hydrochemistry

11.1.10.3.16. State At Glance

This shows all the necessary information in a state like:

• General Information • Land Use • Climatology • Drinking water supply particulars • Irrigation particulars • Total area irrigated from all the sources • Agriculture • Geology • Hydrogeology • Average pre-monsoon water level • Average post-monsoon water level • Ground water potential • Total number of feasible ground water structures • Ground water monitoring station national hydrograph network Stations. • Existing ground water structures • Hydrochemistry

11.1.10.3.17. Drought Analysis

This shows the district / block-wise annual normal rainfall, year-wise annual rainfall, departure from normal rainfall in a particular block. The Selection criteria is From and To years.

GEMS User Manual

354

11.1.10.4. Plots

The available plots under it are as follows:

11.1.10.4.1. Hydrometrological Information Rainfall - Plot

This shows the well-wise rise/fall of rainfall for the specified years.

11.1.11. Miscellaneous

11.1.11.1. Reports


11.1.11.1.1. Check for Artificial Recharge Structure

This shows the presence of mandatory data for Artificial Recharge Structures.

11.1.11.1.2. Check for Hydromet Station

This shows the presence of mandatory data for Hydromet / Rainfall Stations.

11.1.11.1.3. Check for Surface Water Sites

This shows the presence of mandatory data for Surface Water Sites.

11.1.11.1.4. Check for Well

This shows the presence of mandatory data of wells.

11.1.12. Surface Geophysical

11.1.12.1. Reports

The available reports under it are as follows:

11.1.12.1.1. Surface geophysical

This shows the site-wise type of instrument used, layer description like layer no, layer thickness, layer parameter and geology name.

11.1.13. Water Quality – Thematic Maps

11.1.13.1. Maps

11.1.13.1.1. Bar Map

Draws Bar diagrams of selectable water quality parameters for the selected sites on a map.

GEMS User Manual

355

11.1.13.1.2. Pie Map

Draws Pie diagrams of water quality parameters for the selected sites on a map.

11.1.13.1.3. Point Value Map

Displays values of selectable water quality parameter for the selected sites on a map.

11.1.13.1.4. Stiff

Draws Stiff diagrams of water quality parameters at the selected sites on map. 11.1.14. Water quality reports

11.1.14.1. Contours

11.1.14.1.1. Contour of Selectable Water Quality Parameters

This shows the contour of selected water quality parameter. 11.1.14.2. Plots

The available plots under it are as follows: 11.1.14.2.1. Time Series Plot of Selectable Parameters

This shows the time series plot for the selected parameters during the specified years for a selected site. Selection criteria is site, from year, to year and single/multiple parameters. It also shows the trend for all the specified parameters.

11.1.14.2.2. Longitudinal Plot of Multiple Sites

This shows the Longitudinal plot (Bar) for the selected sites and parameters. Line can also be drawn in place of a bar. Selection criteria is site/sites and single/multiple parameters.

11.1.14.2.3. Correlation of a Single Parameter Against Multiple Parameters for Multiple Site

This shows the cross plot between two parameters. One single parameter is on X-axis and single/multiple parameters on Y-axis. Best fit line can also be drawn for this cross plot.

11.1.14.2.4. Correlation of a Single Parameter Against Multiple Parameters for Single Site

This shows the cross plot of parameters where one parameter is selected for X-axis against an other for single site between the specified years. Best fit can be

GEMS User Manual

356

drawn for this cross plot. Selection criteria is site, From and To year and parameters for X-axis and Y-axis.

11.1.14.2.5. Time Series Plot of Single Parameter of Multiple Sites

This shows the time series with the specified parameter and single/multiple sites. Line can also be drawn in place of bars. Selection criteria is From and To year, parameter and single/multiple sites.

11.1.14.2.6. Depthwise Plot of Multiple Parameter of Single Site

This shows the depth vs. concentration of specified parameters on a particular date at a single site. Selection criteria is parameter, date and site.

11.1.14.2.7. Depth-wise Variation in Quality

This shows the depth of a site for a parameter on X-axis and Y-axis. Selection criteria is site, date, X-Parameter and Y-Parameter/Parameter’s.

11.1.14.3. Reports

11.1.14.3.1. Frequency distribution Table

This shows the frequency distribution of the selected parameter (say Bicarbonate) falling in the specified Years. Selection criteria is From and To years, parameter and ranges.

11.1.14.3.2. Single sample Water quality basic data analysis Table

This shows the following information: • Site details • Sample details • Purging details • Water quality parameter details • Suitability for drinking, irrigation and industrial purpose information

11.1.14.3.3. Multiple sample Water quality basic data analysis Table

This shows the following information: • Basic details • Result of chemical species in water sample • Bacteriological, Biological and nutrients • Trace elements, pesticides and pollutants • Analysis with a standard • Result of trace elements • Result of pesticides and micro-organic pollutants

GEMS User Manual

357

11.1.14.3.4. WQ parameter trend Table

This shows the site-wise rise, fall and intercept of Water Quality data. Selection criteria is From and To years, parameter, Pre-monsoon / Post monsoon / Annually.

11.1.15. Well handing over status

11.1.15.1. Reports

The options available under this menu are as follows: 11.1.15.1.1. Status of handing over

This shows the block-wise status of the handed over wells. Selection criteria is From and To dates

11.1.15.1.2. Formation-wise wells drilled

This shows the Formation type-wise number of wells drilled in each block. There is no selection criteria.

11.1.15.1.3. Area type-wise wells drilled

This shows the area type-wise number of wells drilled in each block. There is no Selection criteria.

11.2. Groundwater Assessment Reports Module

Click <Ground Water Assessment Reports> in Report and Query, the following screen “Master Selection For Reports” appears.

GEMS User Manual

358

Screen 10.14

The above screen is divided into three sections. • Main Selection Criteria • Main Selection Area • Current Selection

Main Selection Criteria section In this section of the screen, the user checks the work area as <Administrative>, <Hydrological> separately or both. The checking of <Adminstrative> organizes the output reports state/district. The checking of <Hydrology> organizes the output reports basin/sub-basin. In <Adminstrative>, by default, the <State> is selected, however, the user can select any one of <State> / <District>. Similarly, In <Hydrological>, by default, the <Basin> is selected, however, the user can select any one of <Basin> / <Sub-basin>. Main Selection Area section This section consists of <Administrative> and <Hydrological> and are enabled depending upon the selection in Main Selection Criteria section. It also has <Selectable Items> to display the list of items and <Selected Items> to display the list of selected items. The user has option to deselect the selected item in <selected item> by double click on the record. Similarly the user can return to previous selection by clicking . Current Selection section

GEMS User Manual

359

This section displays the Graphics of the selection of items from Main selection area tree format. Working steps for main selection criteria Check <Administrative> and click any of <State> / <District> as described below.

• State: Click <State>, <Administrative> in main selection area section gets selected and the states defined for the current user (in the user Workarea) appear in the <Selectable Items>

Screen 10.15

District: If the user clicks <District>, then the user can also select the district / districts to generate the report. To click <District>, first double click the state name highlighted in the area of Main Selection Area., the state name is displayed in the <Selectable Item> in the Main Selection Area and also in the Current Selection case. After this if the user clicks in the Main Selection Area, the names of all the districts present in the state get displayed. Double clicking the district brings it to the Current Selection area.

Note: Only those states and districts, which lie in the user work area, are available for selection.

GEMS User Manual

360

Screen 10.16

Check <Hydrology> and click any of <Basin> / <Sub Basin> as described below.

• Basin: Click <Basin>, <Hydrology> in main selection area section and the states defined for the current user (in the user Workarea) appear in the <Selectable Items>




GEMS User Manual

361

Screen 10.17

Click <Next> and the following screen “Report Selection” appears.

Screen 10.18

The above screen has seven sections:

• Report Selection

GEMS User Manual

362

• Single Selection • Assessment Unit • Sub Unit • Assessment Year • Report Header • Office Name

Report Selection

Screen 10.19

Type of report gets enabled or disabled based on the selection of the report. Click <Reports> / <Maps> / <Plots> to list the reports depending on the type of report.

Single Selection

Screen 10.20

Some reports or maps are only generated if there is a single selection of Administrative and Hydrology boundaries. In the above screen, the user has the option of selecting single State / District or Basin / Sub Basin.

GEMS User Manual

363

Report Header and Office Name

Screen 10.21

In this section, the name of the selected report from the listed reports is displayed. If the user requires any other report header (which is reflected at top of report) in the actual report, then it can be changed in this section. This section also contains the name of the office and by default the office name shown in this section reflects from the <Machine Parameter Setting> of Administration.

Assessment Unit

Screen 10.22 If the report needs more selection on Tahsil / Block / Watershed level, then select from this section of the Report Selection Screen. This section lists only those

GEMS User Manual

364

units which are added as assessment units. Values in Tahsil, Block and Watershed can be Single and Multiple Selections depending on the type of report.

Sub Unit

Screen 10.23

The Sub unit, can be of the type Command Area, Non Command Area or Poor Water Quality area. The user can select Sub unit after selecting the Assessment unit .

GEMS User Manual

365

Assessment Year

Screen 10.24

• Select the Assessment year.

Screen 10.25

• <Back>: This option returns the user to previous screen. • <Cancel>: This option cancels the activity and returns the user to main

menu.

The third option <Report> in screen 10.25 varies depending on the report.

• <Report>: If the type of report selected is report, then no more selection is required and the output is directly generated on clicking <Report>

• <Next>: If the type of report requires more selection, then click <Next> and the following screen “Custom Selection criteria” appears.

• <Map>: If the type of report selected is map then Click <Map> to generate the map. If the user selects Thematic Maps then <Next> gets enabled. Click <Next>, the following screen “Custom Selection criteria” appears.

GEMS User Manual

366

Screen 10.25

In “Custom Selection Criteria” screen, the section shown below is used for these reports, to select the interval.

Screen 10.26

Interval has <Monsoon> / <Non – Monsoon> / <Both> for creation of maps.

For preparing the Thematic Map of Groundwater Draft (Domestic Use, Industrial Use, Irrigation Use, All Uses) this section of the screen is used.

GEMS User Manual

367

11.2.1. Reports

11.2.1.1. Details of Assessment Unit

• Location Detail • Type And Characteristics Of Ground Water Assessment Unit

11.2.1.2. Gross Groundwater Draft

• Gross Ground Water Draft Components For Individual Well Types • Gross Unit Draft Per Well • Gross Ground Water Draft Components For Irrigation Uses • Gross Ground Water Draft Components For Domestic Uses • Gross Ground Water Draft Components For Industrial Uses • Gross Gw Draft Summary

11.2.1.3. Recharge from Canals

• Location Details Of Different Canal Segments • Wetted Area In Different Canal Segments • Canal Seepage Factor For Different Canal Segments • Recharge From Canals • Summary Of Recharge From Canal

11.2.1.4. Recharge from Applied Surface Water Irrigation Water

• Location Details Of All Outlets • Irrigation Water Applied By Surface Water Irrigation • Water Table Data • Irrigated Area Under Paddy And Non-Paddy • Return Flow Factor From Applied Surface Water Irrigation • Recharge From Irrigation Water • Summary Of Ground Water Recharge From Surface Water Irrigation

11.2.1.5. Recharge from Applied Groundwater Irrigation Water

• Irrigation Water Applied By Ground Water Irrigation • Water Table Data • Irrigated Area Under Groundwater Irrigation • Return Flow Factor From Applied Ground Water Irrigation

GEMS User Manual

368

• Recharge From Applied Groundwater Irrigation • Summary Of Ground Water Recharge From Ground Water Irrigation

11.2.1.6. Recharge from Tanks and Ponds

• Location Details Of Tanks And Ponds • Recharge From Tanks And Ponds • Summary Of Recharge From Tanks And Ponds

11.2.1.7. Recharge from Water Conservation Structures

• Location Details Of Water Conservation Structures • Recharge From Water Conservation Structures • Summary Of Recharge From Water Conservation Structures

11.2.1.8. Rainfall Recharge by Rainfall Infiltration Factor Method

• Location and Rainfall Details of Raingauge Stations • Normal Rainfall During Monsoon and Non-Monsoon Season • Rainfall Infiltration Factor • Rainfall Recharge

11.2.1.9. Rainfall Recharge by Water Table Fluctuation Method

• Specific Yield • Rainfall Recharge During Monsoon Season Using Regression Method - I • Corrected Rainfall Recharge During Monsoon Season • Estimation Of Specific Yield By Dry Season Ground Water Balance

Method • Summary Recharge From Rainfall • Rainfall During Monsoon Season Of Current Assessment Year • Water Table Fluctuation During Monsoon Season • Ground Water Balance Computations During Monsoon Season • Rainfall Recharge During Monsoon Season Using Regression Method - II • Summary Of Recharge From Rainfall

11.2.1.10. Water Table Trend

• Plot Of Variation Of Depth To Water Table With Successive Years • Water Table Trend During Pre-Monsoon Interval

GEMS User Manual

369

• Water Table Trend During Post-Monsoon Interval • Location And Depth To Water Table Data • Water Table Information - Successive Previous Years (Well-wise) • Water Table Information - Successive Previous Years

11.2.1.11. Summary of groundwater resources estimation

• Recharge From Other Sources • Net Annual Ground Water Availability • Categorisation • Summary Of Annual Groundwater Allocation • Net Annual Ground Water Availability For Future Irrigation Use • Summary Of Resources Available In Assessment Unit • Stage Of Groundwater Development • Annual Groundwater Allocation For Domestic And Industrial Uses

11.2.1.12. Additional potential resources

• Static Ground Water Resource • Potential Recharge In Each Ground Water Assessment Unit • Summary Of Additional Potential Recharge And Static Resource

11.2.1.13. Apportioning

• Locational Details Of Administrative Unit • Net Annual Ground Water Availability • Annual Gross Ground Waterdraft For Irrigation • Water Table Trend • Summary • Annual Gross Ground Water Draft For All Uses • Annual Groundwater Allocation For Domestic And Industrial Water

Supply 11.2.2. Thematic maps

11.2.2.1. Maps

• Static Resources • Groundwater Draft • Recharge From Canal • Recharge From Applied Surface Water Irrigation • Recharge From Applied Groundwater Irrigation

GEMS User Manual

370

• Recharge From Rainfall • Recharge From Waterlogged And Shallow Wt Areas • Water Table Trend • Categorization • Recharge From Flood Prone Areas • Recharge From Tank And Pond • Recharge From Water Conservation Structures • Net Annual Groundwater Available • Stage Of Groundwater Development

11.2.3. Summary of individual groundwater balancing components

11.2.3.1. Reports

• Basic Information For Ground Water Resource Assessment • Gross Groundwater Draft • Groundwater Recharge From Tanks And Ponds • Ground Water Recharge From Water Conservation Structures • Ground Water Recharge Due To Surfacewater Irrigation • Ground Water Recharge Components • Stage Of Ground Water Development • Static Ground Water Reserve • Summary Of Assessment • Ground Water Recharge Due To Canals • Ground Water Recharge Due To Ground Water Irrigation • Ground Water Recharge Due To Rainfall • Additional Potential Recharge Under Specific Conditions

11.3. GIS Reports 11.3.1. Fence Diagram

This diagram shows sub surface, three-dimensional Lithological disposition. It can be made in Automatic and Semi–Automatic mode.

GEMS User Manual

371

Screen 10.27

Click option <Fence Diagram> from <GIS Reports> of Reports and Query for the following screen “SELECTION” to appear. In this screen, the user can check either <Automatic> or <Semiautomatic>. By default <Automatic> is checked.

11.3.1.1. Automatic

Screen 10.28

• In <Automatic> mode, the user enters Merge Lithology and Max.

Horizontal Distance between two wells. • Select any one type of style. • Click <Proceed> to generate the map with Lithological data of wells. The

following screen “Fence” appears with twelve pads.

Screen 10.29

Clicking selects the single object on the map Clicking selects the multiple objects on the map

Clicking Zooms Out the Map Clicking Zooms In the Map

Clicking Drags the map Clicking Creates Fence Diagram

GEMS User Manual

372

Clicking and a subsequent click on any well draws a red line on the map, which shows the depth of the well. After clicking on the second well, it creates a Fence diagram on the map for both the wells.

11.3.1.2. Semiautomatic mode

In <Semiautomatic> mode, click <Proceed>, Wells having Lithological data appears on map with fourteen new pads as shown in screen 10.30.

Screen 10.30



Clicking Drags the map Clicking and a subsequent click any well creates a litholog on the map for selected well

Clicking creates one rectangular object between two selected objects. This is used to join two similar lithological layers between two adjacent wells. Clicking creates triangular object against a selected object. This is used to create a lensoidal structure that truncates in the mid way between two wells. Clicking combines multiple objects on the map. Clicking creates any kind of polygon on the map. This is used when both side lithologies don’t match and the user wants to create any uneven structure. Clicking or or creates two regions with a zigzag break in between. Clicking opens up the data table.

Create litholog for different wells and select different lithology of lithologs and create different regions with the help of above-mentioned options.

GEMS User Manual

373

Screen 10.31

11.3.2. Cross Section

This diagram shows sub surface, two-dimensional Lithological disposition with respect to mean sea level. It can be made in Automatic and Semi–Automatic mode. Click option <Cross Section> from <GIS Reports> of Reports and Query, it opens screen “Selection (10.28)”. In this screen, the user can check either <Automatic> or <Semiautomatic>. By default <Automatic> is checked.

11.3.2.1. Automatic

In <Automatic> mode, the user enters Merge Lithology and Max. Horizontal Distance between two wells. Also Style of Lithological Break needs to be clicked. (1,2,3 and 4 are the different styles of breaks) to give a particular type of break while joining the two wells. Click <Proceed> and wells having Lithological data appear on map with pads as shown in screen 10.30.

GEMS User Manual

374

Screen 10.32



Clicking Drags the map Clicking Creates Cross Section Diagram

Clicking and a subsequent click any well draws a red line on the map and clicking of the second well following the above step creates Cross section diagram on the map for both the wells.

11.3.2.2. Semiautomatic

In <Semiautomatic> mode, on clicking <Proceed>, Wells having Lithological data appear on map with pads as shown in screen 10.30.



Clicking Drags the map Clicking and a subsequent Click any well creates a litholog on the map for the selected well

Clicking creates one rectangular object between two selected objects. This is used to join two similar lithological layers between two adjacent wells.

GEMS User Manual

375

Clicking creates triangular object against a selected object. This is used to create a lensoidal structure that truncates in the mid way between two wells. Clicking combines multiple objects on the map. Clicking creates any kind of polygon on the map. This is used when both side lithologies don’t match and the user wants to create any uneven structure. Clicking or or creates two region with a zigzag break in between. Clicking opens up the data table. Clicking brings back to well view. Clicking shows only cross section with a proper Legend.

Create litholog for different wells and select different lithology of lithologs and create different regions with the help of above-mentioned options.

Screen 10.33

11.4. Adhoc Map Query 11.4.1. SQL Select


Click option <SQL Select> in <Adhoc Map Query> under Reports and Query and it opens the following screen “SQL Select”.

GEMS User Manual

376

Screen 10.34

The above screen helps in forming an Oracle query to get the results. The queries can be from one or more than one table.

• Select the <Tables>, <Columns> to be used in the query. • Where Condition: The user can enter the where condition by selecting the

columns, operators and values • Group by Columns: The user can enter the Columns to be grouped for

summary results. • Order by Columns: The user can enter the Columns to be Ordered for

sorting the results. • There is an option of saving query in user specified table. • Click <Verify>to check the syntax of the query formed. • Click <OK> to see the result in the below map.

GEMS User Manual

377

Screen 10.35

11.4.2. Select All


Click option <Select All> in <Adhoc Map Query> under Reports and Query, selects all the sites present in the map. It is shown in the following screen 10.36

GEMS User Manual

378

Screen 10.36

11.4.3. Find

Find option allows the user to locate individual objects or addresses. If an object is located, it is highlighted. Find is active in the following conditions :

• The table contains an indexed field. • The table has graphic objects attached to the records (Mappable). • The table appears either in a map window or in browser window.


Click option <Find> in <Adhoc Map Query> under Reports and Query to open the following screen “Screen 10.37”.

GEMS User Manual

379

Screen 10.37

In the above screen, the user can respecify the various options. Click <Respecify>, the following screen “Find” appears.

Screen 10.38

In the above screen, the user can enter the following details:

• Search Table: The name of the table to be searched. • For objects in column: The column to be searched in the table.

GEMS User Manual

380

• In Optional section, enter the Table and Column name with which the data will be located .

• Click <Mark with Symbol> and select the size and type of symbols that will be visible on the map as per the user’s query.

• Clicking <OK>returns to the previous screen (Screen 10.38) • Enter the State Name and click <OK>. If more than one site is queried

then it gives a message saying “Exact match not find. Select one and click <OK>”

On the map the symbol selected is visible on the Site as given below

Screen 10.39

11.4.4. Calculate Statistics


Calculate Statistics option allows the user to perform statistical calculations for a column of a table. Calculate Statistics is active when at least one table is open and there is at least one numeric column in that table.


Click option <Calculate Statistics> in <Adhoc Map Query> under Reports and Query and the following screen “Calculate Column Statistics”.

GEMS User Manual

381

Screen 10.40

Select table and column. Click <OK> and the following screen “Column Statistics” appears. It shows the statistics related to that table and column.

Screen 10.41

11.5. Adhoc Oracle Query 11.5.1. Working Steps

Click <Adhoc Oracle Query> of Reports and Query and the following screen “Open DBMS Table – Step 1 to 4” appears.

GEMS User Manual

382

Screen 10.42

• Click <New> and the screen “MapInfo Oracle Connect” appears. • Enter the user Name, Password, Service Name and click <OK>. Listing

of all the tables appears in the list. • Select the table and click <Next>, the following screen “Open DBMS

Table – Step 2 to 4” appears.

GEMS User Manual

383

Screen 10.43

• Select the columns and click <Next>, the following screen “Open DBMS

Table – Step 3 to 4” appears.

Screen 10.44

GEMS User Manual

384

In the above screen, filter the data by adding conditions. Click <Next> and the following screen “Open DBMS Table – Step 4 to 4” appears.

Screen 10.45

Enter name and path of the file to save the result.

11.6. Adhoc Thematic Maps 11.6.1. Working Steps

Click <Adhoc Map Query> of Reports and Query and the following screen “Create Thematic Map – Step 1of 3” appears.

GEMS User Manual

385

Screen 10.46

The above is the first of three screens to create a Thematic Map.

• Select the template to be implemented in the Map. Click <Next>. The following screen “Create Thematic Map – Step 2 of 3” appears.

Screen 10.47

In the above screen, select the table and field on which the thematic map has to be generated.

• Check <Ignore Zeroes or Blanks>, to ignore the points with zero or no values.

• Click <Next> and the following screen “Create Thematic Map – Step 3 of 3” appears.

GEMS User Manual

386

Screen 10.48

• In the above screen the user can see the ranges and their respective colors

in the preview text area. • The user can change the ranges by clicking <Ranges>, change the Style

by clicking <Styles> and change the Legend by clicking <Legend>. • Selecting Ascending or Descending options under Legend Label Order

can define the Ordering of Legends. • Click <OK> to generates the Thematic Map as in the screen below.

GEMS User Manual

387

Screen 10.49

11.7. Adhoc Reports <Adhoc Reports> helps in generating customized reports or to export data.


Click <Adhoc Reports> in Report and Query, the following screen “Master Selection For Reports” appears.

GEMS User Manual

388

Screen 10.50



Main Selection Criteria section In this section of the screen, the user checks the work area as <Administrative>, <Hydrological> or <Project> separately or in any combination of two or three checkbox’s. The checking of <Adminstrative> organizes the output reports state/district/ tahsil/ block. By default, the <State> is selected, however, the user can select any one of <State> / <District> / <Tahsil> / <Block>.The checking of <Hydrology> organizes the output reports basin/sub-basin. In this case, by default, the <Basin> is selected, however, the user can select any one of <Basin> / <Sub-basin> / <Watershed>. Main Selection Area section This section consists of <Administrative>, <Hydrological> and <Project> and are enabled depending upon the selection in Main Selection Criteria section. It also has <Selectable Items> to display the list of items and <Selected Items> to display the list of selected items. The user has option to deselect the selected item in <selected item> by double click on the record. Similary the user can return to previous selection by clicking .

GEMS User Manual

389

Current Selection section This section displays the Graphics of the selection of items from Main selection area tree format. Working steps for main selection criteria Check <Administrative> and click any of <State> / <District> / <Tahsil> / <Block> as described below.

State: Click <State>, <Administrative> in main selection area section gets selected and the states defined for the current user (in the user Workarea) appear in the <Selectable Items>

Screen 10.51

• District: if <District> is selected in main selection criteria, double click

the state name in <Selectable Items>. Click in the Main Selection Area, names of all districts in the state are displayed in <Selectable Items>. Double click the districts for selection. The current selection is displayed in the Current Selection area.

• Similar steps are applicable for Tahsil and Block Level.


GEMS User Manual

390

Screen 10.52

Check <Hydrology> and click any of <Basin> / <Sub Basin> as described below.

• Basin: Click <Basin>, <Hydrology> in main selection area section gets selected and the states defined for the current user (in the user Workarea) appear in the <Selectable Items>




GEMS User Manual

391

Screen 10.53

• Click <Next> and the following screen “Adhoc Reports” appears.

Screen 10.54

The above screen is divided in two sections

• Selection • Selection of Fields.

GEMS User Manual

392

In the Selection section, all types of data are displayed and the user can select one or more types of data.

• In Selection of fields section, all the fields related to selected type of data are displayed.

• In this screen the user can select the fields. • The additional option <Load Query> is provided to load a pre saved

query. • Click <Next> and the following screen “Filters and Joins” appears

Screen 10.55

In the above screen, the data is filtered based on joins and conditions with the help of operators as shown in screen “Tables and Joins (10.56)”.

GEMS User Manual

393

Screen 10.56

• Click <Save Query> to save the query.

Screen 10.57

It prompts the user to enter a name for the query as shown in screen “Save As”.

GEMS User Manual

394

Screen 10.58

• Click <Save> and saves the query by the specified name.

• Click <Next> on screen 10.57, shows the data selected by the query in the screen “Data Browser”

Screen 10.59

GEMS User Manual

395

There are various options available in the above screen. These are explained below:

• <Report>: This option generates a report of the selected data.

• <Export Data>: Click <Export Data>, saves the data in an Excel file or a flat file as shown in the following screen “Save As”.

Screen 10.60

• <Print>: Click <Print> to print the data on the printer.

11.8. Adhoc Maps

<Adhoc Maps> allows the user to generate a map based on the selected parameters dynamically.


Click <Adhoc Maps> of Reports and Query, the following screen “Master Selection For Reports” appears.

GEMS User Manual

396

Screen 10.61



Main Selection Criteria section In this section of the screen, the user checks the work area as <Administrative>. In <Adminstrative>, by default, the <State> is selected, however, the user can select any one of <State> / <District>. Main Selection Area section This section consists of <Administrative> is enabled depending upon the selection in Main Selection Criteria section. It also has <Selectable Items> to display the list of items and <Selected Items> to display the list of selected items. The user has option to deselect the selected item in <selected item> by double click on the record. Similary the user can return to previous selection by clicking . Current Selection section

GEMS User Manual

397

This section displays the Graphics of the selection of items from Main selection area tree format. Working steps for main selection criteria Check <Administrative> and click any of <State> / <District> as described below.

• State: Click <State>, <Administrative> in main selection area section gets selected and the states defined for the current user (in the user Workarea) appear in the <Selectable Items>

• District: if <District> is selected in main selection criteria, double click the state name in <Selectable Items>. Click in the Main Selection Area, names of all districts in the state gets displayed in <Selectable Items>. Double click the districts for selection. The current selection is displayed in the Current Selection area.


• Click <Next> and the following screen “Layer Selection” appears.

Screen 10.62

GEMS User Manual

398

• The map layers available in the application are displayed in Available Layers.

• Select one layer at a time and click <Next>, the selected layer is displayed.

• From Operation, select the option and from Value, select the value. • Select at least two layers. • Click<Exit> to exist the screen. • Click <Clear> clears the selection. • Click <Next Operation> opens the following screen “Parameter

Selection”.

Screen 10.63

• Check Water Level, then select the operation and enter the water level. • Check <Water Quality> also. • Select the parameter, operation and enter the value. • Select Month, From Year and To Year. From Period section • Click <Search>, the map is generated showing the area with user selected

conditions in the screen “Layer Selection “.

GEMS User Manual

399

12. Analysis The Analysis module is used for analyzing the data entered through various modules of the GEMS software and is grouped into the following sections:

• Geophysics • Water Level • Well Log • Water Quality • Grain Size Analysis • Rainfall

Click Analysis, above options are displayed in following screen “GEMS”.

Screen 11.1

GEMS User Manual

400

12.1. Geophysics 12.1.1. Description

The purpose of this is to generate pre-defined graphs and diagrams based on raw geophysical field data, entered through the module ‘Geophysical Exploration’. The graphs and diagrams are used to interpret the field data and this interpretation is utilized for further exploration in the field of Geophysics.

The parameters used in generating the diagrams are dependent on the method of exploration. The different methods of exploration are:

• Electrical/ Induced Polarization/ Sounding/ Schlumberger • Electrical/ Induced Polarization/ Sounding/ Wenner • Electrical/ Induced Polarization/ Profiling/ Schlumberger • Electrical/ Induced Polarization/ Profiling/ Wenner • Electrical/ Miss-e-La-Masse/ Profiling • Electrical/ Resistivity/ Sounding/ DD-Azimuthal • Electrical/ Resistivity/ Sounding/ DD-Equatorial • Electrical/ Resistivity/ Sounding/ DD-Parallel • Electrical/ Resistivity/ Sounding/ DD-Perpendicular • Electrical/ Resistivity/ Sounding/ DD-Radial • Electrical/ Resistivity/ Sounding/ Half-Schlumberger • Electrical/Resistivity/ Sounding/ Lee-Partitioning • Electrical/ Resistivity/ Sounding/ Schlumberger • Electrical/ Resistivity/ Sounding/ Wenner • Electrical/ Resistivity/ Profiling/ Lee-Partitioning • Electrical/ Resistivity/ Profiling/ Schlumberger • Electrical/ Resistivity/ Profiling/ Wenner • Magnetic/ Profiling • Electromagnetic/ VLF/ Profiling • Electromagnetic/ HLEM/ Profiling • Electromagnetic/ HLEM/ Sounding • Seismic/ Reflection/ Profiling • Seismic/ Refraction/ Profiling


Click <Geophysics> of Analysis, the following screen “Selection For Plots” appears:

GEMS User Manual

401

Screen 11.2

• Select the State/ District/ Tahsil/ Block/ Village from the Administrative

Boundary. • Exploration Site ID/ Exploration Site Name gets filtered based on the

selected Administrative Boundary. • Select the Geophysical Site Id/Site Name. • Administrative Boundary of the selected Site Id/Site Name are displayed

in disabled mode. • Investigation Id(s) for the selected Site are displayed. • Select the Investigation Id(s) and click <Plot>.

Note: The above steps of selecting a Geophysical Site are same for all types of Methods. But the graph that would be generated depends upon the combination of Methods adopted for that Site.

12.1.2.1. Electrical/ Induced Polarization/ Sounding/ Schlumberger

The following screen “Selection For Plots” appears. This screen displays the selection of a site and its usage in this particular combination of Methods.

GEMS User Manual

402

Screen 11.3

• Click <Plot>, the following screen “Choose Plot Option” appears:

Screen 11.4

Depending upon user’s choice, the graph is generated.

• If <Chargeabilities> is chosen, output is based on Half Electrode Separation (AB/2) and Chargeability (M, M1, M2, M3, M4). This can be viewed in the following screen:

GEMS User Manual

403

Screen 11.5

Description:

• In the above screen, graph is generated showing Half Electrode Separation on X-axis and Chargeability on Y-axis.

• The plotted values are calculated as the Log values of the actual data. • The scale of the graph depends upon the actual data. • The Legend shows the Site Details, Method adopted and the reference

about the data plotted on the graph.

If <Apparent Resistivity> is selected, output is based on Half Electrode Separation (AB/2) and Apparent Resistivity.

GEMS User Manual

404

Screen 11.6

Description:

• In the above screen, graph is generated showing Half Electrode Separation on X-axis and Apparent Resistivity on Y-axis.



12.1.2.2. Electrical/ Induced Polarization/ Sounding/ Wenner

On selecting a site that has adopted this method and click <Plot>, the following screen “Choose Plot Option” appears

Screen 11.7

GEMS User Manual

405

Depending upon user’s choice, the graph is generated.

• If <Chargeabilities> is chosen, output is based on Electrode Separation (a) and Chargeability (M, M1, M2, M3, M4). This can be viewed in the following screen.

Screen 11.8

Description:

• In the above screen, graph is generated showing Current Electrode Separation (a) on X-axis and Chargeability on Y-axis.



• If <Apparent Resistivity> is selected, output is based on Electrode Separation (a) and Apparent Resistivity.

GEMS User Manual

406

Screen 11.9

Description:

• In the above screen, graph is generated showing Current Electrode

Separation (a) on X-axis and Apparent Resistivity on Y-axis. • The plotted values are calculated as the Log values of the actual data. • The scale of the graph depends upon the actual data. • The Legend shows the Site Details, Method adopted and the reference


12.1.2.3. Electrical/ Induced Polarization/ Profiling/ Schlumberger

On selecting a site that has adopted this method and click<Plot>, the following screen “Choose Plot Option” appears.

Screen 11.10

GEMS User Manual

407

Depending upon user’s choice the graph are generated.

• If <Chargeabilities> is chosen output is based on Distance and Chargeability (M, M1, M2, M3, M4). This can be viewed in the following screen.

Screen 11.11

Description:

• In the above screen, graph is generated showing Distance on X-axis and

Chargeability on Y-axis. • The scale of the graph depends upon the actual data. • The Legend shows the Site Details, Method adopted and the reference


If <Apparent Resistivity> is chosen, output is based on Distance and Apparent Resistivity.

GEMS User Manual

408

Screen 11.12

12.1.2.4. Electrical/ Induced Polarization/ Profiling/ Wenner

On selecting a site that has adopted this Method and click <Plot>, the following screen “Choose Plot Option” appears.

Screen 11.13

Depending upon user’s choice the graph is generated. If <Chargeabilities> is chosen output is based on Distance and Chargeability (M, M1, M2, M3, M4). This can be viewed in the following screen.

GEMS User Manual

409

Screen 11.14

Description:

• In the above screen, graph is generated showing Distance on X-axis and Chargeability on Y-axis.

• The scale of the graph depends upon the actual data. • The Legend shows the Site Details, Method Adapted and the reference


If <Apparent Resistivity> is chosen, output is based on Distance and Apparent Resistivity.

GEMS User Manual

410

Screen 11.15

12.1.2.5. Electrical/ Miss-e-La-Masse/ Profiling

On selecting a Site that has adopted this Method, one can have Multiple Profiles (Investigation Ids) in that Site. This can be viewed in the following screen:

Screen 11.16

GEMS User Manual

411

• The user can select Single/ Multiple Profiles from the Investigation Id. Depending upon the number of Profiles chosen, the graph is generated.

• As shown in Screen 11.16, three Profiles have been selected. Click <Plot> and the following graph appears

Screen 11.17

Description:

• In the above screen, graph is generated showing Distance on X-axis and DelV on Y-axis.

• The scale of the graph depends upon the actual data. • The Legend shows the Site Details, Method adopted and the reference

about the data plotted on the graph. • The interpretation of the generated Graph is also shown just below the

graph.

12.1.2.6. Electrical/ Resistivity/ Sounding/ DD-Azimuthal

On selecting a Site that has adopted this Method and click <Plot>, the following output is generated.

GEMS User Manual

412

Screen 11.18

Description:

• In the above screen, graph is generated showing “r“ on X-axis and

Apparent Resistivity on Y-axis. “r“ is the distance between the centres of current dipole and potential dipole.


about the Investigation Ids that are plotted on the graph.

12.1.2.7. Electrical/ Resistivity/ Sounding/ DD-Equatorial

On selecting a site that has adopted this Method and click <Plot>, the following graph appears.

GEMS User Manual

413

Screen 11.19

Description:

• In the above screen, graph is generated showing “r“ on X-axis and Apparent Resistivity on Y-axis. “r“ is the distance between the centres of current dipole and potential dipole.


about the Investigation Ids that are plotted on the graph. •

12.1.2.8. Electrical/ Resistivity/ Sounding/ DD-Parallel

On selecting a site that has adopted this Method and clicking <Plot>, the following graph appears

GEMS User Manual

414

Screen 11.20

Description:



about the Investigation Ids that are plotted on the graph •

12.1.2.9. Electrical/ Resistivity/ Sounding/ DD-Perpendicular


GEMS User Manual

415

Screen 11.21

Description:



about the Investigation Ids that are plotted on the graph. •

12.1.2.10. Electrical/ Resistivity/ Sounding/ DD-Radial


GEMS User Manual

416

Screen 11.22

Description:



about the Investigation Ids that are plotted on the graph

12.1.2.11. Electrical/ Resistivity/ Sounding/ Half-Schlumberger


GEMS User Manual

417

Screen 11.23

Description:

• In the above screen, graph is generated showing AO on X-axis and Apparent Resistivity on Y-axis.



12.1.2.12. Electrical/Resistivity/ Sounding/ Lee-Partitioning

On selecting a site that has adapted this Method and click <Plot>, the following graph appears.

GEMS User Manual

418

Screen 11.24

Description:

• In the above screen, graph is generated showing Current Electrode Separation (a) on X-axis and Apparent Resistivity on Y-axis.



12.1.2.13. Electrical/ Resistivity/ Sounding/ Schlumberger

On selecting a site that has adapted this Method and click <Plot>, the following graph appears.

GEMS User Manual

419

Screen 11.25

Description:

• In the above screen, graph is generated showing Half Electrode Separation on X-axis and Apparent Resistivity on Y-axis.


about the Investigation Ids that are plotted on the graph. • The table given in the above graph shows the Interpretation data that is

entered by the user for a particular Geophysical Exploration Site. This data is also represented on the graph (Zigzag lines joined through various points). Depth is represented on the X-axis and Resistivity for different layers on Y-axis.

12.1.2.14. Electrical/ Resistivity/ Sounding/ Wenner


GEMS User Manual

420

Screen 11.26

Description:

• In the above screen, graph is generated showing Current Electrode Separation (a) on X-axis and Apparent Resistivity on Y-axis.



12.1.2.15. Electrical/ Resistivity/ Profiling/ Lee-Partitioning


Screen 11.27

GEMS User Manual

421

Depending upon user’s choice the output is generated.

Screen 11.28

Description:

• In the above screen, graph is generated showing Distance on X-axis and Apparent Resistivity on Y-axis.


about the Investigation Ids that are plotted on the graph. • Interpretation of the generated Graph is also shown just below the graph.

12.1.2.16. Electrical/ Resistivity/ Profiling/ Schlumberger


GEMS User Manual

422

Screen 11.29

Description:




12.1.2.17. Electrical/ Resistivity/ Profiling/ Wenner


GEMS User Manual

423

Screen 11.30

Description:




12.1.2.18. Magnetic/ Profiling


GEMS User Manual

424

Screen 11.31

Description:

• In the above screen, graph is generated showing Distance on X-axis and Magnetic Vertical Intensity on Y-axis.



12.1.2.19. ElectroMagnetic/ VLF/ Profiling


Screen 11.32

GEMS User Manual

425

The frequencies used is listed out. Option for choosing Resistivity is also there. Depending upon user’s choice, the output is generated.

Screen 11.33

Description:

• In the above screen, graph is generated showing Distance on X-axis and InPhase and Quadrature on Y-axis.



12.1.2.20. Siesmic/ Reflection/ Profiling

On selecting a site that has adopted this Method and click <Plot>, the following Graph appears.

GEMS User Manual

426

Screen 11.34

Description:

• In the above screen, graph is generated showing Distance on X-axis and Time on Y-axis.



12.2. Water Level 12.2.1. Hydrograph


This option provides the facility to generate plots of water level and rainfall for single/multiple wells on manual data or DWLR (Machine generated) data.


• Click option <Hydrograph> under <Water Level> of Analysis, the following screen “Selection Criteria for Hydrograph” appears.

GEMS User Manual

427

Screen 11.35

• Select the Measuring type, From Date – To Date (Range) and

Administrative or Hydrological Boundary. • Select the well and click <Next>. The following graph “Hydrograph For

Single Well” is generated.

Screen 11.36

GEMS User Manual

428

12.2.2. Hydrograph Analysis


This option provides the facility to display reports and graphs for different analysis like Lag Time analysis, rainfall effect on water level trend and rainfall events.


• Click option Hydrograph Analysis under <Water Level> of Analysis, the following screen “Selection Criteria for Hydrograph Analysis” appears.

Screen 11.37

• Select the Administrative Boundary, Hydrological Boundary, Measuring

Type, Analysis Type, Well and Hydromet Station. • Click <Next> and the following output graph is generated.

GEMS User Manual

429

Screen 11.38

• Click <Analyze> and the analyzed result is shown.

Screen 11.39

The above result is for Lag Time Analysis (Screen 11.37).

• Click <Report> and the report for the above analysis is generated as shown.

GEMS User Manual

430

Screen 11.40

If the Analysis Type is Rainfall Effect on Water Level Trend (Screen 11.37), then the output is as follows.

Screen 11.41

GEMS User Manual

431

Analyzed Output graph is as follows.

Screen 11.42

Click <Report> and the report for the above is generated as follows.

Screen 11.43

GEMS User Manual

432

If the Analysis Type is Rainfall Events as shown below:

Screen 11.44

Then the output graph is as follows:

Screen 11.45

• Click <Analyze>, enter rainfall intensity

GEMS User Manual

433

Screen 11.46

• Click <Analyze> and the graph changes according to the data entered and

also the analyzed result is shown.

Screen 11.47

• Click <Report> and the following report appears.

GEMS User Manual

434

Screen 11.48

12.3. Well Log 12.3.1. Description

This module provides the facility to analysis the well log on different parameter in Graphical format for selected sites.


Click <Well Log> of Analysis, the following screen “Selection Of Site” appears.

GEMS User Manual

435

Screen 11.49

• Select the site and click <Proceed>, the following screen “Load Template

for Well Logs” appears.

Screen 11.50

• Select the template and click <OK>, the following screen “Log

Sequence” appears.

Screen 11.51

GEMS User Manual

436

• The logs can be selected or de-selected. Select the required Depth Scale

and click <OK>, the following screen “Load Template for Geophysical Logs” appears.

Screen 11.52

• Select the template and click <OK>, the following screen “Geophysical

Log Sequence” appears.

Screen 11.53

• Select the Logs and click <OK>, the Logs are displayed as follows.

GEMS User Manual

437

Screen 11.54

12.4. Water Quality 12.4.1. Description

This module allows the user to draw the following diagrams of water quality sample data based upon various parameters like cations, anions, specific conductance etc. These water quality samples are selected on the basis of From Date and To Date

• Schoeller • Piper • Durov • US Salinity • Wilcox • Collins’ Bar • Pie • Vector • Stiff


Click <Water Quality> of Analysis, the following screen “Selection Criteria for WQ Diagrams” appears.

GEMS User Manual

438

Screen 11.55

This selection screen is somewhat different from others. Here, user can select multiple Administrative and/or Hydrological Boundary.

• Select the required criteria of selection and click <Next>, the following screen “Select Diagram” appears.

Screen 11.56

• Select the Site, Sample and the Diagram, click <Go> and the diagram is

plotted.

GEMS User Manual

439

Screen 11.57

If multiple samples are selected from <Sample Id By Lab> from Screen 11.52, then the following diagrams can be plotted:

• Schoeller • Piper • Durov • US Salinity • Wilcox

On the other hand, if only a single sample is selected, then apart from the other five diagrams, the following Diagrams are also available for plotting:

• Collins’ Bar • Pie • Vector • Stiff

GEMS User Manual

440

12.5. Grain Size Analysis

The <Grain Size Analysis> has the following options. • Cumulative Percent Weight Finer vs Grain Size • Cumulative Percent Weight Retained vs Grain Size

12.5.1. Cumulative Percent Weight Finer vs Grain Size


Cumulative Probability distribution functions of % finer vs. the size of grains of Standard ASTM and BSS Sieves are analyzed to aid in studying sediment composition, interpreting the depositional environment and changing hydrodynamic conditions within a watershed. Few Statistics viz. Effective size, Uniformity coefficient, Grading Coefficient, Sorting Coefficient, Screen size are available to characterize the aquifer material.


• Click Analysis, click <Grain Size Analysis> and click the option <Cumulative Percent Weight Finer vs Grain Size>. The following Screen “Grainsize Analysis” appears.

Screen 11.58

• The above screen displays the list of all Artificial Recharge Structures and

Well within the Users’ work area where the Grainsize analysis can be conducted.

GEMS User Manual

441

• Select the Site Id / Site Name from the list of Sites the sample id gets populated with all the samples corresponding to selected site. The administrative boundary, Site Type and Site Sub Type gets populated and are displayed in disabled mode.

• Select the Sample Id and click <Proceed>. The output is generated showing the graph of Grain Size against Cumulative percent weight finer. It is a semi-log graph. The shape of curve is generally Z. The output also shows certain coefficients, calculated from the graph and its shape.

Screen 11.59

12.5.2. Cumulative Percent Weight Retained vs Grain Size


Cumulative Probability distribution functions of % retained vs. the size of grains of Standard ASTM and BSS Sieves are analyzed to aid in studying sediment composition, interpreting the depositional environment and changing hydrodynamic conditions within a watershed. Few Statistics viz. Effective size, Uniformity coefficient, Grading Coefficient, Sorting Coefficient, Screen size are available to characterize the aquifer material.

GEMS User Manual

442


• Click Analysis, click <Grain Size Analysis> and click the option <Cumulative Percent Weight Retained vs Grain Size>. The following Screen “Grainsize Analysis” appears.

Screen 11.60

• The above screen displays the list of all Artificial Recharge Structures and

Well within the Users’ work area were the Grainsize analysis can be conducted.

• Select the Site Id / Site Name from the list of Sites. The Sample Id gets populated with all the samples corresponding to selected site. The administrative boundary, Site Type and Site Sub Type gets populated and are displayed in disabled mode.

• Select the Sample Id and click <Proceed>. The output is generated showing the graph of Grain Size against Cumulative percent weight retained. It is a semi-log graph. The shape of curve is generally S. The output also shows certain coefficients, calculated from the graph and its shape.

GEMS User Manual

443

Screen 11.61

12.6. Rainfall 12.6.1. Description

This module is used for plotting three types of graphs namely, Rainfall, Wind Velocity vs Time, Rainfall vs Wind Velocity, Rainfall, Temperature, Humidity vs Time on the basis of Hydromet station selected and for the specified period.


• Click <Rainfall> under Analysis, the following screen “Selection Of Hydromet Station” appears.

Screen 11.62

GEMS User Manual

444

• Select the Administrative Boundary, Range and the Hydromet Station and

click <Next>. The hydrograph is generated as follows:

Screen 11.63

This screen has following three options where graphs can be plotted:

• Rainfall, Wind Velocity vs Time • Rainfall vs Wind Velocity • Rainfall, Temperature, Humidity vs Time

GEMS User Manual

445

13. Validation The purpose of this module is to validate the values for Wells. These values are compared with the values already entered as raw data by the user. After doing the comparison of these values, a Report is generated for the user.

Primary: Primary Validation is basically provided on the fields present in various screens itself. Primary Validation can be of two types: Well Dimension GW Resources Estimation Data. Secondary: Secondary Validation is provided on a large volume of data. Secondary Validations can be further classified as follows:

• Statistical o Time Series Data o Water Level Fluctuation

• Inconsistent Well Design • Well Construction • APT and SDT Validations • Map Validation • Visual Data Validation

GEMS User Manual

446

13.1. Primary 13.1.1. Well Dimension


Validation of Well Dimension generates a report displaying all the wells whose dimension don’t confirm to the range as entered by the user.


Click Validation, <Primary> and then select the option Well Dimension

Screen 12.1

The following screen “Validation for Well Dimension” appears

GEMS User Manual

447

Screen 12.2

• Select the State. The <District> is enabled. The different types of well get enabled along with <OK>.

• Select the District. The <Tahsil/Taluka> is enabled • Select the Tahsil/Taluka. The <Block/Mandal> is enabled • Select the Block/Mandal. • Select the Type of Well to set the validations. The Type of Well can be

Dug Well, Dug cum Bore Well, Bore Well, Slim Hole and Tube Well.

13.1.1.2.1. Dug Well

Circular • Click <Dug Well> from the Type of Well. The different Well Sub Types

are enabled • Click <Circular> from Well Sub-Types. The dimension parameters like

Maximum Diameter, Minimum Diameter, Maximum Depth and Minimum Depth are enabled.

• Enter the values in the fields • Click <OK>. A report is generated displaying all those circular dug wells

falling within selected Administrative Boundary whose dimensions do not confirm with the range entered.

GEMS User Manual

448

Screen 12.3

Rectangular • Click <Dug Well> from the Type of Well. The different Well Sub Types

are enabled • Click <Rectangular> from Well Sub-Types. The dimension parameters

like Maximum Length, Minimum Length, Maximum Breadth, Minimum Breadth, Maximum Depth and Minimum Depth are enabled.

• Enter the values in the different fields • Click <OK>. A report is generated displaying all those Rectangular Dug

Wells falling within selected Administrative Boundary whose dimensions do not confirm with the entered range.

GEMS User Manual

449

Screen 12.4

Note: • In case of Dug cum Bore Well, the procedure is same as discussed

in Dug Well. • The user can select upto any level of Administrative Boundary and

perform the validation i.e. if only State is selected then all Wells (of the selected type) in the state are considered, if District is selected then all Wells (of the selected type) in the district are considered.

13.1.1.2.2. Bore Well

• Click <Bore Well> from the Type of Well, the dimension parameters like Maximum Depth and Minimum Depth are enabled.

• Enter the values in the different fields • Click <OK>. A report is generated displaying all those Bore Wells falling

within selected Administrative Boundary whose dimensions do not confirm with the entered range.

GEMS User Manual

450

Screen 12.5

Note: • In case of Tube Well, the procedure is same as discussed in Bore Well. In

case of Slim Hole Well, the procedure is same as of Bore Well but only the maximum diameter has to be entered.

• The user can select upto any level of Administrative Boundary and perform the validation i.e. if only State is selected then all Wells (of the selected type) in the state is considered, if District is selected then all Wells (of the selected type) in the district is considered.

GEMS User Manual

451

13.1.2. GW Resource Estimation Data


This option checks the completeness of data for an Assessment Unit Type of the selected State/District/Basin/Sub-Basin for the entered year


Click Validation, <Primary> and select the option GW Resource Estimation, the following screen “Check Completeness of Data” appears.

Screen 12.6

• Click <State> or <District> or <Basin> or <Sub-Basin> • As per the above selection, the state/ district/ basin/ sub-basin requires to

be selected. If <District> is clicked, select the state and district. Similarly if <Sub-Basin> is clicked, the state, basin and sub-basin requires to be selected.

• The Assessment unit type of selected State is displayed.

GEMS User Manual

452

Screen 12.7

• Enter an Assessment Year to check the data availability for assessment. <Proceed> gets enabled.

• Click <Proceed>. The availability of data on the requested assessment year for Assessment Units of the selected State/ District/ Basin/ Sub-basin is displayed in the form of a report as shown below

GEMS User Manual

453

.

Screen 12.8

• Click <Exit> to cancel all the operations and quit the screen “Check Completeness of Data”

GEMS User Manual

454

13.2. Secondary 13.2.1. Statistical

Statistical option has the following options

• Time Series Data • Water Level Fluctuation • Update Suspected Data

13.2.1.1. Time Series Data – Spatial


This option facilitates the user to validate the Water Level data. The data for the selected Well on a given period is validated with data of neighboring Wells for the same period. The Mean, Standard Deviation and Range are calculated from the data of neighboring Wells, so that Water Level of the selected Well lies in the range [(Mean – 3 Standard Deviation), (Mean + 3 x Standard Deviation)]. The data, which passes the validation, are marked as V (Validated) and the one, which fails, are marked as S (Suspected). A report is generated for the validation, and the user is allowed to modify the suspected data.


Click Validation and click <Secondary>, then click option <Time Series Data> and click option <Spatial>.

GEMS User Manual

455

Screen 12.9 The following screen appears asking the user to select the Well from the map whose data is to be validated.

Screen 12.10 Click <OK> and select the Well from map and click <Select Site From Map> from toolbar as shown below.

GEMS User Manual

456

Screen 12.11 The following screen “Spatial Validation for Water Level” appears.

Screen 12.12 To start working with the above screen

• Enter the Search Radius. Search Radius is the radius of the circle with the selected Well as the centre of the circle.

GEMS User Manual

457

• Select the Month and Year for which the data is to be validated for the selected Well.

• All the Wells lying in the circle are selected on clicking <Select Wells> and their list are displayed. If the user doesn’t want to consider any well for validation, it can be deselected.

• Click <OK>. The system calculates Mean, Standard Deviation and Range based upon Water Level data of all the selected Wells for the same Month and Year . It also checks whether the Water Level of the selected Well for the same period lies in the range (mean – 3 * Standard Deviation) and (mean + 3 * Standard Deviation). The number of data available to calculate the mean and standard deviation should be at least 60% of the total no of wells selected in the circle to perform the validation. If it is within the range it prompts a message that data passes the validation otherwise it fails the validation and a report is generated for it as shown below.

Screen 12.13

• Click <Cancel> to quit from this screen. • Click <Update Suspected Data> to update or modify the suspected data,

that is, the data that has not passed through validations. The following screen “Suspected Data Validation Screen” appears.

GEMS User Manual

458

Screen 12.14

For explanation of this screen refer Update Suspected Data – Working Steps (Sec 12.2.1.5.2).

13.2.1.2. Time Series Data – Non Spatial


This option facilitates the user to validate Water Level and Rainfall data of the selected Site and Period on the basis of previous data. The Mean, Standard Deviation and Range are calculated from the previous Water Level and Rainfall data for selected Wells. The data of selected Wells on given Month and Year should lie in the range [(Mean – 3 Standard Deviation), (Mean + 3 x Standard Deviation)]. The data, which passes the validation, are marked as V (Validated) and the one, that fails, are marked as S (Suspected). A report is generated for the validation, and the user is allowed to modify the suspected data.


Click Validation, then click <Secondary> and click option <Time Series Data> and then click option <Non Spatial.>.

GEMS User Manual

459

Screen 12.15

The following screen “Validations” appears.

GEMS User Manual

460

Screen 12.16

To work with the above screen, user can click either <Depth to Water Level (Automated)>, <Depth to Water Level (Manual)> or <Rainfall>. If < Depth to Water Level (Automated)> is clicked,

• All the Wells for which automated data is present get displayed in the Selected Units.

• Select the Well or Wells whose data is to be validated, the Month, Year and Period gets enable.

• Select the Month and Year for which the data is to be validated. Period is the number of years for which the data has to be considered for making the validation rule. For example, if the user Select May from Month and 1998 from Year and enter 8 in period, than the data for only the Month May and from year 1990 to 1997 for the selected Well is considered to make the validation rules.

If < Depth to Water Level (Manual)> is clicked,

GEMS User Manual

461

• All the Wells for which manual data is present get displayed in the Selected Units.

• Select the Well or Wells whose data is to be validated, the Month, Year and Period gets enable.

• Enter the Month and Year for which the data is to be validated. Period is the number of years for which the data has to be considered for making the validation rule. For example, if the user Select May from Month and 1998 from Year and enter 8 in period, than the data for only the Month May and from year 1990 to 1997 for the selected Well is considered to make the validation rules.

If < Rainfall> is clicked,

• All the Hydromet Stations for which Rainfall data is present get displayed in the Selected Units. <Hourly Rainfall Data>, <Daily Rainfall Data> and <Monthly Rainfall Data> gets enabled.

• If <Hourly Rainfall Data> is clicked, the following screen “Validation” is shown.

Screen 12.17 • The Hydromet Station or Stations, is selected than Time, Date and Period

gets enable. Select the Time and Date. Period is the number of years for which the data has to be considered for making the validation rule. For example, if the user Select 08:00:00 from Time and 20/05/1998 from Date

GEMS User Manual

462

and enter 8 in period, than the hourly data for only Time 08:00:00, Day 20th May and from year 1990 to 1997 for the selected Station is considered to make the validation rules.

• If <Daily Rainfall Data> is clicked, the following screen “Validation” is

shown.

Screen 12.18

• The Hydromet Station or Stations is selected than Date and Period field gets enable. Select the Date. Period is the number of years for which the data has to be considered for making the validation rule. For example, if the user Select 20/05/1998 from Date and enter 8 in period, than the Daily data for only Day 20th May and from year 1990 to 1997 for the selected Station is considered to make the validation rules.

• If <Monthly Rainfall Data> is clicked, the following screen “Validation” is shown.

GEMS User Manual

463

Screen 12.19

• The Hydromet Station or Stations is selected than Month, Year and Period gets enable. Select the Month and Year. Period is the number of years for which the data has to be considered for making the validation rule. For example, if the user Select May from month and 1998 from Year and enter 8 in period, than the Monthly data for only the month May and from year 1990 to 1997 for the selected Station is considered to make the validation rules.

• Click <Validate>, the Mean and Standard Deviation is calculated and the data to be validated is checked whether it lies in the range [(Mean –3 Standard Deviation), (Mean + 3 Standard Deviation)]. A report is generated for the validation as shown in (Screen 12.17)

• Click <Report> and the validation report is displayed as given below.

GEMS User Manual

464

Screen 12.20

• Click <Refresh> to deselect any selection and refresh the screen. • Click <Exit> to cancel all operations and exit the screen. • Click <Update Suspected Data> to update or modify the suspected data.

The following screen “Suspected Data Validation Screen” appears.

GEMS User Manual

465

Screen 12.21

For explanation of this screen refer Update Suspected Data – Working Steps (Sec 12.2.1.5.2). Note: If the total number of data from which the validation rule is to be made is less than 60% of the figure mentioned in period than the data is considered as insufficient to be used for validating.

13.2.1.3. Water Level Fluctuation – Spatial


This option facilitates the user to validate the Water Level data of selected Well for a selected Period with the data of the neighboring Wells on the same period. The Minimum, Maximum Water Level and Range are calculated from the data of neighboring Wells. The data to be validated, should lie in the range [Minimum Water Level, Maximum Water Level]. The data, which passes the validation, are marked as V (Validated) and the one, which fails, are marked as S (Suspected). A report is generated for the validation, and the user is allowed to modify the suspected data.

13.2.1.3.2. Working Step

GEMS User Manual

466

Click Validation and click <Secondary>, then click option <Water Level Fluctuation> and then click option <Spatial>.

Screen 12.22

The following screen appears asking the user to select the Well from the map whose data is to be validated.

Screen 12.23 Click <OK> and select the Well from map and click <Select Site From Map> from toolbar as shown below.

GEMS User Manual

467

Screen 12.24 The following screen “Spatial Validation for Water Level” appears.

Screen 12.25 To start working with the above screen

• Enter the Search Radius. Search Radius is the radius of the circle with the selected Well as the centre of the circle.

• Select the Month and Year for the selected Well.

GEMS User Manual

468

• All Wells lying in the circle are selected on click<Select Wells> and their list is displayed. The user can deselect any well, that he doesn’t want it to be considered for making the validation rule.

• Click <OK>. The system calculates Maximum, Minimum Water Level and Range of all the selected wells for the same Month and Year. It also checks whether the data to be validated lies in the range of Minimum Water Level and Maximum Water level. If it is within the range, the system prompts a message that data passes the validation otherwise it fails the validation and a report is generated for it as shown below.

Screen 12.26 • Click <Cancel> to quit from this screen. • Click <Update Suspected Data> to update or modify the suspected data.


GEMS User Manual

469

Screen 12.27


13.2.1.4. Water Level Fluctuation - Non Spatial


This option facilitates the user to validate the Water Level data of the selected well for a selected period on the basis of the previous data for that well. The Minimum and Maximum Water Level are calculated from the previous data and the range is formed on the basis that the data, which is to be validated, should lie in the range [Minimum Water Level, Maximum Water Level]. The data, which passes the validation, are marked as V (Validated) and the one, which fails, are marked as S (Suspected). A report is generated for the validation, and the user is allowed to modify the suspected data.


GEMS User Manual

470

Click Validation and click <Secondary>. Click option <Water Level Fluctuation> and then click option <Non Spatial>.

Screen 12.28 The following screen “Validations” appears.

GEMS User Manual

471

Screen 12.29 The above screen has two options namely, <Depth to Water Level (Automated)> and <Depth to Water Level (Manual)>. If < Depth to Water Level (Automated)> is clicked,

• All Wells for which automated data is present, are displayed in the Selected Units.

• Select the Well or Wells and Month and Year gets enable. • Select the Month and Year. For example, if the user selects May from

Month and 1998 from Year than the data for only the Month May and all the previous years for the selected Well is considered to make the validation rules.

If < Depth to Water Level (Manual)> is clicked, • All Wells for which manual data is present, are displayed in the Selected

Units. • Select the Well or Wells and the Month and Year gets enable. • Select the Month and Year. For example, if the user selects May from

Month and 1998 from Year than the data for only the Month May and all the previous years for the selected Well is considered to make the validation rules.

GEMS User Manual

472

• Click <Validate>, the maximum and minimum water level are searched , and the data to be validated are checked whether it lies in the range Minimum Water Level, Maximum Water Level]. A report is generated for the validation as shown in Screen 12.30.

• Click <Report>, the validation report is displayed as given below.

Screen 12.30

• Click <Refresh> to deselect any selection and refresh the screen. • Click <Exit> to cancel all operations and exit the screen. • Click <Update Suspected Data> to update or modify the suspected data.


GEMS User Manual

473

Screen 12.31


13.2.1.5. Update Suspected Data


This option facilitates the user to modify the suspected data under various validation rules.


• Click Validation and click <Secondary>. Click option <Update

Suspected Data>.

GEMS User Manual

474

Screen 12.32

The following Screen “Suspected Data Validation Screen” appears.

GEMS User Manual

475

Screen 12.33

To work with the above screen,

• Click either <Depth to Water Level (Automated)> or <Depth to Water Level (Manual)>or <Rainfall>.

• The recent suspected data, (recent suspected data is the data which has been suspected lastly, for example, suppose the user has conducted the validation for 10 Well for the Month May and Year 1998 and over a period 8, and 6 Wells’ data have been found to be suspected. Now again for the same 10 well for the same Month and Year and over a period of 5 the validation is conducted and again 5 Well’s data has been found suspected. Out of these 5 Well data, 3 are those which are found suspected in the validation conducted before and the rest 2 are new, then the list contains 8 data, 3 due to the old validation and rest 5 due to new validation).

• Double click the data; Lower Limit, Upper Limit and Value to be validated gets displayed in the disabled mode. Also if any other record is already existing due to any other validation conducted before and has not been modified, is shown in the list Other Data for the same Type and Date of Suspected Data. The user can also double click any row on the list displayed in Screen 12.33 for updation.

• Click <Update>, <Save> gets enabled and the Value to be Validated gets enabled, the user can change the value if required

• Click <Save> to modify the record and make the data as validated. The system checks if the validated value lie in the Lower Limit and Upper Limit. If it does not lie, the following message appears. Click <Yes> to Save and click <No> if the user wants to change the data again.

Screen 12.34

• If the data lies in the range than above massage does not appear. • If other record (which are not recent) also exists for the suspected record,

which is being changed, than after saving the change the system asks the user to confirm whether the other record has to be deleted, the following message appears. Click <Yes> to delete these records or click <No> to keep this record.

GEMS User Manual

476

Screen 12.35

• Click <Cancel> to cancel any selection and refresh the screen “Suspected Data Validation Screen” (Screen 12.33).

• Click <Exit> to quit from screen “Suspected Data Validation Screen” (Screen 12.33).

GEMS User Manual

477

13.2.2. Inconsistent Well Design

13.2.2.1. Description.

The following validations are being done for Well Design. Validations :

• First assembly Description should be Housing. • Last Assembly Description should be Bail Plug. • Two screens should not be continuous. For e.g. if the first screen range is

50-52 then the next screen range should not start with 52. Ranges 50-52 and 52-55 contain continuous screens. (Invalid) Ranges 50-52 and 52.5-55 contain non-continuous screens. (Valid).

• Length of Bail Plug should be less than 10 m and it should appear at the last 10 m of the Construction depth.

• There cannot be any screen against Grouting Zones. • Screen should be there at Water Bearing Zones.


Click option <Inconsistent Well Design> under <Secondary> of Validation, and the following screen “Selection of Sites for Well Design Validation” appears:

Screen 12.36

The user can validate the data for a single Well or multiple Wells.

GEMS User Manual

478

• Selects Well(s), then the Site-Type, Site Sub-Type and Administrative Boundary corresponding to the selected Well(s) gets displayed in disabled mode.

• Select the Sites for which data is to be validated as shown in Screen 12.36.

Screen 12.37

• Click <Validate> to validate the data for the selected Well(s) and generate a report as shown in Screen 12.38. The report shows the Well Name, Well No, Housing, Bail Plug, Continuous Screens, Bail Plug < 10m, Grouting Zones, Water Bearing Zones, Diameter of Suction Pipe and Pump Setting.

• Click <Refresh> to deselect any selection and refresh the screen. • Click <Exit> to quit from the screen.

•

GEMS User Manual

479

Screen 12.38

In the above screen, a sample report is shown. In case the actual data is valid for some field, then a dash ( ) is displayed in that field, otherwise it shows the remark in the field having invalid data.

13.2.3. Well Construction


Click option <Well Construction> under <Secondary> of Validation, then the following screen “Selection of Sites for Well Construction Validation” appears:

GEMS User Manual

480

Screen 12.39

The user can validate the data for a single Well or multiple Wells. • Select Well(s), then the Site-Type, Site Sub-Type and Administrative

Boundary corresponding to the selected Well(s) get displayed in disabled mode.

• Select the Sites for which data is to be validated. • Select the Site Name/Site Id/ Old Site Id. • Click <Validate> to validate the data for the selected Well(s) and

generate a report as shown in Screen 12.40. The report shows the Well Name, Well No, GP Logging Vs, Well Development, Well Development vs. Pumping Test.

• Click <Refresh> to deselect any selection and refresh the screen. • Click <Exit> to quit from the screen.

GEMS User Manual

481

Screen 12.40

The Standard Validations for Well Construction states that the following activities can be carried out in the given sequence (without any overlapping):

• Geophysical Logging • Well Development. • Pumping Test.

13.2.4. APT & SDT Validations


This option is to validate APT and SDT data In case of APT the type of validations are

• Distance Vs DrawDown: As distance of observation Well from the Main Well increases drawdown in the observation Well decreases

• Time Vs Drawdown: As time increases drawdown increases In case of SDT the validations are

• Discharge Vs Drawdown: As discharge increases drawdown increases • Time Vs Drawdown: As time increases drawdown increases


Click Validation, then <Secondary> and then click option <APT & SDT Validations>

GEMS User Manual

482

Screen 12.41

The following screen “Validation for Drawdown in APT/SDT” screen appears

GEMS User Manual

483

Screen 12.42

• Select the site/sites, type of test and type of validation. <Proceed> gets enabled.

• Click <Proceed> to validate the data and generate a report. The report comprises of the status of the well (i.e. if it is confirming to the validating rule or not) along with the values of the validating parameters like Time, Drawdown, Discharge and Distance as shown (Screen 12.43 ).

• Click <Select All> to select all the Wells at one go. • Click <Refresh> to deselected any selection and refresh the screen. • Click <Exit> to cancel all operations and quit the screen

GEMS User Manual

484

Screen 12.43

GEMS User Manual

485

13.3. Map Validation 13.3.1. Description

<Map Validation> allows the user to validate the data existing in the database through maps.


Click Validation and <Map Validation>.

Screen 12.44

The following screen “Validation of Data through Map” appears.

GEMS User Manual

486

Screen 12.45

• Select the layer or layers for which the user wants to validate the data in the database

• Select the type of sites • Click <Validate> e.g. the layer Geology is selected along with site type

Well. For the selected site type, the Geology available in the database is matched with the existing geology in the map depending upon the Latitude and Longitude of the site. In case of mismatch, a report is generated shown (Screen 12.46)

• The user can update the database from map data by click <Update data>.

GEMS User Manual

487

Screen 12.46

GEMS User Manual

488

13.4. Visual Data Validation 13.4.1. Description

Four type of visual validation can be done • Well Log • Hydrograph • Composite Hydrograph • Spatial Validation


Working is same as in <Analysis> module.

GEMS User Manual

489

14. Appendix 14.1. Appendix – A

List of Symbols for GEMS

Sr.No Buttons Functionality

1 Add

This button is used to enter new records in the table. The fields to be entered are displayed on the current screen. In some screen, New button instead of new button is used to enter new records

2 New

This button is used to enter new records in the table. The fields to be entered are displayed on the current screen. In some screen, Add button instead of new button is used to enter new records

3 Modify

This button helps to update & modify the existing record in table. When user double click (left) the record in displayed table to be modified/edited , the concerned record will appear in the fields at the bottom of the screen. The current record in these fields is ready for modification. User can navigate in these fields with Tab or with mouse This option is used for modify one record at a time in table

4 Update

This button helps to update & modify the existing record in table. When user double click (left) the record in displayed table to be modified/edited , the concerned record will appear in the fields at the bottom of the screen. The current record in these fields is ready for modification. User can navigate in these fields with Tab / Enter key or with mouse This option is used for modify(update) one record at a time in table. In some tables, this button is used to modify the data.

5

This blank fields shows that the user has to type / enter the data in the field

6

This shaded portion shows that this field is not available to user for entry / typing

7 Delete

Delete Checkbox

This button is checked to delete the currently marked record from the database. When user double click (left)the record in table to be deleted, the concerned record will appear in the fields at the bottom of the screen. By checking this check box, delete button appears on the screen and save

GEMS User Manual

490


button is removed from the screen. The current record in these fields is deleted. This option is used for deleting one record at a time in table. An alert is generated during deletion to get confirmation about deletion from user in the form of Y or N

8 Save

Saves the data entered in the current operation (record) in the table / database.

9 Cancel

This button is used for terminating the current operation and the enter-able fields are initialized with blank or zeros.

10 Exit

For coming out of the current screen. Besides this, the current operation is also terminated.

11 <sub-menu item> This symbol shows that user has to select option/item from the menu available in the screen

12 Proceed

Proceeds for the next operation (Screen) depending on the user’s choice.

13 Refresh

Refreshes the data of current screen.

14 Relocate

Relocates a site to a different location.

15 The scrollable table shows the list of values for the given field. User can use double click left to invoke the details of the record which will be displayed in the screen bottom in appropriate fields

16 Drop down list box This button is used to provide the list of values for the given fields and user can select only one item from the existing listed values

17 The name of the screen is displayed to identify the functionality of the screen.

18 An information alert is shown on screen to get the confirmation from the user in the form of Yes or NO

GEMS User Manual

491


19

Shows the radio button and user can select only one radio button at a time out of various radio buttons shown in the screen

20 Search

User can search for the required information like (Site Name / Site ID / Old Site ID) on the basis of available criteria in the list box.

21 Sort

Sorting means arranging data of any column(one) from a table in sequential order either in ascending or descending order on the basis of certain criteria.

22 Next

User can go to next screen for further processing

23 Back

User can go back to previous screen

24 OK

This button is used to save data which the user has entered on all the tab pages (includes single tab page also) and the appropriate validations of this data is done

25 Tab page This control provides the logical grouping of data under various heads/groups and user can select any of the tab page with mouse click

GEMS User Manual

492

14.2. Appendix - B Estimation of Sy Using Dry Season Groundwater Balancing

Cropping Pattern Data

Sy = (D+B-C)/(A*Z) Where, Sy Specific Yield as a fraction D Base flow (ham) during dry season. B Gross Groundwater Draft for Irrigation Uses during dry season. C Recharge recycled from Groundwater irrigation during dry season. A Area (ha) of the Selected Region. Z Fall in watertable (m) during dry season.

Well-Census Data

Sy = (D+B-C)/(A*Z) Where, Sy Specific Yield D Base flow in ham during dry season B Gross Groundwater Draft for "All Uses" during dry season C Recharge recycled from Groundwater irrigation during dry season. A Area of the sub-unit Z Fall in watertable during dry season. B and C are calculated as follows: B=B1*(N2/N1) C=C1*(N2/N1) Where, B1= Gross Groundwater Draft for "All Uses" during Non-Monsoon season C1 = Recharge from Irrigation water applied by Groundwater irrigation water during non-monsoon season. N2=Number of dry season months N1= Number of non-monsoon months.

Groundwater Draft

Gross Monsoon, Non-Monsoon and Annual Groundwater draft is estimated separately for irrigation, domestic and industrial water supply individually for each available Assessment Sub-Units in a Groundwater Assessment Unit.

GEMS User Manual

493

a. Cropping Pattern Data (Draft for irrigation uses)

Computation of Gross Monsoon, Non-Monsoon and Annual Groundwater Draft are made separately for Irrigation Uses Only. This is based on crop type, their respective Return Flow Factorand irrigated area during a particular season as given below. n ∫ A * ∂ 1 Where, A = Cropping Area under irrigation during a particular season ∂ = Crop-Water Requirement of the crop n = No of Crops

b. Well Census Data

The draft is computed on the basis of types of well, their average gross unit draft and total number of similar wells used for different uses. Estimated gross monsoon groundwater draft for any use = n ∫ D * d * N 1 Where, D = Estimated draft per well of a particular type per day (m3/day) of a particular Use d = Estimated no of days the wells of a particular use operational during a particular Season N = No of wells used of a particular Use n = No of well types of a particular Use

Recharge from Canal-Reaches

n Groundwater Recharge = ∫ A * N * Csf 1 Where A Wetted area of canal segment during a particular season Csf Canal Seepage Factor of the segment of the particular season N No of days the canal-reach in operation during a particular season n No of canal-reaches (Segments)

GEMS User Manual

494

Recharge due to Applied Groundwater irrigation

Well Census Data

Groundwater Recharge (ham) = Applied irrigation water (ham) * RffWeighted (Fraction) Where,

Weighted average of RFF (Return Flow Factor) as a fraction = [RFF (for Paddy) * Irrigated Area (for Paddy) + RFF (for non-Paddy) * Irrigated Area (non-Paddy)] / Total Irrigated area (Paddy and non-Paddy)

Cropping Pattern Data

Groundwater Recharge (ham) = Crop-Water Req (m) * Irrigated Area (ham) * RffWeighted (Fraction)

Recharge due to Applied Surface Water Irrigation

Groundwater Recharge (ham) = Average Discharge of outlet (ham) * No of Running Days * RffWeighted (Fraction) Where, Weighted average of RFF (Return Flow Factor) as a fraction = [RFF (for Paddy) * Irrigated Area (for Paddy) + RFF (for non-Paddy) * Irrigated Area (non-Paddy)] / Total Irrigated area (Paddy and non-Paddy)

Recharge from Tank or Pond

Groundwater Recharge (ham) = Recharge Factor * Avg. water spread Area * Retention period.

Recharge from Water Conservation Structures

Groundwater Recharge (ham) = Recharge Factor * Storage Capacity * Average no of fillings during the Entire Groundwater Assessment year.

GEMS User Manual

495

Recharge from "Other sources"

The total recharge from other sources is calculated as sum of all the components contributing to recharge in an Assessment Sub-Unit of a particular Assessment Unit for a particular Assessment Year. Command Areas: R(Canal)+R(Sw)+ R(Gw)+R(Tank)+R(WCS) Non-Command Areas: R(Gw)+R(Tank)+R(WCS) Poor Gw Quality Area: R(Canal)+R(Sw)+R(Gw)+R(Tank)+R(WCS)

Recharge from Rainfall

Rainfall Infiltration Factor Method (adhoc Norms, GEC’ 97)

Where the Depth To Waterlevel Data is not available, Adhoc Norms Method is used for calculation of recharge from rainfall.

Monsoon Recharge = Area * Normal Monsoon Rainfall * Rainfall Infiltration Factor Non-monsoon Recharge if (Normal Non-Monsoon Rainfall/Normal Annual Rainfall ) < 0.1)

= 0 Else = Area * Normal Non-monsoon Rainfall * Rainfall Infiltration Factor

Watertable Fluctuation Method

Where the Depth To Waterlevel Data is available, Watertable Fluctuation Method is used for calculation of recharge from rainfall. This method calculates the recharge from rainfall using both Adhco norms and Watertable Fluctuation Method and does a rationalization of the estimated Recharge values as given below.

Groundwater storage (ham) = Area (ha) * Watertable fluctuation (m) during a particular season * Sy (fraction)

Normalization and Rationalization of the Estimated Rainfall Recharge

The Recharge for different years is estimated as follows for its use in Normalization. Recharge during a Particular year =

GEMS User Manual

496

Area * Monsoon Watertable fluctuation* Sy + Gross Monsoon Groundwater draft (all uses) - Monsoon Recharge from other sources

Recharge is further rationalized using Percentage Difference of the Recharge estimated using both the Rainfall Infiltration Factor and Watertable Fluctuation Methods. The percent difference (PD) is computed with reference to Rainfall Infiltration Factor method. if PD = -20% to +20% , Rationalized rainfall recharge = Recharge estimated using Watertable Fluctuation Method. if PD = < -20 % Rationalized rainfall recharge = 0.8 * Recharge (estimated using Rainfall Infiltration Factor method) if PD = > 20 % Rationalized rainfall recharge = 1.2 * Recharge (estimated using Rainfall Infiltration Factor method).

Lateral Flow Across Boundary

The inter-watershed is calculated as

Q = ∫ ∫ T i dl dt

1 1 Where T Transmissivity i Hydraulic Conductivity l Length of the segment t No of time intervals

Stream-Aquifer Inter-flow The flow volume is calculated as Q = F * ∫ ∫ (K L W / M )* (H-h) dt ds t s the factor (K L W / M) is the hydraulic conductance of the stream-aquifer interconnection where K hydraulic conductivity of the stream-bed material L Length of the stream-reach M Distance of flow (thickness of river bed) W Stream width H Stream water level

GEMS User Manual

497

h Well water level t No of discrete time intervals s No of segments F Attenuation factor

Where F = 5 Wp (0.5Wp+C) / (5 Wp + 0.5d c)

Wp Wetted parameter of the stream (length of the contact between water and stream bed normal to the flow direction.

d water depth in the stream c saturated thickness of the aquifer below the stream

Vertical Inter-aquifer Flow

Q = ∫ ∫ (H-h)dA dT / C 1 1 Where H Watertable elevation at any discrete time interval h Piezometric elevation at any discrete time interval

C Hydraulic Resistance A Area of the inter-aquifer zone t No of time intervals

Evaporation and Evapotranspiration loss

ETV = ∫t (A1.E +A2ET)dT For no well-defined forest cover areas, ETV = ∫t ((1-β)A1.E +β(A1+A3)ET)dT Where A1 Evaporating area A2 Evapotranspirating area A3 Area with water levelranging from the capillary height to the root-zone depth E Evaporation rate ET Evapotranspirating area β Average forest/canopy fraction

Allocation for Future Domestic and Industrial Uses

Y1 (domestic) in mm = 365* Projected population density at the end of 25 yrs * Measure of dependence on Groundwater to meet the domestic water supply * Domestic per capita water supply requirement/1000

GEMS User Manual

498

Y2 (industrial) in mm =365 * Projected population density at the end of 25 yrs * Measure of dependence on Groundwater to meet the industrial water supply * industrial per capita water supply requirement/1000 Allocation for Domestic and industrial supplies, Y (mm) = Y1 + Y2 Allocation for Domestic and Industrial supplies (ham) = Y * Area/1000

Net Groundwater Available

Annual Groundwater Recharge - Unaccounted Annual Natural Discharge (UAND) Where, Annual Groundwater Recharge = Rainfall + "Other Sources" UAND = 5 % of total annual Groundwater recharge if Watertable fluctuation is used for recharge estimation of monsoon = 10 % of total annual Groundwater recharge if, Rif is used for recharge estimation of monsoon

Net Annual Groundwater Availability for future Irrigation uses

Net Groundwater availability - Annual Groundwater draft for all uses

Stage of Groundwater Development

Annual Groundwater draft for all uses *100 / Net Groundwater availability

Watertable Trend The calculations involve linear regression of average pre-monsoon and post-monsoon water level separately of previous years for estimation of Pre-monsoon and Post-monsoon trends respectively. The Watertable trend is compared with an average State Level Trend tolerance value (Zp ) for characterization as rising or falling or Neither Rising Nor Falling as given below.

If Z < - Zp Watertable is Rising If Z > + Zp Watertable is Falling If - Zp < Z < + Zp Watertable is Neither Rising Nor Falling

GEMS User Manual

499

Categorization

Assessment Sub-Unit is classified into 4 recommended categories for the purpose of establishing the scope for the future groundwater development in them. Where the water level data is not Available, Stage alone is considered for categorization (as in GEC, 84) as shown in the following table.

Stage (Min) Stage (Max) Category 0 70 Safe 70 90 Semi-Critical 90 100 Critical >100 Over-Exploited

Table 9.1 Where water level data is available, stage of the Groundwater development and both the Pre-Monsoon and Post-Monsoon Watertable trend, are considered for categorization.

Stage (Min)

Stage (Max)

Pre-Monsoon Trend

Post-Monsoon Trend Category

0 70 Rising Rising Safe 0 70 Rising Falling Safe 0 70 Falling Rising Safe 0 70 Rising Neither Safe 0 70 Neither Rising Safe 0 70 Falling Neither Safe 0 70 Neither Falling Safe 0 70 Falling Falling Critical 0 70 Neither Neither Safe 70 90 Rising Rising Safe 70 90 Rising Falling Semi-Critical 70 90 Falling Rising Semi-Critical 70 90 Rising Neither Safe 70 90 Neither Rising Safe 70 90 Falling Neither Semi-Critical 70 90 Neither Falling Semi-Critical 70 90 Falling Falling Critical 70 90 Neither Neither Safe 90 100 Rising Rising Semi-Critical 90 100 Rising Falling Critical 90 100 Falling Rising Critical 90 100 Rising Neither Semi-Critical 90 100 Neither Rising Semi-Critical

GEMS User Manual

500

90 100 Falling Neither Critical 90 100 Neither Falling Critical 90 100 Falling Falling Critical 90 100 Neither Neither Critical >100 Rising Rising Critical >100 Rising Falling Critical >100 Falling Rising Critical >100 Rising Neither Critical >100 Neither Rising Critical >100 Falling Neither Critical >100 Neither Falling Critical >100 Falling Falling Over-Exploited >100 Neither Neither Critical

Table 9.2

Additional Potential Resources and Static Resources

Recharge in water logged areas and shallow Watertable conditions = A * Sy * ( 5-D)

Recharge in flood-prone areas = Recharge Factor * N * A/1000

Where, N is No of days area under flood A is the area of the shallow water zone or flood-prone area D is the depth to Waterlevel (m, bgl) in pre-monsoon period in shallow aquifers Sy is the Specific Yield of the aquifer system of the zone of "up to 5 m, bgl."

Static Resources As the estimation is Volumetric, the estimation is made as follows. And the slices are from the zone of no fluctuation of the Watertable.

n = ∫ a * h * Sy 1

where a Area of the slice

h Thickness of the slice Sy Specific Yield of the slice N No of Slices

GEMS User Manual

501

14.3. Appendix - C Annexure –List of Reports, Maps, Contours and Plots in GEMS

1. Artificial recharge report i. Basic Information for Recharge Structures

ii. Daily Data for Artificial Recharge Structure

2. Bore Hole data report i. Maps

1. Site Plan ii. Reports

1. Drill Time Log Table 2. Grain Size Table 3. Results of Geophysical Interpretation 4. Calibrated Litholog - Compromised Log 5. Well assembly Table 6. Gravel Packing Details/Grouting 7. Development details 8. Hydrological test APT 9. Hydrological test SDT 10. Hydrological test Zone test 11. Hydrological test PYT test 12. Final Result Table of APT 13. Final Result Table of SDT 14. HP of the prime mover 15. Miscellaneous information report 16. Basic details 17. Lithological Table 18. List of Sites with DWLR

iii. Plots 1. APT Plot 2. SDT Plot

3. Brochure i. Maps:

1. Geological Map 2. Administrative Map 3. Geomorphological Map

ii. Reports: 1. Geomorphological Table 2. Geological Table

GEMS User Manual

502

4. Event report

i. Contours: 1. Depth To Water Level Map [Drought Event] (Pre-Event) 2. Depth To Water Level Map [Drought Event] (Post-Event)

3. Depth To Water Level Fluctuation Map [Drought Event]

4. Depth To Water Level Map [Earthquake Event] (Pre-

Event) Depth To Water Level Map [Flood Event] (Pre-Event) Depth To Water Level Map [Flood Event] (Post-Event

5. Depth To Water Level Map [Earthquake Event] (Post-Event)

6. Depth To Water Level Fluctuation Map [Earthquake

Event] Depth To Water Level Fluctuation Map [Flood Event]

ii. Reports 1. Drought 2. Earthquake 3. Flood

5. Forecasting report

i. Contours 1. Water Logged Area Map

ii. Reports:

1. Long term trends on selectable period

6. Geophysical report i. Reports

1. Well Logging 2. Recommendation of well construction table (compromised

log info) 7. Ground Water year book

i. Contours 1. Depth To Water Level Trend Map

ii. Reports

1. Distribution of Hydrograph stations in major river basins

GEMS User Manual

503

2. Distribution of Hydrograph stations in major canal command

3. Distribution of Hydrograph stations in different lithogroup

4. Distribution of hydrograph station dug, Pz, area represented

5. Depth to water Table 6. Trend of Water Level 7. Station-wise Rainfall analysis for the year of year book

8. Analysis of Rainfall for the year - Report 9. Analysis of Rainfall for the year and the departure for the

specified period 10. Hydrogeological Details of Well Inventoried 11. Chemical Quality data

iii. Plots

1. Analysis of Rainfall for the year 2. Analysis of Rainfall for the year and the departure for the

specified period

8. Ground Water Exploration report 1. Status of Exploration 2. Details of Well Constructed Table

9. GW Monitoring report

i. Contours 1. Depth To Water Level Map 2. Water Level Fluctuation Map (Pre-Post) 3. Water Level Fluctuation Map (wrt. Selected Period) 4. Water Level Fluctuation Map (Annual) 5. Depth To Water Level Map (Postmonsoon) 6. Depth to Water Level Map (Premonsoon) 7. Water Level Data for Specied Period - Contour

ii. Reports 1. Depth to Water Table nos of Well, DTW Min-Max,

Percent of Well in Various Number 2. Fluctuation and Frequency Distribution From Different

Ranges from One Period to Other 3. Water Level Fluctuation (Pre and Post) for the Selected

Year 4. Fluctuation of Water Level with Mean and Selected Period 5. Status of National Hydrograph Monitoring Stations

GEMS User Manual

504

6. Water Level Data/Fluctuation for the Specified Period 7. Fluctuation of Selected Period with Pre/Post Level 8. Water Level Fluctuation (wrt. Selected Period Mean)-

Report 9. District Wise - Depth to Water Table nos of Well, DTW

Min-Max, Percent of Well in Various Number 10. District Wise - Fluctuation and Frequency Distribution

From Different Ranges from One Period to Other 11. District Wise - Fluctuation of Water Level with Mean and

Selected Period 12. District Wise - Status of National Hydrograph Monitoring

Stations iii. Plots

1. Depth to water Table nos. of well - Plot 2. Fluctuation and frequency distribution from different

ranges from one period to other 3. Fluctuation of water level with mean and Selected period

10. Investigation report

i. Contours 1. Map of Aquifer Properties (Transmissivity) 2. Hydrogeological Map 3. Water Table Elevation Map 4. Water Table Elevation Fluctuation Map (w.r.t. Decadal

Mean) 5. Map of Aquifer Properties (Storativity) 6. Map of Aquifer Properties (Specific Yield) 7. Isohyetal Map 8. Water Table Elevation Map (Postmonsoon) 9. Water Table Elevation Map (Premonsoon) 10. Depth To Water Level Trend Map

ii. Maps

1. Soil Map 2. Land Use Map 3. Site Plan of Exploratory Well 4. Morphometric Analysis Map 5. Map showing Locations of Exploratory Wells 6. Map showing Locations of Tube Wells 7. Geomorphological Map

iii. Reports

1. Hydrometeorological information rainfall

GEMS User Manual

505

2. Meteorological Station Information Table 3. Irrigation Details 4. Hydrogeological Formation-wise Aquifer Properties 5. Pre-Post Fluctuation Table 6. Wells General 7. Soil Table 8. Block at glance 9. Physiographic Units Table 10. Land use Table 11. Water level data of individual Hydrograph 12. Area Under Various Depth Ranges 13. Hydrogeological Details of Well Inventoried 14. Morphometric Analysis Report 15. District At Glance 16. State At Glance 17. Drought Analysis

iv. Plots

1. Hydrometrological Information Rainfall - Plot

11. Miscellaneous

i. Reports 1. Check for Artificial Recharge Structure 2. Check for Hydromet Station 3. Check for Surface Water Sites 4. Check for Well

12. Surface Geophysical reports

1. Surface geophysical

13. Water Quality – Thematic Maps i. Maps

1. Bar Map 2. Pie Map 3. Point Value Map 4. Stiff

14. Water quality reports

i. Contours 1. Contour of Selectable Water Quality Parameters

ii. Plots

GEMS User Manual

506

1. Time Series Plot of Selectable Parameters 2. Longitudinal Plot of Multiple Sites

3. Correlation of a Single Parameter Against Multiple

Parameters for Multiple Site. 4. Correlation of a Single Parameter Against Multiple

Parameters for Single Site 5. Time Series Plot of Single Parameter of Multiple Sites. 6. Depthwise Plot of Multiple Parameter of Single Site. 7. Depth-wise Variation in Quality.

iii. Reports 1. Frequency distribution Table 2. Single sample Water quality basic data analysis Table 3. Multiple sample Water quality basic data analysis Table 4. WQ parameter trend Table

15. Well handing over status

i. Reports 1. Status of handing over 2. Formation-wise wells drilled 3. Area type-wise wells drilled

Ground Water Assessment Reports

1. Details of Assessment Unit i. Location Detail

ii. Type And Characteristics Of Ground Water Assessment Unit

2. Gross Groundwater Draft i. Gross Ground Water Draft Components For Individual Well Types

ii. Gross Unit Draft Per Well iii. Gross Ground Water Draft Components For Irrigation Uses iv. Gross Ground Water Draft Components For Domestic Uses v. Gross Ground Water Draft Components For Industrial Uses

vi. Gross Gw Draft Summary

3. Recharge from Canals i. Location Details Of Different Canal Segments

ii. Wetted Area In Different Canal Segments iii. Canal Seepage Factor For Different Canal Segments iv. Recharge From Canals v. Summary Of Recharge From Canal

GEMS User Manual

507

4. Recharge from Applied Surface Water Irrigation Water i. Location Details Of All Outlets

ii. Irrigation Water Applied By Surface Water Irrigation iii. Water Table Data iv. Irrigated Area Under Paddy And Non-Paddy v. Return Flow Factor From Applied Surface Water Irrigation

vi. Recharge From Irrigation Water vii. Summary Of Ground Water Recharge From Surface Water Irrigation

5. Recharge from Applied Groundwater Irrigation Water

i. Irrigation Water Applied By Ground Water Irrigation ii. Water Table Data

iii. Irrigated Area Under Groundwater Irrigation iv. Return Flow Factor From Applied Ground Water Irrigation v. Recharge From Applied Groundwater Irrigation

vi. Summary Of Ground Water Recharge From Ground Water Irrigation 6. Recharge from Tanks and Ponds

i. Location Details Of Tanks And Ponds ii. Recharge From Tanks And Ponds

iii. Summary Of Recharge From Tanks And Ponds

7. Recharge from Water Conservation Structures i. Location Details Of Water Conservation Structures

ii. Recharge From Water Conservation Structures iii. Summary Of Recharge From Water Conservation Structures

8. Rainfall Recharge by Rainfall Infiltration Factor Method

i. Location and Rainfall Details of Raingauge Stations ii. Normal Rainfall During Monsoon and Non-Monsoon Season

iii. Rainfall Infiltration Factor iv. Rainfall Recharge

9. Rainfall Recharge by Water Table Fluctuation Method

i. Specific Yield ii. Rainfall Recharge During Monsoon Season Using Regression Method

- I iii. Corrected Rainfall Recharge During Monsoon Season iv. Estimation Of Specific Yield By Dry Season Ground Water Balance

Method v. Summary Recharge From Rainfall

vi. Rainfall During Monsoon Season Of Current Assessment Year vii. Water Table Fluctuation During Monsoon Season

GEMS User Manual

508

viii. Ground Water Balance Computations During Monsoon Season ix. Rainfall Recharge During Monsoon Season Using Regression Method

- II x. Summary Of Recharge From Rainfall

10. Water Table Trend

i. Plot Of Variation Of Depth To Water Table With Successive Years ii. Water Table Trend During Pre-Monsoon Interval

iii. Water Table Trend During Post-Monsoon Interval iv. Location And Depth To Water Table Data v. Water Table Information - Successive Previous Years (Well-wise)

vi. Water Table Information - Successive Previous Years

11. Summary of groundwater resources estimation i. Recharge From Other Sources

ii. Net Annual Ground Water Availability iii. Categorisation iv. Summary Of Annual Groundwater Allocation v. Net Annual Ground Water Availability For Future Irrigation Use

vi. Summary Of Resources Available In Assessment Unit vii. Stage Of Groundwater Development

viii. Annual Groundwater Allocation For Domestic And Industrial Uses

12. Additional potential resources i. Static Ground Water Resource

ii. Potential Recharge In Each Ground Water Assessment Unit iii. Summary Of Additional Potential Recharge And Static Resource

13. Apportioning

i. Locational Details Of Administrative Unit ii. Net Annual Ground Water Availability

iii. Annual Gross Ground Waterdraft For Irrigation iv. Water Table Trend v. Summary

vi. Annual Gross Ground Water Draft For All Uses vii. Annual Groundwater Allocation For Domestic And Industrial

Water Supply

14. Summary of individual groundwater balancing components i. Basic Information For Ground Water Resource Assessment

ii. Gross Groundwater Draft iii. Groundwater Recharge From Tanks And Ponds

GEMS User Manual

509

iv. Ground Water Recharge From Water Conservation Structures v. Ground Water Recharge Due To Surface water Irrigation

vi. Ground Water Recharge Components vii. Stage Of Ground Water Development

viii. Static Ground Water Reserve ix. Summary Of Assessment x. Ground Water Recharge Due To Canals

xi. Ground Water Recharge Due To Ground Water Irrigation xii. Ground Water Recharge Due To Rainfall

xiii. Additional Potential Recharge Under Specific Conditions

15. Thematic maps i. Static Resources

ii. Groundwater Draft iii. Recharge From Canal iv. Recharge From Applied Surface Water Irrigation v. Recharge From Applied Groundwater Irrigation

vi. Recharge From Rainfall vii. Recharge From Waterlogged And Shallow Wt Areas

viii. Water Table Trend ix. Categorization x. Recharge From Flood Prone Areas

xi. Recharge From Tank And Pond xii. Recharge From Water Conservation Structures

xiii. Net Annual Groundwater Available xiv. Stage Of Groundwater Development

Analysis

1. Geophysics

i. Electrical/ Induced Polarization/ Sounding/ Schlumberger ii. Electrical/ Induced Polarization/ Sounding/ Wenner

iii. Electrical/ Induced Polarization/ Profiling/ Schlumberger iv. Electrical/ Induced Polarization/ Profiling/ Wenner v. Electrical/ Miss-e-La-Masse/ Profiling

vi. Electrical/ Resistivity/ Sounding/ DD-Azimuthal vii. Electrical/ Resistivity/ Sounding/ DD-Equatorial

viii. Electrical/ Resistivity/ Sounding/ DD-Parallel ix. Electrical/ Resistivity/ Sounding/ DD-Perpendicular x. Electrical/ Resistivity/ Sounding/ DD-Radial

GEMS User Manual

510

xi. Electrical/ Resistivity/ Sounding/ Half-Schlumberger xii. Electrical/Resistivity/ Sounding/ Lee-Partitioning

xiii. Electrical/ Resistivity/ Sounding/ Schlumberger xiv. Electrical/ Resistivity/ Sounding/ Wenner xv. Electrical/ Resistivity/ Profiling/ Lee-Partitioning

xvi. Electrical/ Resistivity/ Profiling/ Schlumberger xvii. Electrical/ Resistivity/ Profiling/ Wenner

xviii. Magnetic/ Profiling xix. Electromagnetic/ VLF/ Profiling xx. Electromagnetic/ HLEM/ Profiling

xxi. Electromagnetic/ HLEM/ Sounding xxii. Seismic/ Reflection/ Profiling

xxiii. Seismic/ Refraction/ Profiling

2. Water Level i. Hydrograph

a. Single Well Hydrograph I. Manual

II. DWLR III. Both

i. Average ii. Minimum

iii. Maximum iv. Total

b. Multiple Well Hydrograph

ii. Hydrograph Analysis c. Single Well

I. Manual i. Lag Time Analysis

ii. Rainfall Events iii. Rainfall Effect on water level trend

II. DWLR i. Lag Time Analysis

ii. Rainfall Events iii. Rainfall Effect on water level trend

3. Well Log i. Drill Time Log

ii. Litholog iii. Well Design iv. Discharge

GEMS User Manual

511

v. Water Bearing Zones vi. Geophysical Logs

a. Resistivity / Short Normal b. Resistivity / Long Normal c. Resistivity / Lateral d. Self Potential e. Single Point Resistance f. Natural Gamma Radioactivity g. Temperature h. Differential Temperature i. Fluid Conductivity j. Caliper k. Neutron Log

vii. Compromised Log

4. Water Quality

i. Schoeller ii. Piper

iii. Durov iv. US Salinity v. Wilcox

vi. Collins’ Bar vii. Pie

viii. Vector ix. Stiff

5. Grain Size Analysis

i. Cumulative Percent Weight Finer vs Grain Size ii. Cumulative Percent Weight Retained vs Grain Size

6. Rainfall

i. Rainfall, Wind Velocity vs Time ii. Rainfall vs Wind Velocity

iii. Rainfall, Temperature, Humidity vs Time

GEMS User Manual

512

A Adhoc Map Query

Group by Columns ..................................................................................................... 375 Mappable.................................................................................................................... 377 Oracle query ............................................................................................................... 375 Order by Columns ...................................................................................................... 375 Ordered for sorting..................................................................................................... 375 respecify ..................................................................................................................... 378

Adhoc Oracle Query Password ...................................................................................... 17, 46, 47, 51, 52, 381 user Name............................................................................................................... 51, 52

Adhoc Reports Filters and Joins.......................................................................................................... 391 Selection of Fields.......................................................................................... 26, 27, 390

Adhoc Thematic Map Ignore Zeroes or Blanks .......................................................................................... 384 Ordering of Legends .................................................................................................. 385

Administration Level 0.......................................................................................................................... 48 Machine ID............................................................................................................. 46, 48 User ID ................................................................................................. 46, 47, 51, 52, 53 User level ..................................................................................................................... 51

Analysis- Grain Size Analysis Grain Size........................... 64, 66, 67, 89, 140, 156, 338, 398, 439, 440, 441, 500, 510 Grain Size Analysis........................................................ 67, 89, 338, 398, 439, 441, 510 Percent Weight Finer.......................................................................................... 439, 510 Percent Weight Retained.............................................................. 90, 439, 440, 441, 510

Analysis- Hydrograph Analysis Hydrograph Analysis ......................................................................................... 427, 509 Lag Time Analysis ............................................................................................. 428, 509 Rainfall Events ................................................................................................... 431, 509

Analysis-Hydrograph Hydrograph ................ 319, 343, 344, 346, 351, 425, 426, 427, 487, 501, 502, 504, 509 Hydrograph For Single Well ...................................................................................... 426 Monsoon Rainfall............................................................................................... 114, 494 Multiple Well Hydrograph......................................................................................... 509 Non-monsoon Rainfall ............................................................................................... 494 Trend of Water Level ......................................................................................... 344, 502 Water Level . 13, 43, 68, 75, 77, 80, 81, 82, 83, 143, 144, 155, 156, 166, 169, 187, 188,

189, 190, 191, 194, 249, 252, 259, 290, 305, 306, 315, 319, 341, 342, 343, 345, 346,

GEMS User Manual

513

347, 349, 397, 398, 425, 427, 429, 444, 453, 456, 457, 464, 465, 467, 468, 469, 471, 501, 503, 509

Analysis-Rainfall Rainfall vs Wind Velocity.......................................................................... 442, 443, 510 Rainfall, Temperature, Humidity vs Time ................................................. 442, 443, 510 Rainfall, Wind Velocity vs Time ............................................................... 442, 443, 510

Analysis-Water Quality Durov.......................................................................................................... 436, 438, 510 Pie............................................................................................... 354, 436, 438, 504, 510 Piper ........................................................................................................... 436, 438, 510 Schoeller..................................................................................................... 436, 438, 510 Single sample ..................................................................................................... 355, 505 Stiff............................................................................................. 354, 436, 438, 504, 510 US Salinity ................................................................................................. 436, 438, 510 Vector ................................................................................................. 322, 436, 438, 510 Wilcox ........................................................................................................ 436, 438, 510

Analysis-Well Logs Geophysical Logs....................................................................................................... 510 Litholog ... 41, 67, 70, 143, 144, 147, 148, 151, 152, 157, 158, 293, 294, 306, 307, 339,

370, 372, 500, 509 Template for Geophysical Logs ................................................................................. 435 Template for Well Logs ............................................................................................. 434 Water Bearing Zones...... 67, 71, 145, 146, 147, 148, 151, 152, 157, 158, 476, 477, 510 Well Design................................................................................................ 444, 476, 509

D Dynamic Data - Artificial Recharge Structure

Source of Water.......................................................................................................... 169 Stage................................... 166, 169, 274, 275, 317, 319, 368, 369, 497, 498, 507, 508 Water Level ... 43, 76, 188, 253, 290, 291, 292, 306, 307, 315, 319, 320, 325, 351, 467,

504 Dynamic Data - Hydromet Station

Daily Data .......................................................................................................... 176, 461 Hydromet Station ....................................................................................................... 442 Manual................................................................ 166, 174, 186, 345, 346, 347, 351, 509 Monthly Data ............................................................................................................. 462 No of Sunshine Hours ........................................................................................ 114, 179 Relative Humidity ...................................................................................................... 350 Trend for Rainfall....................................................................................................... 181

Dynamic Data - Well Activity......................................................................................................... 70, 168, 187 Automated Dynamic Data for Well ........................................................................... 191 Bgl .............................................................................................................................. 188

GEMS User Manual

514

Depth to Water Table Data ................................................................................ 186, 187 Dynamic Data for Well ...................................................................................... 186, 187 Time shift ................................................................................................................... 194 Water level data......................................................................................................... 188 Water Level shift........................................................................................................ 194

Dynamic Data-Well Batch .................................................................................................. 195, 197, 198, 199 Insitu........................................................................................................................... 191 Iris .............................................................................................................................. 191 Msqr ........................................................................................................................... 191 Time shift ................................................................................................................... 194 Water Level shift........................................................................................................ 194

F File

Adapted Method of Exploration........................................................................... 12, 255 Landscape....................................................................................................................... 6 logoff ............................................................................................................................ 20 Master data ................................................................................................................... 11 Number of copies ....................................................................................................... 7, 8 Portrait............................................................................................................................ 6 Saving current Window.................................................................................................. 1 Surfer...................................................................................................................... 10, 13 Time series Data........................................................................................................... 11

File-View 1

250000...................................................................................................................... 20 50000........................................................................................................................ 20

Blue color ..................................................................................................................... 23 Calculator ..................................................................................................................... 20 Logfile .......................................................................................................................... 17 SPSS software .............................................................................................................. 21

G Geophysical Exploration

Agency ......................................................................... 34, 36, 37, 63, 86, 112, 139, 214 Apparent Resistivity................................................................................................... 217 Date of exploration..................................................................................................... 214 Del V .................................................................................................. 217, 224, 225, 239 Electrical ... 204, 215, 216, 217, 218, 219, 220, 221, 222, 224, 225, 226, 227, 228, 229,

230, 231, 232, 233, 234, 235, 236, 237, 239, 399, 400, 403, 405, 407, 409, 410, 411, 412, 413, 414, 415, 416, 417, 418, 419, 420, 421, 508, 509

GEMS User Manual

515

Electricity ................................................................................................................... 213 Electrode Configuration ............................................................................................. 215 Electro-magnetic ........................................................................................................ 215 Frequency........................................................... 241, 252, 254, 337, 349, 351, 355, 505 Geology ................................................ 64, 127, 140, 214, 306, 307, 348, 350, 352, 485 Gradient...................................................................................................................... 216 Gravity........................................................................................................................ 213 Inphase ....................................................................................................................... 241 Instrument .............................................................................................. 86, 96, 101, 214 Interpretation ...................................................... 246, 338, 418, 420, 421, 422, 423, 500 Magnetic..................................................................... 215, 216, 239, 399, 422, 423, 509 Magnetism.................................................................................................................. 213 Orientation.............................................................................................................. 8, 217 Profiling..... 214, 215, 216, 217, 218, 219, 221, 222, 224, 226, 227, 228, 229, 230, 231,

232, 233, 234, 235, 236, 237, 239, 240, 241, 242, 243, 244, 399, 405, 407, 409, 419, 420, 421, 422, 423, 424, 508, 509

Quadrature.................................................................................................. 241, 268, 424 r 231, 241, 242, 261, 262, 494 Reflection ................................................................................... 216, 244, 399, 424, 509 Refraction........................................................................................... 216, 244, 399, 509 Resistance........................................................... 217, 218, 225, 231, 255, 313, 496, 510 Resistivity.... 86, 216, 217, 218, 224, 225, 226, 227, 228, 229, 230, 231, 232, 233, 234,

235, 236, 255, 399, 402, 403, 404, 405, 406, 408, 410, 411, 412, 413, 414, 415, 416, 417, 418, 419, 420, 421, 422, 424, 508, 509, 510

RL of the GL .............................................................................................................. 214 Schlumberger .... 215, 216, 219, 220, 221, 229, 230, 231, 232, 234, 235, 236, 399, 400,

405, 415, 417, 420, 508, 509 Seismic ............................................................................... 213, 215, 216, 244, 399, 509 Sounding ... 214, 215, 216, 217, 218, 219, 220, 221, 222, 224, 226, 227, 228, 229, 230,

231, 232, 233, 234, 235, 236, 237, 239, 240, 242, 243, 244, 399, 400, 403, 410, 411, 412, 413, 414, 415, 416, 417, 418, 508, 509

Theta........................................................................................................................... 225 Wenner ...... 215, 216, 218, 219, 221, 222, 232, 233, 234, 236, 237, 399, 403, 407, 418,

421, 508, 509 GIS Reports

Automatic................................................................... 345, 346, 347, 351, 369, 370, 372 Cross Section.............................................................................................................. 373 Fence Diagram ........................................................................................................... 371 In the Map .................................................................................................. 370, 371, 373 Lithological data of wells........................................................................................... 370 Out the Map................................................................................................ 370, 371, 373

Groundwater Assessment Additional Potential Resources .......................................................................... 368, 507

GEMS User Manual

516

Apportioning data....................................................................................................... 310 Assessment Unit................................................................................... 42, 274, 363, 450 Assessment Year ........................................................................ 318, 320, 321, 364, 493 Average Depth of flow............................................................................................... 292 Average Forest/Canopy Fraction ............................................................................... 316 Average Water-spread Area....................................................................................... 300 Base Flow and Area ................................................................................................... 290 Beginning and End Of Dry Season ............................................................................ 290 Command ............................... 23, 63, 126, 139, 274, 276, 277, 280, 286, 307, 363, 494 Command and Poor Groundwater Quality regions.................................................... 280 Computation of Recharge .......................................................................................... 285 Compute From Map data ................................................................................... 318, 319 Crop Names from Map............................................................................................... 283 Domestic or Industrial................................................................................................ 281 Dry Season Groundwater Balancing method............................................................. 286 Effective Depth of Estimation............................................................................ 306, 307 evapotranspiration ...................................................... 316, 317, 318, 320, 321, 322, 496 Evapotranspiration ..................................................... 316, 317, 318, 320, 321, 322, 496 GIS based analysis ............................. 275, 278, 285, 293, 298, 300, 303, 305, 306, 310 groundwater balancing components................................................................... 276, 324 groundwater draft ............................................................................................... 491, 497 groundwater possibility map .............................................................................. 275, 276 Hardrock terrains........................................................................................................ 286 Hydraulic conductivity............................................................................................... 312 irrigation water ........................................................................................................... 491 lateral flow ................................................................................................................. 314 Monsoon and Non-Monsoon...... 281, 284, 285, 296, 298, 299, 300, 301, 311, 367, 506 Multivariate regression analysis................................................................................. 274 Normalized data ......................................................................................................... 291 Regression with a constant......................................................................................... 318 Resources Development and Analysis ............................................... 274, 276, 322, 323 Saturated Thickness of Aquifer.................................................................................. 315 static resources ................................................................................................... 306, 307 Static Resources ................................................................................................. 306, 307 Storage Capacity .......................................................................................................... 94 Tanks and Ponds ................................................................................................ 299, 300 Topographic map ....................................................................................................... 323 transmissivity ............................................................................. 312, 347, 350, 495, 503 Vertical Extension of Aquifer ............................................................................ 306, 307 Water Conservation structures ................................................................................... 302 Watertable Trend................................................................................................ 497, 498 Wetted Perimeter................................................................................................ 293, 294 Year of Construction .......................................................................... 300, 301, 303, 304

GEMS User Manual

517

Groundwater Assessment Reports Additional potential resources............................................................................ 368, 507 Apportioning ...................................................................................... 309, 310, 368, 507 Assessment Unit................................................................................... 42, 274, 363, 450 Assessment Year ........................................................................ 318, 320, 321, 364, 493 Details of Assessment Unit ................................................................................ 366, 505 Irrigation Use ............................................................................................................. 497 Recharge from Canals ........................................................................................ 366, 505 Recharge from Tanks and Ponds........................................................................ 367, 506 Sub Unit ..................................................................................................................... 363 Summary of groundwater resources estimation................................................. 368, 507 Summary of individual groundwater balancing components............................. 369, 507 Thematic Map of Groundwater Draft ........................................................................ 365 Thematic maps ................................................................................................... 368, 508

M Masters-Lab Details

Analysis Method .................................................................................................. 35, 210 Lab ID .......................................................................................................................... 34

Masters-Monsoon Details Assessment Unit Type................................................................................................ 450 Monitoring Months ...................................................................................................... 43 Pre Dominant Monsoon ............................................................................................... 42 Presentation Unit Type................................................................................................. 42 State Name ................................................................................................................... 42 Water Level Trend ....................................................................................................... 43

Masters-View Export ........................................................................................... 10, 11, 12, 14, 28, 394 Selection of fields section .................................................................................... 26, 391 Selection section................................................... 26, 329, 335, 337, 357, 388, 391, 395

Masters-Village Area of the Village ....................................................................................................... 30 Village ID..................................................................................................................... 30

Masters-Watershed Watershed ID ............................................................................................................... 38

R Reports and Query-Reports

Artificial recharge report.................................................................................... 338, 500 Bore Hole data Report................................................................................................ 338 Brochure............................................................................................................. 340, 500 Date Selection section ................................................................................................ 337

GEMS User Manual

518

Event report ........................................................................................................ 341, 501 Forecasting report............................................................................................... 342, 501 Geophysical report ..................................................................................... 343, 501, 504 Ground Water year book.................................................................................... 343, 501 GW Monitoring report ....................................................................................... 345, 502 Investigation Report ................................................................................................... 503 Main Selection Area........................................................................... 329, 358, 388, 396 Miscellaneous..................................................................................... 340, 353, 500, 504 Surface Geophysical........................................................................................... 353, 504 Water quality reports.......................................................................................... 354, 504 Well handing over status.................................................................................... 356, 505

S Site-Artificial Recharge Structure

Activity......................................................................................................... 70, 168, 187 Administrative Boundaries.. 59, 102, 103, 110, 112, 113, 123, 127, 128, 136, 160, 161,

278, 279 Area Capacity Curve ........................................................................................ 62, 94, 99 Area of microwatershed ............................................................................. 92, 93, 98, 99 Bedrock ........................................................................................................................ 71 Bit size.......................................................................................................................... 69 Bore .............................. 66, 145, 146, 150, 159, 202, 203, 211, 338, 446, 448, 449, 500 cement plug ................................................................................................ 57, 59, 62, 97 Command ............................... 23, 63, 126, 139, 274, 276, 277, 280, 286, 307, 363, 494 Compute ....................................................................... 90, 312, 313, 314, 315, 318, 319 Construction Depth .................................................................................................... 476 Date for conducting...................................................................................................... 89 Depth of Casing............................................................................................................ 72 Development Details .......................................................................................... 339, 500 Diameter ....................................................... 73, 77, 82, 93, 99, 143, 144, 211, 446, 477 Drainage Density........................................................................................................ 349 General .... 30, 38, 39, 42, 43, 59, 60, 102, 122, 123, 124, 128, 135, 136, 137, 160, 182,

184, 202, 203, 205, 271, 350, 351, 352, 504 Geographic Location.................................................................... 60, 112, 124, 137, 279 Graph... 84, 178, 181, 190, 191, 194, 195, 196, 197, 198, 199, 252, 253, 254, 256, 259,

262, 410, 420, 421, 422, 423, 424 Height of Casing .......................................................................................................... 72 Height of Gauge ..................................................................................... 94, 95, 100, 101 Hydrogeology................................. 59, 63, 102, 122, 126, 128, 135, 139, 160, 350, 352 Hydrology ..... 59, 62, 102, 122, 125, 128, 135, 138, 160, 328, 330, 335, 357, 359, 361,

387, 389 injection well .......................................................................................................... 57, 59 Instrument .............................................................................................. 86, 96, 101, 214

GEMS User Manual

519

Litholog ... 41, 67, 70, 143, 144, 147, 148, 151, 152, 157, 158, 293, 294, 306, 307, 339, 370, 372, 500, 509

Location..... 37, 38, 59, 61, 102, 105, 109, 110, 112, 117, 122, 123, 124, 128, 130, 135, 136, 137, 160, 163, 251, 258, 260, 278, 279, 366, 367, 368, 505, 506, 507

Method of Analysis ...................................................................................................... 81 Nearest Raingauge Station ........................................................................................... 63 Order of the Stream................................................................................................ 91, 97 perimeter .................................................................................................... 293, 294, 295 Pumping ..................... 64, 66, 80, 82, 140, 142, 144, 145, 147, 150, 156, 211, 479, 480 Recovery .............................................................................................................. 80, 152 Result........................................................................................ 81, 82, 83, 339, 355, 500 Result of Analysis ............................................................................................ 81, 82, 83 RL of GL .............................................................................................................. 94, 100 Sample Details ........................................................................................................... 355 Standard........................ 90, 247, 252, 255, 261, 262, 439, 440, 453, 456, 457, 462, 480 Storage capacity ........................................................................................................... 94 Structure Id................................................................................................... 61, 102, 103 Structure Lies In........................................................................................................... 63 Structure Name....................................................................... 61, 65, 102, 103, 303, 304 Sub Type ...................................................... 59, 135, 136, 168, 192, 440, 441, 446, 447 Surface Elevation ......................................................................................... 62, 125, 138 Temperature ....................... 75, 77, 82, 85, 114, 141, 179, 188, 189, 191, 204, 212, 510 Topography ........................................ 59, 61, 94, 99, 102, 122, 124, 128, 135, 137, 160 Toposheet Number ....................................................................................... 60, 124, 137 Tube............................................................................ 156, 202, 203, 349, 446, 449, 503 Validations 60, 62, 68, 69, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 80, 81, 82, 83, 85, 89, 91, 93, 94,

95, 97, 100, 101, 111, 113, 114, 123, 125, 136, 138, 139, 141, 143, 146, 148, 152, 153, 155, 179, 202, 204, 205, 206, 207, 208, 211, 214, 218, 444, 458, 469, 476, 480

Water level .... 43, 76, 188, 253, 290, 291, 292, 306, 307, 315, 319, 320, 325, 351, 467, 504

Well Assembly ................................................................................................... 339, 500 Well Id........................................................................................................................ 160

Site-Hydromet Altitude....................................................................................................................... 112 Area of Influence........................................................................................................ 112 Area Type........................................................................................................... 356, 505 Date of Establishment ................................................................................................ 112 Hydromet Station ....................................................................................................... 442 Monsoon.. 42, 43, 44, 114, 249, 278, 279, 281, 284, 285, 290, 291, 293, 294, 296, 298,

299, 300, 301, 311, 319, 344, 346, 350, 365, 367, 368, 491, 492, 494, 495, 498, 506, 507

Monthly .............................................. 115, 176, 177, 249, 344, 345, 350, 460, 461, 462 No of Sunshine Hours ........................................................................................ 114, 179

GEMS User Manual

520

Relative Humidity ...................................................................................................... 350 Temperature ....................... 75, 77, 82, 85, 114, 141, 179, 188, 189, 191, 204, 212, 510

Site-Surface Water Site Command ............................... 23, 63, 126, 139, 274, 276, 277, 280, 286, 307, 363, 494 Distance to Bench Mark............................................................................... 62, 125, 138 General .... 30, 38, 39, 42, 43, 59, 60, 102, 122, 123, 124, 128, 135, 136, 137, 160, 182,

184, 202, 203, 205, 271, 350, 351, 352, 504 Selection of Surface Water Sites................................................ 121, 127, 128, 129, 133 Surface Elevation of GL............................................................................... 62, 125, 138 Topography ........................................ 59, 61, 94, 99, 102, 122, 124, 128, 135, 137, 160

Site-Surface Water Sites Surface Water Sites .............................................................................. 19, 121, 353, 504

Site-Well bore well............................................................................................. 134, 135, 150, 191 Circular............................................................................................................... 144, 446 Command ............................... 23, 63, 126, 139, 274, 276, 277, 280, 286, 307, 363, 494 Cost of Material.......................................................................................................... 152 Depth of Transducers ......................................................................................... 155, 156 Depth of Well ..................................................................................................... 143, 146 Development Details .......................................................................................... 339, 500 Discharge 68, 76, 77, 82, 83, 84, 141, 149, 295, 296, 300, 301, 480, 482, 493, 497, 509 Disposition ................................................................................................................. 146 Distance to Bench Mark............................................................................... 62, 125, 138 dug cum bore well ...................................................................................... 134, 135, 145 dug well .............................................................................. 134, 135, 143, 202, 344, 446 exploratory ................................................................. 134, 135, 150, 151, 156, 157, 349 General .... 30, 38, 39, 42, 43, 59, 60, 102, 122, 123, 124, 128, 135, 136, 137, 160, 182,

184, 202, 203, 205, 271, 350, 351, 352, 504 Grainsize Analysis ............................................................................................. 439, 441 Height of Measuring Point ................................................................................. 138, 188 Land Use ............................................................................................................ 351, 504 Litholog ... 41, 67, 70, 143, 144, 147, 148, 151, 152, 157, 158, 293, 294, 306, 307, 339,

370, 372, 500, 509 Nearest Rain gauge Station ........................................................................................ 139 observation .... 80, 81, 134, 135, 150, 151, 154, 156, 157, 283, 291, 292, 297, 311, 321,

322, 480 Observation Well ....................................................................................... 291, 312, 322 piezometer .................................................................................. 134, 135, 150, 156, 349 Rectangular ........................................................................................................ 144, 447 slim hole ............................................................................................. 134, 135, 147, 349 spring.......................................................................................................... 134, 135, 142 Surface Elevation of GL............................................................................... 62, 125, 138 Temperature ....................... 75, 77, 82, 85, 114, 141, 179, 188, 189, 191, 204, 212, 510

GEMS User Manual

521

Topography ........................................ 59, 61, 94, 99, 102, 122, 124, 128, 135, 137, 160 Total Cost of Well ...................................................................................................... 152 tube well ..................................................................................... 134, 135, 156, 191, 349 Well Assembly ................................................................................................... 339, 500 Well Specific Details.................................................................................................. 140 Zone Test............................................................................................................ 339, 500

Statistics Adapted Method of Exploration........................................................................... 12, 255 Analysis of Geophysical Parameters.......................................................................... 255 Analysis of Rainfall Vs Frequency ............................................................................ 254 Analysis of Water Level Vs Frequency ..................................................................... 252 Apparent Resistivity................................................................................................... 217 Auto regression .......................................................................................... 257, 260, 263 Autocorrelation .................................................................................. 261, 262, 267, 268 Autocorrelogram ........................................................................................................ 267 Correlation.......................................................................................... 269, 270, 354, 505 Cross amplitude and Gain .......................................................................................... 268 Curve estimation ........................................................................................................ 264 Curve Estimation procedure....................................................................................... 264 Data Editor ................................................................................................................. 272 dynamic data ...................................................................................................... 166, 174 Harmonic analysis ...................................................................................................... 267 Hydromet Station ....................................................................................................... 442 Labels ......................................................................................................................... 253 Linear regression........................................................................................................ 264 linear trend ................................................................................................................. 259 Mean................... 247, 252, 255, 261, 262, 272, 345, 348, 350, 453, 456, 457, 462, 503 Median................................................................................................................ 247, 272 Missing value Computation ....................................................................................... 271 Periodogram ............................................................................................................... 268 Post-Monsoon ...................................................................................................... 43, 497 Pre-Monsoon .................................................................. 42, 43, 306, 307, 317, 356, 497 Range.................. 7, 8, 176, 179, 180, 188, 214, 247, 426, 443, 453, 456, 457, 464, 467 Regression Analysis ................................................................................... 264, 318, 319 Reliability Analysis .................................................................................................... 268 Resistance........................................................... 217, 218, 225, 231, 255, 313, 496, 510 Selection Criteria336, 338, 339, 340, 341, 342, 343, 344, 345, 346, 347, 348, 350, 351,

352, 354, 355, 356, 364 Spectral Analysis........................................................................................................ 265 statistical..................................................................................... 251, 252, 272, 444, 453 Test of Stationarity............................................................................................. 269, 270 Variance ............................................................................................. 247, 261, 262, 350

GEMS User Manual

522

V Validation-Map

Validation of Data through Map ................................................................................ 484 Validation-Primary

Rectangular ........................................................................................................ 144, 447 Validation for Well Dimension.................................................................................. 445

Validation-Secondary Depth to Water Level (Automated)............................................................ 459, 470, 474 Depth to Water Level (Manual) ................................................................. 459, 470, 474 Diameter of Suction Pipe ............................................................................... 77, 82, 477 First assembly............................................................................................................. 476 Housing .............................................................................................................. 476, 477 Spatial......................................... 275, 276, 453, 455, 457, 464, 465, 466, 468, 469, 487 Spatial Validation for Water Level .................................................................... 455, 466 Statistical option......................................................................................................... 453 Suspected............................ 453, 456, 457, 463, 464, 467, 468, 471, 472, 473, 474, 475

Validation-Visual Data Hydrograph ................ 319, 343, 344, 346, 351, 425, 426, 427, 487, 501, 502, 504, 509

W Water Quality

Add Purging Data............................................................................................... 203, 210 Analysis method................................................................................................... 35, 210 Anions ................................................................................................ 203, 206, 208, 209 Avg. SWL .................................................................................................................. 211 Biological and Bacteriological Parameters ........................................................ 203, 207 Boron.......................................................................................................................... 208 Ca2+............................................................................................................................. 206 Calculated........................................................................... 203, 208, 209, 217, 225, 240 Calculated TDS .......................................................................................................... 209 Cations........................................................................................................ 203, 205, 209 Chlorophyll-A ............................................................................................................ 207 Cl- ............................................................................................................................... 206 CO3

2- ......................................................................................................................... 206 Concentration ............................................................................................................. 210 Container .................................................................................................................... 202 Drinking ............................................................................................. 201, 350, 351, 352 F- 207 Field DO..................................................................................................................... 204 Field EC ..................................................................................................................... 204 Field Parameters................................................................................................. 203, 204 General Parameters ............................................................................................ 203, 205

GEMS User Manual

523

HCO3- ......................................................................................................................... 206

Industrial ............................ 201, 274, 276, 308, 309, 365, 366, 368, 496, 497, 505, 507 interpretation ...................................................... 246, 338, 418, 420, 421, 422, 423, 500 Irrigation...... 63, 126, 139, 201, 274, 276, 281, 295, 350, 351, 352, 365, 366, 367, 368,

369, 491, 492, 493, 497, 504, 505, 506, 507, 508 K+ ............................................................................................................................... 206 Mg2+ ........................................................................................................................... 206 Na+.............................................................................................................................. 206 Nitrate as Nitrogen ..................................................................................................... 208 Other Parameters ........................................................................................ 203, 210, 212 Others ................................................................................................................. 203, 207 parameters ...................................... 34, 35, 203, 207, 210, 212, 213, 249, 354, 504, 505 Pesticides.................................................................................................................... 203 PO4

3- ........................................................................................................................... 207 Purging Data............................................................................................... 203, 210, 212 S- 207, 264 Sample Details ........................................................................................................... 355 Sample ID given by Lab ............................................................................................ 202 samples ............................................................................................................... 201, 212 Sampling Source ................................................................................................ 201, 203 Silica................................................................................................................... 208, 209 Slim Hole ................................................................................................................... 345 SO4

2- ........................................................................................................................... 206 Trace elements ................................................................................................... 203, 355 Water Quality ............................................................................... 78, 354, 355, 504, 505 Well Assembly ................................................................................................... 339, 500 Well Diameter for tube............................................................................................... 211

Documents

Table of Contents - Maharashtra€¦ · The borehole-logging methods include Caliper, Fluid conductivity, Resistivity (Lateral, Long-Normal, Short-Normal), Single Resistance, Self-Potential,